Check Point SecurePlatform Command Referencedownloads.checkpoint.com/.../direct/ID/6003/FILE/SPLAT_Commands.pdf · VPN-1 SmallOffice, and VPN-1 VSX are trademarks or registered trademarks

Check Point SecurePlatformCommand Reference

. . .

. .

© 2003 Check Point Sof tware Technologies Ltd . All rights reserved. Check Point, the Check Point logo, Application Intelligence, ClusterXL, ConnectControl,FireWall-1, FireWall-1 GX, FireWall-1 SecureServer, FireWall-1 SmallOffice, FireWall-1 VSX, FireWall-1 XL, FloodGate-1, INSPECT, INSPECT XL, IQ Engine, Open Security Extension, OPSEC, OPSEC Smart Manager, Provider-1, SecureKnowledge, SecurePlatform, SecureXL, SiteManager-1, SmartCenter, SmartCenter Pro, SmartDashboard, SmartDefense, SmartLSM, SmartMap, SmartUpdate, SmartView, SmartView Monitor, SmartView Reporter, SmartView Status, SmartView Tracker, SVN, UAM, User-to-Address Mapping, UserAuthority, VPN-1,VPN-1 Accelerator Card, VPN-1 Net, VPN-1 Pro, VPN-1 SecureClient, VPN-1 SecuRemote, VPN-1 SecureServer, VPN-1 SmallOffice, and VPN-1 VSX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. or its affiliates. All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The products described in this document are protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,606,668 and 5,835,726 and may be protected by other U.S. Patents, foreign patents, or pending applications.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express permission of Check Point Software Technologies, Ltd.

Check Point Software Technologies Ltd.

International Headquarters:3A Jabotinsky Street, Diamond TowerRamat Gan 52520 IsraelTel: 972-3-613 1833Fax: 972-3-575 9256

U.S. Headquarters:800 Bridge ParkwayRedwood City, CA 94065Tel: 650-628-2000Fax: 650-654-4233

Technical Support, Education & Professional Services:2505 N. Highway 360, Suite 800Grand Prairie, TX. 75050Tel: 817-606-6612Fax: 817-606-6552

Document # : Check Point SecurePlat form Command Reference

Revision: RS000.01

. . .

. .

Symbols ...................................................................................................................... 3[ (symbolic link) ........................................................................................................................... 3? .................................................................................................................................................... 4

A ................................................................................................................................. 5adduser (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................ 5adsl-connect .................................................................................................................................. 6adsl-connect (symbolic link) ........................................................................................................ 7adsl-start ....................................................................................................................................... 8adsl-start (symbolic link) .............................................................................................................. 9adsl-status ................................................................................................................................... 10adsl-status (symbolic link) ......................................................................................................... 11adsl-stop ..................................................................................................................................... 12adsl-stop (symbolic link) ............................................................................................................ 13agetty .......................................................................................................................................... 14arch ............................................................................................................................................. 16arp ............................................................................................................................................... 17arping .......................................................................................................................................... 20arping (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................ 21as ................................................................................................................................................ 22awk (symbolic link) .................................................................................................................... 26awk (symbolic link) .................................................................................................................... 27

B ............................................................................................................................... 29backup_start ............................................................................................................................... 29badblocks .................................................................................................................................... 30basename .................................................................................................................................... 31bash ............................................................................................................................................ 32bash2 (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................. 36bgpd ............................................................................................................................................ 37blackcd_patch ............................................................................................................................. 39blockdev ..................................................................................................................................... 40

C ............................................................................................................................... 41cat ............................................................................................................................................... 41cc (symbolic link) ....................................................................................................................... 43cd_ver ......................................................................................................................................... 44chage ........................................................................................................................................... 45charset ......................................................................................................................................... 46chat ............................................................................................................................................. 47chattr ........................................................................................................................................... 49chfn ............................................................................................................................................. 51chgrp ........................................................................................................................................... 52chkconfig .................................................................................................................................... 54

v

chmod .........................................................................................................................................55chown ..........................................................................................................................................57chpasswd .....................................................................................................................................59chroot ..........................................................................................................................................60chsh .............................................................................................................................................61chvt .............................................................................................................................................62cksum ..........................................................................................................................................63clock (symbolic link) ..................................................................................................................64clockdiff ......................................................................................................................................65cmp .............................................................................................................................................66codepage .....................................................................................................................................68cond_shutdown ...........................................................................................................................69consolechars ................................................................................................................................70consolechars (symbolic link) ......................................................................................................73consoletype .................................................................................................................................74cp .................................................................................................................................................75cp_logrotate ................................................................................................................................78cpconfig_start .............................................................................................................................79cpdiag_send ................................................................................................................................80cpfw_start ...................................................................................................................................81cphaprob_start .............................................................................................................................82cphastart_start .............................................................................................................................83cphastop_start .............................................................................................................................84cpinfo ..........................................................................................................................................85cpinfo_start .................................................................................................................................86cpio .............................................................................................................................................87cplic_start ....................................................................................................................................96cpnetconf (symbolic link) ...........................................................................................................98cpp ...............................................................................................................................................99cpshell .......................................................................................................................................102cpstart_start ...............................................................................................................................103cpstat_start ................................................................................................................................105cpstop_start ...............................................................................................................................107cptimezone ................................................................................................................................108cpver_start .................................................................................................................................109cpwm_wd ..................................................................................................................................110cpwmd .......................................................................................................................................111csh (symbolic link) ...................................................................................................................112ctrl_dns .....................................................................................................................................113ctrlaltdel ....................................................................................................................................114cut .............................................................................................................................................115cut (symbolic link) ....................................................................................................................117

vi

. . .

. .

D ............................................................................................................................. 119date ........................................................................................................................................... 119date_start .................................................................................................................................. 123dd .............................................................................................................................................. 124deallocvt ................................................................................................................................... 126debugfs ..................................................................................................................................... 127depmod ..................................................................................................................................... 132df .............................................................................................................................................. 135dhcpcd ...................................................................................................................................... 137diff ............................................................................................................................................ 140diff3 .......................................................................................................................................... 146dir ............................................................................................................................................. 148dirname ..................................................................................................................................... 154dmesg ....................................................................................................................................... 155dnsdomainname (symbolic link) .............................................................................................. 156doexec ....................................................................................................................................... 157domainname (symbolic link) .................................................................................................... 158du .............................................................................................................................................. 159dumpe2fs .................................................................................................................................. 162dumpkeys ................................................................................................................................. 163

E ............................................................................................................................. 167e2fsck ....................................................................................................................................... 167e2label ...................................................................................................................................... 169echo .......................................................................................................................................... 170egrep ......................................................................................................................................... 172elvtune ...................................................................................................................................... 177env ............................................................................................................................................ 178ex (symbolic link) .................................................................................................................... 179expert_passwd .......................................................................................................................... 180expert_patch ............................................................................................................................. 181expr ........................................................................................................................................... 182

F .............................................................................................................................. 185faillog ....................................................................................................................................... 185false .......................................................................................................................................... 186fdformat .................................................................................................................................... 187fdisk .......................................................................................................................................... 188fgate_start ................................................................................................................................. 189fgconsole .................................................................................................................................. 190fgrep ......................................................................................................................................... 191file ............................................................................................................................................ 196find ........................................................................................................................................... 198

vii

fix_bs_and_del ..........................................................................................................................212free ............................................................................................................................................213fsck ............................................................................................................................................214fsck.ext2 ....................................................................................................................................216fsck.ext3 ....................................................................................................................................217ftp ..............................................................................................................................................218fuser ..........................................................................................................................................219fwaccel_start .............................................................................................................................220fwm_start ..................................................................................................................................221

G .............................................................................................................................223gawk ..........................................................................................................................................223gawk (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................228gawk-3.1.0 ................................................................................................................................229gcc .............................................................................................................................................237gendiff .......................................................................................................................................240genksyms ..................................................................................................................................241getkey ........................................................................................................................................243getkeycodes ...............................................................................................................................244getopt ........................................................................................................................................245glibc_post_upgrade ...................................................................................................................247gpasswd .....................................................................................................................................248grep ...........................................................................................................................................249groupadd ...................................................................................................................................254groupdel ....................................................................................................................................255groupmod ..................................................................................................................................256groups .......................................................................................................................................257grpck .........................................................................................................................................258grpconv .....................................................................................................................................259grpunconv .................................................................................................................................260grub ...........................................................................................................................................261grubby .......................................................................................................................................263grub-install ................................................................................................................................265grub-md5-crypt .........................................................................................................................266gtar (symbolic link) ...................................................................................................................267gunzip .......................................................................................................................................268gunzip (symbolic link) ..............................................................................................................270gzexe .........................................................................................................................................271gzip ...........................................................................................................................................272gzip (symbolic link) ..................................................................................................................274

H .............................................................................................................................275halt ............................................................................................................................................275hdparm ......................................................................................................................................276

viii

. . .

. .

head .......................................................................................................................................... 279hostid ........................................................................................................................................ 281hostname .................................................................................................................................. 282hosts_start ................................................................................................................................. 283hwclock .................................................................................................................................... 284hwclock (symbolic link) ........................................................................................................... 286

I .............................................................................................................................. 287id ............................................................................................................................................... 287ifcfg .......................................................................................................................................... 289ifconfig ..................................................................................................................................... 290ifdown ...................................................................................................................................... 294ifenslave ................................................................................................................................... 295ifup ........................................................................................................................................... 296igawk ........................................................................................................................................ 297init ............................................................................................................................................ 298initlog ....................................................................................................................................... 300insmod (symbolic link) ............................................................................................................ 302insmod.static ............................................................................................................................. 303insmod_ksymoops_clean ......................................................................................................... 306install ........................................................................................................................................ 307installkernel .............................................................................................................................. 310ip ............................................................................................................................................... 311ipcalc ........................................................................................................................................ 312ipmaddr .................................................................................................................................... 314iptunnel ..................................................................................................................................... 315

K ............................................................................................................................. 317kernelversion ............................................................................................................................ 317kill ............................................................................................................................................ 318killall ........................................................................................................................................ 319killall5 ...................................................................................................................................... 321klogd ......................................................................................................................................... 322ksymoops .................................................................................................................................. 324ksyms (symbolic link) .............................................................................................................. 327kudzu ........................................................................................................................................ 328

L ............................................................................................................................. 331last ............................................................................................................................................ 331lastb (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................. 332lastlog ....................................................................................................................................... 333lcrash ........................................................................................................................................ 334ld ............................................................................................................................................... 335ldconfig .................................................................................................................................... 345

ix

less ............................................................................................................................................347lkcd ...........................................................................................................................................354lkcd_config ...............................................................................................................................355lkcd_ksyms ...............................................................................................................................356ln ...............................................................................................................................................357loadkeys ....................................................................................................................................360loadkeys (symbolic link) ...........................................................................................................362loadunimap ...............................................................................................................................363log_start ....................................................................................................................................364logger ........................................................................................................................................365login ..........................................................................................................................................366logname .....................................................................................................................................367losetup .......................................................................................................................................368ls ................................................................................................................................................371lsattr ..........................................................................................................................................376lsmod (symbolic link) ...............................................................................................................377lspci ...........................................................................................................................................378

M .............................................................................................................................381mapscrn .....................................................................................................................................381mbchk .......................................................................................................................................382md5sum ....................................................................................................................................383mesg ..........................................................................................................................................385messages_start ..........................................................................................................................386mii-tool .....................................................................................................................................387minilogd ....................................................................................................................................389mk_modmap .............................................................................................................................390mkdict .......................................................................................................................................391mkdir .........................................................................................................................................392mke2fs .......................................................................................................................................393mkfifo .......................................................................................................................................397mkfs ..........................................................................................................................................398mkfs.ext2 ..................................................................................................................................400mkinitrd ....................................................................................................................................402mkkerneldoth ............................................................................................................................404mklost+found ............................................................................................................................405mknod .......................................................................................................................................406mksock ......................................................................................................................................407mkswap .....................................................................................................................................408mktemp .....................................................................................................................................409modinfo .....................................................................................................................................410modprobe (symbolic link) .........................................................................................................412module_upgrade .......................................................................................................................413

x

. . .

. .

more .......................................................................................................................................... 414mount ........................................................................................................................................ 416mv ............................................................................................................................................. 420

N ............................................................................................................................. 423namei ........................................................................................................................................ 423nash .......................................................................................................................................... 424ndsapi_start .............................................................................................................................. 425netreport ................................................................................................................................... 426netstat ....................................................................................................................................... 427newgrp ...................................................................................................................................... 430new-kernel-pkg ......................................................................................................................... 431newusers ................................................................................................................................... 432nice ........................................................................................................................................... 433nm ............................................................................................................................................. 434nohup ........................................................................................................................................ 438nologin ...................................................................................................................................... 439

O ............................................................................................................................. 441openvt ....................................................................................................................................... 441ospfd ......................................................................................................................................... 442

P .............................................................................................................................. 443packer ....................................................................................................................................... 443pam_console_apply .................................................................................................................. 444pam_tally .................................................................................................................................. 445passwd ...................................................................................................................................... 446pgawk ....................................................................................................................................... 448pgrep ......................................................................................................................................... 449pidof (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................ 451ping ........................................................................................................................................... 452ping6 ......................................................................................................................................... 455pivot_root ................................................................................................................................. 458pkill .......................................................................................................................................... 459poweroff (symbolic link) .......................................................................................................... 461pppd .......................................................................................................................................... 462pppoe ........................................................................................................................................ 463pppoe (symbolic link) .............................................................................................................. 465pppoe-relay (symbolic link) ..................................................................................................... 466pppoe-server (symbolic link) ................................................................................................... 467pppoe-sniff (symbolic link) ...................................................................................................... 468ppp-watch ................................................................................................................................. 469pptp ........................................................................................................................................... 470pptp_callmgr ............................................................................................................................ 471

xi

printenv .....................................................................................................................................472product_start .............................................................................................................................473ps ...............................................................................................................................................474psfaddtable ................................................................................................................................478psfgettable .................................................................................................................................479psfstriptable ...............................................................................................................................480pstree .........................................................................................................................................481pwck ..........................................................................................................................................482pwconv ......................................................................................................................................483pwd ...........................................................................................................................................484pwdb_chkpwd ...........................................................................................................................485pwunconv ..................................................................................................................................486

R .............................................................................................................................487ramsize (symbolic link) ............................................................................................................487rarpd ..........................................................................................................................................488raw ............................................................................................................................................489rdev ...........................................................................................................................................490rdisc ...........................................................................................................................................491readprofile .................................................................................................................................492reboot (symbolic link) ...............................................................................................................493reboot_start ...............................................................................................................................494recover ......................................................................................................................................495rename .......................................................................................................................................496renice .........................................................................................................................................497rereadsic ....................................................................................................................................498rescuept .....................................................................................................................................499resize2fs ....................................................................................................................................500resizecons ..................................................................................................................................501restore_start ...............................................................................................................................502rev .............................................................................................................................................503ripd ............................................................................................................................................504rm ..............................................................................................................................................506rmdir .........................................................................................................................................508rmmod (symbolic link) .............................................................................................................509rootflags (symbolic link) ...........................................................................................................510route ..........................................................................................................................................511rpm ............................................................................................................................................513rpm2cpio ...................................................................................................................................521rpmdb ........................................................................................................................................522rpmquery ...................................................................................................................................524rpmsign .....................................................................................................................................528rpmverify ..................................................................................................................................530

xii

. . .

. .

rtacct ......................................................................................................................................... 534rtm_start ................................................................................................................................... 535rtmon ........................................................................................................................................ 536rtmstart_start ............................................................................................................................ 537rtmstop_start ............................................................................................................................. 538rtmtopsvc_start ......................................................................................................................... 539runlevel ..................................................................................................................................... 540

S .............................................................................................................................. 541save_ifconfig ............................................................................................................................ 541save_route ................................................................................................................................. 544saveunimap ............................................................................................................................... 546scp ............................................................................................................................................ 547screendump ............................................................................................................................... 549script ......................................................................................................................................... 550sdiff .......................................................................................................................................... 551SDSUtil_start ........................................................................................................................... 553sed ............................................................................................................................................ 554serial_console ........................................................................................................................... 556service ....................................................................................................................................... 557set_dhcp .................................................................................................................................... 558set_domain ............................................................................................................................... 559set_host ..................................................................................................................................... 560setfdprm .................................................................................................................................... 561setfont ....................................................................................................................................... 562setkeycodes ............................................................................................................................... 563setleds ....................................................................................................................................... 564setmetamode ............................................................................................................................. 566setpci ........................................................................................................................................ 567setsid ......................................................................................................................................... 569setsysfont .................................................................................................................................. 570setterm ...................................................................................................................................... 571setvesablank ............................................................................................................................. 575sg (symbolic link) ..................................................................................................................... 576sh (symbolic link) ..................................................................................................................... 577showcfont ................................................................................................................................. 578showkey .................................................................................................................................... 579shutdown .................................................................................................................................. 581shutdown_start ......................................................................................................................... 582sim_start ................................................................................................................................... 583skill ........................................................................................................................................... 584slattach ...................................................................................................................................... 586sleep .......................................................................................................................................... 588

xiii

sln ..............................................................................................................................................589snice ..........................................................................................................................................590sort ............................................................................................................................................592spinstall .....................................................................................................................................596sshd ...........................................................................................................................................598ssh-keygen ................................................................................................................................602stty ............................................................................................................................................604su ...............................................................................................................................................612su_start ......................................................................................................................................614sulogin ......................................................................................................................................615sum ............................................................................................................................................616swapoff (symbolic link) ............................................................................................................617swapon ......................................................................................................................................618sync ...........................................................................................................................................619sys_command ...........................................................................................................................620sysconfig_start ..........................................................................................................................621sysctl .........................................................................................................................................622syslogd ......................................................................................................................................623sys-unconfig ..............................................................................................................................626

T ..............................................................................................................................627tail .............................................................................................................................................627tar ..............................................................................................................................................629tc ...............................................................................................................................................637tcpdump ....................................................................................................................................638tcsh ............................................................................................................................................642tee ..............................................................................................................................................645telinit (symbolic link) ...............................................................................................................646test .............................................................................................................................................647tftp .............................................................................................................................................650time_start ..................................................................................................................................651tload ..........................................................................................................................................652top .............................................................................................................................................653top_start ....................................................................................................................................655touch .........................................................................................................................................656tr ................................................................................................................................................658tracepath ....................................................................................................................................661tracepath6 ..................................................................................................................................662traceroute ..................................................................................................................................663traceroute6 ................................................................................................................................666true ............................................................................................................................................667tty ..............................................................................................................................................668tune2fs .......................................................................................................................................669

xiv

. . .

. .

tzselect ...................................................................................................................................... 673U ............................................................................................................................. 675

uagstart_start ............................................................................................................................ 675uagstop_start ............................................................................................................................ 676uas_start .................................................................................................................................... 677umount ...................................................................................................................................... 678uname ....................................................................................................................................... 680unicode_start ............................................................................................................................ 682unicode_stop ............................................................................................................................ 683uniq ........................................................................................................................................... 684unix_chkpwd ............................................................................................................................ 686updfstab .................................................................................................................................... 687uptime ....................................................................................................................................... 688useradd ..................................................................................................................................... 689userdel ...................................................................................................................................... 692usermod .................................................................................................................................... 693users .......................................................................................................................................... 695usleep ........................................................................................................................................ 696utmpdump ................................................................................................................................ 697uudecode ................................................................................................................................... 698uuencode ................................................................................................................................... 699uuidgen ..................................................................................................................................... 700

V ............................................................................................................................. 701vconfig ...................................................................................................................................... 701vcstime ..................................................................................................................................... 703ver ............................................................................................................................................. 704vi ............................................................................................................................................... 705view (symbolic link) ................................................................................................................ 707vmstat ....................................................................................................................................... 708vpn_start ................................................................................................................................... 709vt-is-UTF8 ................................................................................................................................ 711vtysh ......................................................................................................................................... 712

W ............................................................................................................................ 713w ............................................................................................................................................... 713wall ........................................................................................................................................... 714watch ........................................................................................................................................ 715wc ............................................................................................................................................. 716whereis ..................................................................................................................................... 717which ........................................................................................................................................ 718whoami ..................................................................................................................................... 720writevt ...................................................................................................................................... 721

xv

X .............................................................................................................................723xargs ..........................................................................................................................................723

Y .............................................................................................................................729yes .............................................................................................................................................729

Z ..............................................................................................................................731zcat ............................................................................................................................................731zcmp ..........................................................................................................................................734zdiff ...........................................................................................................................................735zdump .......................................................................................................................................736zebra ..........................................................................................................................................737zegrep ........................................................................................................................................739zfgrep ........................................................................................................................................740zforce ........................................................................................................................................741zgrep .........................................................................................................................................742zic ..............................................................................................................................................743zless ...........................................................................................................................................745zmore ........................................................................................................................................747znew ..........................................................................................................................................749

Check Point End User License Agreement ............................................................753GNU General Public License .................................................................................763BSD License ...........................................................................................................771GNU Zebra Documentation ...................................................................................773

xvi

Chapter 0
0
. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SECUREPLATFORM COMMANDS

In SecurePlatform, executable operating system files are located in the following directories:

/bin/sbin/usr/bin/usr/sbin

To access the executable files, you must enter Expert Mode. Only cpshell commands are available in Standard Mode. It is not necessary to change directories to use the commands listed in this appendix, because the four directories, listed above, are included in the $PATH statement.

Executable files for other Check Point products, such as VPN-1/FireWall-1 NG, are discussed in the VPN-1/FireWall-1 NG Commands appendix.

Some commands are listed twice. When a command is listed twice, the second instance is usually a symbolic link.

C O M M A N D S

The following list contains the command, its location, permissions, owner and group, and a brief explanation. Where appropriate, command usage is also included.

1

S E C U R E P L A T F O R M C O M M A N D S0

2

. . .

. .Symbols

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Y M B O L S

[ (symbol ic l ink)

I N F O R M A T I O N

Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to test

Permissions: lrwxrwxrwx

Owner/Group: root/root

S Y N T A X

See test

O P T I O N S

See test

3

Symbols0

?

S T A N D A R D M O D E C O M M A N D


Location: Standard Mode Command

Description: print the list of available Standard Mode commands

Permissions: n/a

Owner/Group: n/a

S Y N T A X

?

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the ? command.

4

. . .

. .A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

adduser (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to useradd



S Y N T A X

See useradd

O P T I O N S

See useradd

5

A0

adsl -connect


Location: /sbin

Description: shell script to connect to an ADSL provider using PPPoE

Permission: -rwxr-xr-x


S Y N T A X

Using interface ppp0Connect: ppp0 <--> /dev/pts/1

O P T I O N S

The adsl-connect command has no additional options.

6

. . .

. .A

adsl -connect (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/adsl-connect



S Y N T A X

See adsl-connect

O P T I O N S

See adsl-connect

7

A0

adsl -star t


Location: /sbin

Description: shell script to bring up an ADSL connection

Permissions: -rwxr-xr-x


S Y N T A X

adsl-start [config_file]adsl-start interface user [config_file]Second form overrides USER and ETH from config file.If config_file is omitted, defaults to /etc/ppp/pppoe.conf

O P T I O N S

The adsl-start command has no additional options.

8

. . .

. .A

adsl -star t (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/adsl-start



S Y N T A X

See adsl-start

O P T I O N S

See adsl-start

9

A0

adsl -status


Location: /sbin

Description: shell script to report on the status of an ADSL connection



S Y N T A X

adsl-status [config_file]If config_file is omitted, defaults to /etc/ppp/pppoe.conf

O P T I O N S

The adsl-status command has no additional options.

10

. . .

. .A

adsl -status (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/adsl-status



S Y N T A X

See adsl-status

O P T I O N S

See adsl-status

11

A0

adsl -stop


Location: /sbin

Description: shell script to bring down an ADSL connection



S Y N T A X

adsl-stop [config_file]If config_file is omitted, defaults to /etc/ppp/pppoe.conf

O P T I O N S

The adsl-stop command has no additional options.

12

. . .

. .A

adsl -stop (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/adsl-stop



S Y N T A X

See adsl-stop

O P T I O N S

See adsl-stop

13

A0

aget ty


Location: /sbin

Description: set terminal type, mode, speed, and line discipline



S Y N T A X

agetty [-hiLmw] [-l login_program] [-t timeout] [-I initstring] [-H login_host] baud_rate,... line [termtype]or [-hiLmw] [-l login_program] [-t timeout] [-I initstring] [-H login_host] line baud_rate,... [termtype]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h enable hardware flow control

-i do not display the contents of /etc/issue (or other) before writing the login prompt

-L force the line to be a local line with no need for carrier detect

-m insert the architecture identifier for the machine

-w wait for the user or modem to send a carriage return or a line feed character before sending the /etc/issue file (or other) and the login prompt

-l login_program invoke the specified login_program instead of /bin/login

-t timeout terminate if no username could be read within timeout seconds

14

. . .

. .A

-I initstring set an initial string to be sent to the tty or modem before sending anything else

-H login_host write the specified login_host into the utmp file

Option Explanation

15

A0

arch


Location: /bin

Description: prints the machine's architecture to the standard output



S Y N T A X

arch

O P T I O N S

The arch command has no additional options.

16

. . .

. .A

arp


Location: /sbin

Description: clear, add to, or dump the kernel's arp cache



S Y N T A X

arp [-vn] [<HW>] [-i <if>] [-a] [<hostname>] <-Display ARP cachearp [-v] [-i <if>] -d <hostname> [pub][nopub] <-Delete ARP entryarp [-vnD] [<HW>] [-i <if>] -f [<filename>] <-Add entry from filearp [-v] [<HW>] [-i <if>] -s <hostname> <hwaddr> [temp][nopub] <-Add entryarp [-v] [<HW>] [-i <if>] -s <hostname> <hwaddr> [netmask <nm>] pub <-''-arp [-v] [<HW>] [-i <if>] -Ds <hostname> <if> [netmask <nm>] pub <-''-<HW>=Use '-H <hw>' to specify hardware address type. Default: ether

Hardware Type Explanation

strip Metricom Starmode IP

ash Ash

ether Ethernet

tr 16/4 Mbps Token Ring

tr 16/4 Mbps Token Ring (New)

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

rose AMPR ROSE

arcnet ARCnet

dlci Frame Relay DLCI

fddi Fiber Distributed Data Interface

17

A0

O P T I O N S

hippi HIPPI

irda IrLAP

x25 generic X.25

Option Explanation

-a display (all) hosts in alternative (BSD) style

-e display (all) hosts in default (Linux) style

-s set a new ARP entry

--set set a new ARP entry

-d delete a specified entry

--delete delete a specified entry

-v be verbose

--verbose be verbose

-n don’t resolve names

--numeric don’t resolve names

-i specify network interface (e.g. eth0)

--device specify network interface (e.g. eth0)

-D read <hwaddr> from given device

--use-device read <hwaddr> from given device

-A specify protocol family

-p specify protocol family


18

. . .

. .A

--protocol specify protocol family

-f read new entries from file or from /etc/ethers

--file read new entries from file or from /etc/ethers

Option Explanation

19

A0

arping


Location: /sbin

Description: Ping destination on device interface by arp packets, using source address source



S Y N T A X

arping [-fDUAV] [-c count] [-w timeout] [-I device] [-s source] destination

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f quit on first reply

-D duplicate address detection mode

-U unsolicited ARP mode, update your neighbors

-A ARP answer mode, update your neighbors

-V print version and exit

-c count how many packets to send

-w timeout how long to wait for a reply

-I device which ethernet device to use (eth0)

-s source source IP address

destination ask for what IP address

20

. . .

. .A

arping (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/arping



S Y N T A X

See arping

O P T I O N S

See arping

21

A0

as


Location: /usr/bin

Description: assemble the output of the GNU C compiler for use by the linker



S Y N T A X

as [option...] [asmfile...]-a[sub-option...][default hls]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

c omit false conditionals

d omit debugging directives

h include high-level source

l include assembly

m include macro expansions

n omit forms processing

s include symbols

L include line debug statistics (if applicable)

=FILE list to FILE (must be last sub-option)

-D produce assembler debugging messages

--defsym SYM=VAL define symbol SYM to given value

-f skip whitespace and comment preprocessing

22

. . .

. .A

--gstabs generate stabs debugging information

--gdwarf2 generate DWARF2 debugging information

--help show this message and exit

--target-help show target specific options

-I DIR add DIR to search list for .include directives

-J don't warn about signed overflow

-K warn when differences altered for long displacements

-L keep local symbols (e.g. starting with `L')

--keep-locals keep local symbols (e.g. starting with `L')

-M assemble in MRI compatibility mode

--mri assemble in MRI compatibility mode

--MD FILE write dependency information in FILE (default none)

-nocpp ignored

-o OBJFILE name the object-file output OBJFILE (default a.out)

-R fold data section into text section

--statistics print various measured statistics from execution

--strip-local-absolute strip local absolute symbols

--traditional-form use same format as native assembler when possible

Option Explanation

23

A0

--version print assembler version number and exit

-W suppress warnings

--no-warn suppress warnings

--warn don’t suppress warnings

--fatal-warnings treat warnings as errors

--itbl INSTTBL extend instruction set to include instructions matching the specifications defined in file INSTTBL

-w ignored

-X ignored

-Z generate object file even after errors

--listing-lhs-width set the width in words of the output data column of the listing

--listing-lhs-width2 set the width in words of the continuation linesof the output data column; ignored if smaller thanthe width of the first line

--listing-rhs-width set the max width in characters of the lines from the source file

--listing-cont-lines set the maximum number of continuation lines used for the output data column of the listing

-Q ignored

-V print assembler version number

-k ignored

-q quiten some warnings

Option Explanation

24

. . .

. .A

-s ignored

Option Explanation

25

A0

awk (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to gawk



S Y N T A X

See gawk

O P T I O N S

See gawk

26

. . .

. .A

awk (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/gawk



S Y N T A X

See gawk

O P T I O N S

See gawk

27

A0

28

. . .

. .B

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B

backup_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script for backing up SecurePlatform

Permissions: -r-xr-xr-x


S Y N T A X

backup system name [<tftp> <ip>]backup cp name [<tftp> <ip>]backup all name [<tftp> <ip>]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the backup_start command.

29

B0

badblocks


Location: /sbin

Description: search device for bad blocks



S Y N T A X

badblocks [-b block_size] [-i input_file] [-o output_file] [-svwnf][-c blocks_at_once] [-p num_passes] device [last_block [start_count]]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b block_size specify block size

-i input_file specify input file

-o output_file specify output file

-s show the progress of the scan by writing out the block numbers as they are checked

-v verbose mode

-w use write-mode test

-n use non-destructive read-write mode

-f override refusal to perform a test on a mounted device

-c blocks_at_once specify the number of blocks to process at once

-p num_passes specify the number of passes

30

. . .

. .B

basename


Location: /bin

Description: remove leading directory components from a path



S Y N T A X

basename NAME [SUFFIX]or: basename OPTIONPrint NAME with any leading directory components removed.If specified, also remove a trailing SUFFIX.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--help display help and exit

--version output version information and exit

31

B0

bash


Location: /bin

Description: Bourne Again Shell



S Y N T A X

bash [GNU long option] [option] ...bash [GNU long option] [option] script-file ...Type `bash -c "help set"' for more information about shell options.Type `bash -c help' for more information about shell builtin commands.Use the `bashbug' command to report bugs.

GNU Long Option Explanation

--debug launch an instance of the bash shell in debug mode

--dump-po-strings same as --dump-strings but uses a special ‘portable object’ format suitable for scripting

--dump-strings for execution in non-English locales, dump all strings that bash translates

--help print information about which version of bash is installed, plus a list of options

--init-file file specify file for init parameters

--login behave like a login shell

--noediting disable line editing with arrow and control keys

--noprofile do not process /etc/profile, ~/.bash_profile, ~/.bash_login, or ~/.profile on startup

--norc do not process ~/.bashrc on startup

32

. . .

. .B

--posix conform to POSIX standard

--rcfile file subsitute file for .bashrc on startup

--rpm-requires produce the list of files that are required for the shell script to run

--restricted restrict users to a very secure, limited environment

--verbose print each line as it is executed

--version print information about which version of bash is installed

--wordexp STRING word expansion; prints number of words and characters in the STRING that follows the option; for example bash --wordexp “hello world” prints the number of words (2), the number of characters (10), and both words (hello world) to the standard output

Shell Option Explanation

-i create an interactive shell

-r restrict users to a very secure, limited environment

-s read commands from standard input

-D for execution in non-English locales; dump all strings that bash translates

-c str read commands from string str

-a export all defined variables

-b notify; notify when jobs running in the background terminate

-e errexit; abort script at first error

GNU Long Option Explanation

33

B0

-f noglob; file name expansion disabled

-h locate and remember function commands as functions are defined; function commands are normally looked up when the function is executed

-k all keyword arguments are placed in the environment for a command, not just those that precede the command name

-m monitor mode; job control is enabled; on by default for interactive shells on systems that support it

-n noexec; read commands in script but do not execute them

-p privileged; script runs as suid

-t exit after first command

-u nounset; attempts to use undefined variables result in error messages

-v verbose; print commands to stdout before executing

-x xtrace; similar to -v but expands commands

-B shell performs brace expansion; on by default

-C noclobber; prevent overwriting of files by redirection; may be overridden by >|

-H enable ! style history substitution; on by default when the shell is interactive


34

. . .

. .B

-P shell does not follow symbolic links when executing commands, uses physical directory structure instead; by default, bash follows the logical chain of directories when performing commands which change the current directory

-o OPTION_NAME OPTION_NAME can be one of the following: allexport: same as -a. braceexpand; shell performs brace expansion


35

B0

bash2 (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to bash



S Y N T A X

See bash

O P T I O N S

See bash

36

. . .

. .B

bgpd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: routing component that works with the zebra routing engine



S Y N T A X

bgpd [OPTION...]Daemon which manages kernel routing table management and redistribution between different routing protocols.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d run in daemon mode

--daemon run in daemon mode

-f config_file set configuration file name

--config_file config_file set configuration file name

-i pid_file set process identifier file name

--pid_file pid_file set process identifier file name

-A vty_addr set vty’s bind address

--vty_addr vty_addr set vty’s bind address

-P vty_port set vty’s port number

--vty_port vty_port set vty’s port number

-p bgp_port set bgp protocol’s port number

--bgp_port bgp_port set bgp protocol’s port number

-r when program terminates, retain routes added by bgpd

37

B0

--retain when program terminates, retain routes added by bgpd

-n do not install route to kernel

--no_kernel do not install route to kernel

-v print program version

--version print program version

-h display help and exit


Option Explanation

38

. . .

. .B

blackcd_patch


Location: /bin

Description: used to apply, remove, and list patches for SecurePlatform



S Y N T A X

patch add tftp <ip> <patch_name>patch add cd [<patch_name>]patch remove <patch_name>patch list

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the blackcd_patch command.

39

B0

blockdev


Location: /sbin

Description: allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line



S Y N T A X

blockdev [-V] [-v|-q] commands devices

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--setro set read-only

--setrw set read-write

--getro get read-only

--getss get sector size

--getsize get size

--setra READAHEAD set read ahead

--getra get read ahead

--glushbufs flush buffers

--rereadpt reread partition table

40

. . .

. .C

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

cat


Location: /bin

Description: read file contents and print to the standard output; short for concatenate



S Y N T A X

cat [OPTION] [FILE]...Concatenate FILE(s), or standard input, to standard output.With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-A equivalent to -vET

--show-all equivalent to -vET

-b number non-blank output lines

--number-nonblank number non-blank output lines

-e equivalent to -vE

-E display $ at the end of each line

--show-ends display $ at the end of each line

-n number all output lines

--number number all output lines

-s never more than one single blank line

41

C0

--squeeze-blank never more than one single blank line

-t equivalent to -vT

-T display TAB characters as Î

--show-tabs display TAB characters as Î

-u ignored

-v use ^ and M- notation, execept for LFD and TAB

--show-nonprinting use ^ and M- notation, execept for LFD and TAB



Option Explanation

42

. . .

. .C

cc (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to gcc



S Y N T A X

See gcc

O P T I O N S

See gcc

43

C0

cd_ver


Location: /bin

Description: print SecurePlatform build number to the standard output



S Y N T A X

cd_ver

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cd_ver command.

44

. . .

. .C

chage


Location: /usr/bin

Description: changes the number of days between password changes and the last password change



S Y N T A X

chage [ -l ] [ -m min_days ] [ -M max_days ] [ -W warn ][ -I inactive ] [ -E expire ] [ -d last_day ] user

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-l used by an unprivileged user to determine when her password or account is due to expire

-m MIN_DAYS set minimum number of days to MIN_DAYS

-W warn

-I inactive

-E expire

-d LAST_DAY set last day to LAST_DAY

45

C0

charset


Location: /usr/bin

Description: utility to set the character set for a console



S Y N T A X

$(basename $0) [-v] G0|G1 [ cp437 | iso01 | vt100 | user | <acm_name> ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v be verbose

46

. . .

. .C

chat


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: used to setup PPP



S Y N T A X

chat [-e] [-E] [-v] [-V] [-t timeout] [-r report-file][-T phone-number] [-U phone-number2] {-f chat-file | chat-script}

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-e start with the echo option turned on

-E enables environment variable substitutions within chat scripts

-v requests the chat script be executed in verbose mode

-V request that the chat script be executed in a stderr verbose mode

-t timeout set the timeout for the expected string to be received

-r report_file set the file report_file for the output of the report strings

-T phone_number pass in an arbitary string, usually a phone number, that will be substituted for the \T substitution metacharacter in a send string.

47

C0

-U phone_number2 pass in a second string, usually a phone number, that will be substituted for the \U substitution metacharacter in a send string; is useful when dialing an ISDN terminal adapter that requires two numbers

-f chat_file | chat_script read the chat_script from the chat_file

Option Explanation

48

. . .

. .C

chat t r


Location: /usr/bin

Description: modify file attributes



S Y N T A X

chattr [-RV] [-+=AacdijsSu] [-v version] files...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-R recursively change attributes of directories and their contents; symbolic links encountered during recursive directory traversals are ignored

-V be verbose and print the chattr program version

-v version set the file’s version

Attribute Explanation

+ add the specified attribute to the file

- remove the specified attribute from the file

= make the attributes specified the only attributes the file has

A do not modify the file’s atime record

49

C0

a file can only be opened in append mode for writing

c automatically compress the file on the disk; reads return uncompressed data

d file is not a candidate for backup when the dump program is run

i file cannot be modified; no links can be made to the file

s when file is deleted, its blocks are zero’ed and written back to disk

S when file is modified, changes are written synchronously to disk

u when file is deleted, contents are saved; allows for undeletion of files

j journaled data

Attribute Explanation

50

. . .

. .C

chfn


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change the information that is stored in the /etc/passwd file and displayed when a user is fingered

Permissions: -rwx--x--x


S Y N T A X

chfn [ -f full-name ] [ -o office ] [ -p office-phone ][ -h home-phone ] [ --help ] [ --version ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f full_name set the user’s full name

-o office set the user’s office location

-p office_phone set the user’s office phone number

-h home_phone set the user’s home phone number

--help print help and exit

--version print version and exit

51

C0

chgrp


Location: /bin

Description: change group information associated with a file



S Y N T A X

chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE...or: chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...Change the group membership of each FILE to GROUP.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c like verbose, but report only when a change is made

--changes like verbose, but report only when a change is made

--dereference affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather than the sybolic link itself

-h affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file; available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symbolic link

--no-dereference affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file; available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symbolic link

-f suppress most error messages

--silent suppress most error messages

--quite suppress most error messages

52

. . .

. .C

--reference=RFILE use RFILE’s group rather than the specified GROUP value

-R operate on files and directories recursively

--recursive operate on files and directories recursively

-v output a diagnostic for every file processed

--verbose output a diagnostic for every file processed


--version display version and exit

Option Explanation

53

C0

chkconf ig


Location: /sbin

Description: configures services for runlevels



S Y N T A X

chkconfig --list [name]chkconfig --add <name>chkconfig --del <name>chkconfig [--level <levels>] <name> <on|off|reset>)

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the chkconfig command.

54

. . .

. .C

chmod


Location: /bin

Description: change access permissions (mode) for a file



S Y N T A X

chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE...or: chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE...or: chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...Change the mode of each FILE to MODE. Each MODE is one or more of the letters ugoa, one of the symbols +-= and one or more of the letters rwxXstugo.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





--quiet suppress most error messages

--reference=RFILE use RFILE’s mode instead of MODE values

-R change files and directories recursively

--recursive change files and directories recursively


55

C0


Option Explanation

56

. . .

. .C

chown


Location: /bin

Description: change ownership of a file



S Y N T A X

chown [OPTION]... OWNER[:[GROUP]] FILE...or: chown [OPTION]... :GROUP FILE...or: chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...Change the owner and/or group of each FILE to OWNER and/or GROUP.Owner is unchanged if missing. Group is unchanged if missing, but changedto login group if implied by a `:'. OWNER and GROUP may be numeric as wellas symbolic.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



--dereference affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather than the symbolic link itself

-h affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file; available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symbolic link

--no-dereference affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file; available only on systems that can change the ownership of a symbolic link

57

C0

--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP

change the owner and/or group of each file only if its current owner and/or group match those specified here; either may be omitted, in which case a match is not required for the omitted attribute



--quiet suppress most error messages

--reference=RFILE use RFILE’s own and group rather than the specified OWNER:GROUP values

-R operate on files and directories recursively

--recursive operate on files and directories recursively

-v output a diagnostic for every file processed

--verbose output a diagnostic for every file processed



Option Explanation

58

. . .

. .C

chpasswd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: change user passwords in a batch



S Y N T A X

chpasswd [-e]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-e without the -e switch, the passwords are expected to be cleartext; with the -e switch, the passwords are expected to be in encrypted form

59

C0

chroot


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: change root directory for the command specified



S Y N T A X

chroot NEWROOT [COMMAND...]or: chroot OPTIONRun COMMAND with root directory set to NEWROOT.If no command is given, run ``${SHELL} -i'' (default: /bin/sh).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



60

. . .

. .C

chsh


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change login shell



S Y N T A X

chsh [ -s shell ] [ --list-shells ] [ --help ] [ --version ][ username ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s shell specify the shell

--list-shells list available shells



61

C0

chvt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change foreground virtual terminal



S Y N T A X

chvt [vt_number]Change virtual terminal

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-t virtual terminal

--vterm=v virtual terminal



-V display version and exit

--version display verstion and exit

62

. . .

. .C

cksum


Location: /usr/bin

Description: compute a cyclic redundancy checksum (CRC) for the file, or files, specified



S Y N T A X

cksum [FILE]...or: cksum [OPTION]Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



63

C0

clock (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to hwclock



S Y N T A X

See hwclock

O P T I O N S

See hwclock

64

. . .

. .C

clockdi f f


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: IP utility for determining the differences in the time set on the current host and a remote host



S Y N T A X

clockdiff [-o] <host>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-o use IP TIMESTAMP with ICMP ECHO instead of ICMP TIMESTAMP messages

65

C0

cmp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: compare two files



S Y N T A X

cmp [OPTION]... FILE1 [FILE2]If a FILE is `-' or missing, read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c output differing bytes as characters

--print-chars output differing bytes as characters

-i N ignore differences in the first N bytes of input

--ignore-initial=N ignore differences in the first N bytes of input

-l output offsets and codes of all differing bytes

--verbose output offsets and codes of all differing bytes

-s output nothing; yield exit status only

--quiet output nothing; yield exit status only

--silent output nothing; yield exit status only

-v display version and exit


66

. . .

. .C


Option Explanation

67

C0

codepage


Location: /usr/bin

Description: utility for defining codepages; allows a variety of character sets to be mapped; required for multi-language support



S Y N T A X

odepage code_page_file [-c] [-L] [-l] [-a|nnn]nnn (3 digits): extract codepage nnn from the fileExample: codepage ega.cpi 850 will create a file 850.cp containing the requested codepage.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c input file is a single codepage

-L print header info

-l or no option; list all codepages contained in the file

-a extract all codepages from the file

68

. . .

. .C

cond_shutdown


Location: /sbin

Description: script to check to see if users are still logged in when attempting a shutdown; usage is similar to the shutdown command



S Y N T A X

shutdown [-akrhfnc] [-t secs] time [warning message]** the "time" argument is mandatory! (try "now") **

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a use /etc/shutdown.allow

-k don't really shutdown, only warn

-r reboot after shutdown

-h halt after shutdown

-f do a fast reboot; skip fsck

-F force fsck on reboot

-n do not go through init; fast shutdown

-c cancel a running shutdown

-t secs delay secs between warning and kill signal

69

C0

consolechars


Location: /bin

Description: command for setting console font information



S Y N T A X

consolechars [options] [commands]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v list operations as they are done

--verbose list operations as they are done

-n do not change the console state; do not write to any file

--no-act do not change the console state; do not write to any file

-H (N in 0..32) choose the right font from a codepage that contains three fonts (only 8/14/16 allowed then), or choose default font, ie. ‘default8xN’

--char-height=N (N in 0..32) choose the right font from a codepage that contains three fonts (only 8/14/16 allowed then), or choose default font, ie. ‘default8xN’

--force-no-sfm Suppress loading of a screen-font map

-l when loading an ACM, activate G1 charset instead of G0

70

. . .

. .C

--gl when loading an ACM, activate G1 charset instead of G0

--tty=device use device as console device for ioctls

-f file load the console-font from the specified file

--font=file load the console-font from the specified file

-d load a default font from a file

--default-font load a default font from a file

-R restore ROM font; does not work with all kernels

--rom-font restore ROM font; does not work with all kernels

-u file load the SFM from the specified file

--sfm file load the SFM from the specified file

--screen-font-map=file load the SFM from the specified file

-k file merge SFM fallbacks from file into SFM

--sfm-fallback=file merge SFM fallbacks from file into SFM

-m file load the ACM from the specified file

--acm file load the ACM from the specified file

--app-charset-map=file load the ACM from the specified file

Option Explanation

71

C0

-F file write current font to prefered format (now: psf-with-sfm)

--old-font=file write current font to prefered format (now: psf-with-sfm)

--font-format= select font file format for saving

--list-font-formats list font file formats available to libcfont

-M file write current ACT to file before loading a new one

--old-acm=file write current ACT to file before loading a new one

-U file write current SFM to file before loading a new one

--old-sfm=file write current SFM to file before loading a new one





Option Explanation

72

. . .

. .C

consolechars (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/consolechars



S Y N T A X

See consolechars

Options

See consolechars

73

C0

consoletype


Location: /sbin

Description: print information about the console type to the standard output



S Y N T A X

consoletype

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the consoletype command.

74

. . .

. .C

cp


Location: /bin

Description: copy a file



S Y N T A X

cp [OPTION]... SOURCE DESTcp [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORYcp [OPTION]... --target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE...Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.

By default, sparse SOURCE files are detected by a crude heuristic and thecorresponding DEST file is made sparse as well. That is the behaviorselected by --sparse=auto. Specify --sparse=always to create a sparse DEST file whenever the SOURCE file contains a long enough sequence of zero bytes.Use --sparse=never to inhibit creation of sparse files.The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values: none, off never make backups (even if --backup is given) numbered, to make numbered backups existing, nil numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise simple, never always make simple backups As a special case, cp makes a backup of SOURCE when the force and backup options are given and SOURCE and DEST are the same name for an existing, regular file.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a same as -dpR

--archive same as -dpR

--backup[=CONTROL] make a backup of each existing destination file

75

C0

-b like --backup, but does not accept an argument

-d never follow symbolic links

--no-dereference never follow symbolic links

-f if an existing destination file cannot be opened, remove it and try again

--force if an existing destination file cannot be opened, remove it and try again

-i prompt before overwrite

--interactive prompt before overwrite

-H follow command-line symbolic links

-l link files instead of copying

--link link files instead of copying

-L always follow symbolic links

--dereference always follow symbolic links

-p preserve file attributes, if possible

--perserve preserve file attributes, if possible

--parents append source path to DIRECTORY

-P same as --parents for now; soon to change to --no-dereference to conform to POSIX

-r copy recursively, non-directories as files; WARNING: use -R instead when you might copy special files like FIFOs or /dev/zero

Option Explanation

76

. . .

. .C

--remove-destination remove each existing destination file before attempting to open it (contrast with --force)

--sparse=WHEN control creation of sparse files

-R copy directories recursively

--recursive copy directories recursively

--strip-trailing-slashes remove any trailing slashes from each SOURCE argument

-s make symbolic links instead of copying

--symbolic-link make symbolic links instead of copying

-S SUFFIX override the usual backup suffix

--suffix=SUFFIX override the usual backup suffix

--target-directory=DIRECTORY move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY

-u copy only when the SOURCE file is newer than the destination file or when the destination file is missing

--update copy only when the SOURCE file is newer than the destination file or when the destination file is missing

-v explain what is being done

--verbose explain what is being done

-x stay on this file system

--one-file-system stay on this file system



Option Explanation

77

C0

cp_logrotate


Location: /sbin

Description: used by the Standard Mode log command for log rotation



S Y N T A X

cp_logrotate

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cp_logrotate command.

78

. . .

. .C

cpconf ig_start


Location: /bin

Description: start the wrapper script for cpconfig



S Y N T A X

cpconfig

O P T I O N S

There are not additional options for the cpconfig command.

79

C0

cpdiag_send


Location: /bin

Description: Check Point diagnostics sender



S Y N T A X

diag <diag_file_name> tftp <tftp_server_ip_address>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cpdiag_send command.

80

. . .

. .C

cpfw_star t


Location: /bin

Description: start the wrapper script for fw



S Y N T A X

The cpfw_start command accepts standard fw command options.

O P T I O N S

The cpfw_start command accepts standard fw command options.

81

C0

cphaprob_star t


Location: /bin

Description: Check Point High Availability configuration script



S Y N T A X

The cphaprob_start command accepts standard cphaprob options.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d <device>

-t <timeout(sec)>

-s <ok|init|problem>

[-p] register

-f <file> register

-f <file> register

-d <device> [-p] unregister

-a unregister

-d <device> -s <ok|init|problem> report

[-i[a]] [-e] list

state

savepnotes

82

. . .

. .C

cphastar t_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start cpha

Permission: -r-xr-xr-x


S Y N T A X

cphastart [-d]

O P T I O N S

The cphastart_start command accepts cphastart options.

83

C0

cphastop_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to stop cpha



S Y N T A X

cphastop

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cphastop_start command.

84

. . .

. .C

cpinfo


Location: /sbin

Description: utility to create a cpinfo file for troubleshooting

Permissions: -rwxr--r--


S Y N T A X

cpinfo [[-v] | [-o filename] [-c cma]]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v be verbose

-o output file name

-c cma specify Provider-1 CMA as cma

85

C0

cpinfo_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to run the cpinfo command from Standard Mode



S Y N T A X

cpinfo

O P T I O N S

The cpinfo_start scripts accepts cpinfo options and arguments.

86

. . .

. .C

cpio


Location: /bin

Description: utility for creating binary format archives



S Y N T A X

cpio {-o|--create} [-0acvABLV] [-C bytes] [-H format] [-M message] [-O [[user@]host:]archive] [-F [[user@]host:]archive] [--file=[[user@]host:]archive] [--format=format] [--message=message] [--null] [--resetaccess-time] [--verbose] [--dot] [--append] [--blocksize=blocks] [--dereference] [--io-size=bytes] [--quiet] [--force-local] [--help] [--version] < name-list [> archive]

cpio {-i|--extract} [-bcdfmnrtsuvBSV] [-C bytes] [-E file] [-H format] [-M message] [-R [user][:.][group]] [-I [[user@]host:]archive] [-F [[user@]host:]archive] [--file=[[user@]host:]archive] [--make-directories] [--nonmatching] [--preserve-modification-time] [--numericuid-gid] [--rename] [--list] [--swap-bytes] [--swap] [--dot] [--unconditional] [--verbose] [--blocksize=blocks] [--swap-halfwords] [--io-size=bytes] [--pattern-file=file] [--format=format] [--owner=[user][:.][group]] [--no-preserve-owner] [--message=message] [--force-local] [--no-absolute-filenames] [--sparse] [--only-verify-crc] [--quiet] [--help] [--version] [pattern...] [< archive]

cpio {-p|--pass-through} [-0adlmuvLV] [-R [user][:.][group]] [--null] [--reset-access-time] [--makedirectories] [--link] [--quiet] [--preserve-modificationtime] [--unconditional] [--verbose] [--dot] [--dereference] [--owner=[user][:.][group]] [--no-preserve-owner] [--sparse] [--help] [--version] destination-directory < name-list

87

C0

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a reset the access times of files after reading them, so that it does not look like they have just been read

--reset-access-time reset the access times of files after reading them, so that it does not look like they have just been read

-A append to an existing archive; only works in copyout mode. The archive must be a disk file specified with the -O or -F (--file) option

--append append to an existing archive; only works in copyout mode. The archive must be a disk file specified with the -O or -F (--file) option

-b in copy-in mode, swap both halfwords of words and bytes of halfwords in the data; equivalent to -sS; use this option to convert 32-bit integers between big-endian and little-endian machines

--swap in copy-in mode, swap both halfwords of words and bytes of halfwords in the data; equivalent to -sS; use this option to convert 32-bit integers between big-endian and little-endian machines

-B set the I/O block size to 5120 bytes; initially the block size is 512 bytes.

--block-size=BLOCK_SIZE set the I/O block size to BLOCK_SIZE * 512 bytes

-c use the old portable (ASCII) archive format

88

. . .

. .C

-C IO_SIZE set the I/O block size to IO_SIZE bytes

--io-size=IO_SIZE set the I/O block size to IO_SIZE bytes

-d create leading directories where needed

--make-directories create leading directories where needed

-E FILE in copy-in mode, read additional patterns specifying filenames to extract or list from FILE; the lines of FILE are treated as if they had been nonoption arguments to cpio

--pattern-file=FILE in copy-in mode, read additional patterns specifying filenames to extract or list from FILE; the lines of FILE are treated as if they had been nonoption arguments to cpio

-f only copy files that do not match any of the given patterns

--nonmatching only copy files that do not match any of the given patterns

-F archive archive filename to use instead of standard input or output; to use a tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that starts with HOSTNAME:; the hostname can be preceded by a username and an @ to access the remote tape drive as that user, if you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's ~/.rhosts file)

Option Explanation

89

C0

--file=archive archive filename to use instead of standard input or output; to use a tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that starts with HOSTNAME:; the hostname can be preceded by a username and an @ to access the remote tape drive as that user, if you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's ~/.rhosts file)

--force-local with -F, -I, or -O, take the archive file name to be a local file even if it contains a colon, which would ordinarily indicate a remote host name

-H FORMAT use archive format FORMAT; the valid formats are listed below; the same names are also recognized in all-caps; the default in copy-in mode is to automatically detect the archive format, and in copyout mode is bin

--format=FORMAT use archive format FORMAT; the valid formats are listed below; the same names are also recognized in all-caps; the default in copy-in mode is to automatically detect the archive format, and in copyout mode is bin

bin (-H, --format argument) obsolete binary format

odc (-H, --format argument) old (POSIX.1) portable format

newc (-H, --format argument) new (SVR4) portable format, which supports file systems having more than 65536 inodes

crc (-H, --format argument) new (SVR4) portable format with a checksum added

tar (-H, --format argument) old tar format

Option Explanation

90

. . .

. .C

ustar (-H, --format argument) POSIX.1 tar format; also recognizes GNU tar archives, which are similar but not identical

hpbin (-H, --format argument) obsolete binary format used by HPUX's cpio (which stores device files differently)

bpodc (-H, --format argument) portable format used by HPUX's cpio (which stores device files differently)

-i run in copy-in mode

--extract run in copy-in mode

-l archive archive filename to use instead of standard input; to use a tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that starts with HOST- NAME:; hostname can be preceded by a username and an @ to access the remote tape drive as that user, if you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's ~/.rhosts file).

-k ignored; for compatibility with other versions of cpio

-l link files instead of copying them, when possible

--link link files instead of copying them, when possible

-L dereference symbolic links (copy the files that they point to instead of copying the links)

--dereference dereference symbolic links (copy the files that they point to instead of copying the links)

-m retain previous file modification times when creating files

Option Explanation

91

C0

--preserve-modification-time retain previous file modification times when creating files

-M MESSAGE print MESSAGE when the end of a volume of the backup media (such as a tape or a floppy disk) is reached, to prompt the user to insert a new volume; if MESSAGE contains the string %d, it is replaced by the current volume number (starting at 1)

--message=MESSAGE print MESSAGE when the end of a volume of the backup media (such as a tape or a floppy disk) is reached, to prompt the user to insert a new volume; if MESSAGE contains the string %d, it is replaced by the current volume number (starting at 1)

-n in the verbose table of contents listing, show numeric UID and GID instead of translating them into names

--numeric-uid-gid in the verbose table of contents listing, show numeric UID and GID instead of translating them into names

--no-absolute-filenames in copy-in mode, create all files relative to the current directory, even if they have an absolute file name in the archive

--no-preserve-owner in copy-in mode and copy-pass mode, do not change the ownership of the files; leave them owned by the user extracting them; this is the default for nonroot users, so that users on System V don't inadvertantly give away files

-o run in copy-out mode

--create run in copy-out mode

Option Explanation

92

. . .

. .C

-O archive archive filename to use instead of standard output; to use a tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that starts with HOSTNAME:; hostname can be preceded by a username and an @ to access the remote tape drive as that user, if you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's ~/.rhosts file);

--only-verify-crc when reading a CRC format archive in copy-in mode, only verify the CRC's of each file in the archive, don't actually extract the files

-p run in copy-pass mode

--pass-through run in copy-pass mode

--quiet do not print the number of blocks copied

-r interactively rename files

--rename interactively rename files

-R [user][:.][group] in copy-out and copy-pass modes, set the ownership of all files created to the specified user and/or group; either the user or the group, or both, must be present; if the group is omitted but the : or . separator is given, use the given user's login group; only the superuser can change files' ownership

Option Explanation

93

C0

--owner [user][:.][group] in copy-out and copy-pass modes, set the ownership of all files created to the specified user and/or group; either the user or the group, or both, must be present; if the group is omitted but the : or . separator is given, use the given user's login group; only the superuser can change files' ownership

--sparse in copy-in and copy-pass modes, write files with large blocks of zeros as sparse files

-s in copy-in mode, swap the bytes of each halfword (pair of bytes) in the files

--swap-bytes in copy-in mode, swap the bytes of each halfword (pair of bytes) in the files

-S in copy-in mode, swap the halfwords of each word (4 bytes) in the files

--swap-halfwords in copy-in mode, swap the halfwords of each word (4 bytes) in the files

-t print a table of contents of the input

--list print a table of contents of the input

-u replace all files, without asking whether to replace existing newer files with older files

--unconditional replace all files, without asking whether to replace existing newer files with older files

Option Explanation

94

. . .

. .C

-v list the files processed, or with -t, give an ls -l style table of contents listing; in a verbose table of contents of a ustar archive, user and group names in the archive that do not exist on the local system are replaced by the names that correspond locally to the numeric UID and GID stored in the archive

--verbose list the files processed, or with -t, give an ls -l style table of contents listing; in a verbose table of contents of a ustar archive, user and group names in the archive that do not exist on the local system are replaced by the names that correspond locally to the numeric UID and GID stored in the archive

-V print a . for each file processed

--dot print a . for each file processed

--version print the cpio program version number and exit

Option Explanation

95

C0

cpl ic_start


Location: /bin

Description: start the wrapper script for cplic



S Y N T A X

cplic put ...cplic del [-F <output file>] <signature>cplic print ...cplic check ...Remote Licensing:cplic put <object name> ...cplic del <object name> [-F <output file>] <signature>cplic get <object name | -all> cplic upgrade -l input fileLicense Database Operations:cplic db_add ...cplic db_rm <signature>cplic db_print <object name | -all> ...For help on any command add the -h option

O P T I O N S

Usage: The cplic_start script accepts cplic options and arguments.

Option Explanation

put used to install one or more local licenses

del deletes a single Check Point license on a host

print print details of Check Point licenses on local machine

check check if a license on a machine will allow a given feature to be used

96

. . .

. .C

upgrade upgrade a license on a remote machine

db_add add a license to a central license repository

db_rm remove a license from a central license repository

db_print list licenses associated with a given object, or all licenses, in a central license repository

Option Explanation

97

C0

cpnetconf (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to /bin/cpwmd



S Y N T A X

See cpwmd

O P T I O N S

See cpwmd

98

. . .

. .C

cpp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: the C preprocessor



S Y N T A X

cpp [options] file...Permissable languages include: c c++ assembler none'none' means revert to the default behaviour ofguessing the language based on the file's extensionOptions starting with -g, -f, -m, -O or -W are automatically passed on tothe various sub-processes invoked by cpp. In order to pass other optionson to these processes the -W<letter> options must be used.(Use '-v --help' to display command line options of sub-processes)

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-pass-exit-codes exit with highest error code from a phase


-dumpspecs display all of the built in spec strings

-dumpversion display the version of the compiler

-dumpmachine display the compiler's target processor

-print-search-dirs display the directories in the compiler's search path

-print-libgcc-file-name display the name of the compiler's companion library

-print-file-name=lib display the full path to library lib

99

C0

-print-prog-name=prog display the full path to compiler component prog

-print-multi-directory display the root directory for versions of libgcc

-print-multi-lib display the mapping between command line options and multiple library search directories

-Wa,options pass comma-separated options on to the assembler

-Wp,options pass comma-separated options on to the preprocessor

-Wl,options pass comma-separated options on to the linker

-Xlinker arg pass arg on to the linker

-save-temps do not delete intermediate files

-pipe use pipes rather than intermediate files

-time time the execution of each subprocess

-specs=file override builtin specs with the contents of file

-std=standard assume that the input sources are for standard

-B directory add directory to the compiler's search paths

-b machine run gcc for target machine, if installed

-V version run gcc version number version, if installed

-v display the programs invoked by the compiler

Option Explanation

100

. . .

. .C

-E preprocess only; do not compile, assemble or link

-S compile only; do not assemble or link

-c compile and assemble, but do not link

-o file place the output into file

-x language specify the language of the following input files

Option Explanation

101

C0

cpshel l


Location: /bin

Description: limited access shell; Standard Mode; issuing this command in Expert Mode will open an instance of cpshell with most cpshell functionality



S Y N T A X

cpshell

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cpshell command.

102

. . .

. .C

cpstart_star t


Location: /bin

Description: start the wrapper script for cpstart



S Y N T A X

cpstart usage:cpstart -b cpstart -fwflag <flag> cpstart cpshared cpstart FW1 cpstart uag cpstart FG1 cpstart rtm cpstart "Reporting Module" cpstart WebAccess cpstart SSC cpstart uas

O P T I O N S

Usage: The cpstart_start script accepts cpstart options and arguments.

Option Explanation

-b run from boot

-fwflag FLAG start with FLAG to FireWall-1

cpshared start only SVN Foundation

FW1 start only FireWall-1

uag start only UserAuthority Gateway

FG1 start only FloodGate-1

rtm start only SmartView Monitor

103

C0

“Reporting Module” start only SmartView Reporter

WebAccess start only WebAccess

SSC start only Sofaware extension

uas start only UserAuthority Server

Option Explanation

104

. . .

. .C

cpstat_start


Location: /bin

Description: script to start cpstat in Standard Mode; utility for viewing status information about SecurePlatform and other installed Check Point products



S Y N T A X

cpstat [-h host][-p port][-f flavour][-o polling [-c count] [-e period]] [-d] application_flag

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h resolvable hostname, a dot-notation address, or a DAIP object name; default is localhost

-p port number of the AMON server; default is the standard AMON port (18192)

-f flavour of the output (as appears in the configuration file); default is to use the first flavour found in the configuration file

-o polling interval (seconds) specifies the pace of the results; default is 0, meaning the results are shown only once

-c specifying how many times the results are shown; default is 0, meaning the results are repeatedly shown

105

C0

-e period interval (seconds) specifies the interval over which ‘statistical’ oids are computed; ignored for regular oids

-d debug mode

Application Flag Application Flag Flavor

os default, routing, memory, old_memory, cpu, |disk, perf, all, average_cpu, average_memory, statistics

persistency product, TableConfig, SourceConfig

fw default, policy, perf, hmem, kmem, inspect, cookies, chains, fragments, totals, ufp, http, ftp, telnet, rlogin, smtp, sync, all

vpn default, product, IKE, ipsec, traffic, compression, accelerator, nic, statistics, watermarks, all

ha default, all

ls default

mg default

polsrv default, all

Option Explanation

106

. . .

. .C

cpstop_start


Location: /bin

Description: start the wrapper script for cpstop



S Y N T A X

cpstop <option>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-fwflag <flag> stop with flag to FireWall-1

cpshared stop only SVN Foundation

FW1 stop only FireWall-1

uag stop only UserAuthority Gateway

FG1 stop only FloodGate-1

rtm stop only SmartView Monitor

"Reporting Module" stop only SmartView Reporter

WebAccess stop only WebAccess

SSC stop only SofaWare Extension

uas stop only UserAuthority Server

107

C0

cpt imezone


Location: /bin

Description: interactive script for setting the timezone



S Y N T A X

timezone [-show | --help]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-show display the configured time zone information


108

. . .

. .C

cpver_star t


Location: /bin

Description: prints SVN Foundation version and build number to the standard output



S Y N T A X

cpver

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cpver_start command.

109

C0

cpwm_wd


Location: /bin

Description: Web interface Web server configuration script



S Y N T A X

cpwm_wd

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the cpwm_wd command.

110

. . .

. .C

cpwmd


Location: /bin

Description: Check Point Web Management daemon



S Y N T A X

cpwmdcpwmd -f <config-file>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f config_file specify a configuration file config_file

111

C0

csh (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to tcsh



S Y N T A X

See tcsh

O P T I O N S

See tcsh

112

. . .

. .C

ctr l_dns


Location: /bin

Description: script to add and delete name servers



S Y N T A X

dns [<add|del> <ip_of_nameserver>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

add add a name server to the list of name servers

del remove a name server from the list of name servers

113

C0

ctr la l tde l


Location: /sbin

Description: used to reboot the system



S Y N T A X

ctrlaltdel hard|soft

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the ctrlaltdel command.

114

. . .

. .C

cut


Location: /bin

Description: cut out selected columns or fields in one or more files



S Y N T A X

cut [OPTION]... [FILE]...Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard output.Use one, and only one of -b, -c or -f. Each LIST is made up of onerange, or many ranges separated by commas. Each range is one of:N N'th byte, character or field, counted from 1N- from N'th byte, character or field, to end of lineN-M from N'th to M'th (included) byte, character or field-M from first to M'th (included) byte, character or fieldWith no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b output only these bytes

--bytes=LIST output only these bytes

-c output only these characters

--characters=LIST output only these characters

-d DELIM use DELIM instead of TAB for field delimiter

--delimiter=DELIM use DELIM instead of TAB for field delimiter

-f LIST output only these fields; also print any line

--fields=LIST output only these fields; also print any line

115

C0

-n ignored

-s do not print lines not containing delimiters

--only-delimited do not print lines not containing delimiters

--output-delimiter=STRING use STRING as the output delimiter; the default is to use the input delimiter



Option Explanation

116

. . .

. .C

cut (symbol ic l ink)Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/cut



S Y N T A X

See cut

O P T I O N S

See cut

117

C0

118

. . .

. .D

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D

date


Location: /bin

Description: print the current date and time



S Y N T A X

./date [OPTION]... [+FORMAT] or: ./date [-u|--utc|--universal] [MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]]Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the system date.FORMAT controls the output. The only valid option for the second form specifies Coordinated Universal Time. By default, date pads numeric fields with zeroes. GNU date recognizesthe following modifiers between `%' and a numeric directive.

`-' (hyphen) do not pad the field `_' (underscore) pad the field with spaces

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d STRING display time described by STRING, not now

--date=STRING display time described by STRING, not now

-f DATEFILE like --date once for each line of DATEFILE

--file=DATEFILE like --date once for each line of DATEFILE

119

D0

-I TIMESPEC output an ISO-8601 compliant date/time string; TIMESPEC=date (or missing) for date only, hours, minutes, or seconds for date and time to the indicated precision

--iso-8601[=TIMESPEC] output an ISO-8601 compliant date/time string; TIMESPEC=date (or missing) for date only, hours, minutes, or seconds for date and time to the indicated precision

-r FILE display the last modification time of FILE

--reference=FILE display the last modification time of FILE

-R output RFC-822 compliant date string

--rfc-822 output RFC-822 compliant date string

-s set time described by STRING

--set-STRING set time described by STRING

-u print or set Coordinated Universal Time

--utc print or set Coordinated Universal Time

--universal print or set Coordinated Universal Time



Option Explanation

120

. . .

. .D

Format Option Explanation

%% a literal %

%a locale’s abbreviated weekday name (Sun. Sat.)

%A locale’s full weekday name; variable length (Sunday, Saturday)

%b locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec)

%B locale's full month name, variable length (January..December)

%c locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989)

%d day of month (01..31)

%D date (mm/dd/yy)

%e day of month, blank padded ( 1..31)

%h same as %b

%H hour (00..23)

%I hour (01..12)

%j day of year (001..366)

%k hour ( 0..23)

%l hour ( 1..12)

%m month (01..12)

%M minute (00..59)

%n a newline

%p locale's AM or PM

%r time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M)

121

D0

%s seconds since `00:00:00 1970-01-01 UTC' (a GNU extension)

%S second (00..60)

%t a horizontal tab

%T time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss)

%U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)

%V week number of year with Monday as first day of week (01..53)

%w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday

%W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)

%x locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy)

%X locale's time representation (%H:%M:%S)

%y last two digits of year (00..99)

%Y year (1970...)

%z RFC-822 style numeric timezone (-0500) (a nonstandard extension)

%Z time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable

Format Option Explanation

122

. . .

. .D

date_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to configure date and time settings; in SecurePlatform the date command is aliased to date_start



S Y N T A X

date [MM-DD-YYYY]

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the date_start command.

123

D0

dd


Location: /bin

Description: make a copy of an input file, using specified conditions, and send the results to an output file



S Y N T A X

dd [OPTION]...Copy a file, converting and formatting according to the options.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

bs=BYTES force ibs=BYTES and obs=BYTES

cbs=BYTES convert BYTES bytes at a time

conv=KEYWORDS convert the file as per the comma separated keyword list KEYWORD

count=BLOCKS copy only BLOCKS input blocks

ibs=BYTES read BYTES bytes at a time

if=FILE read from FILE instead of stdin

obs=BYTES write BYTES bytes at a time

of=FILE write to FILE instead of stdout

seek=BLOCKS skip BLOCKS obs-sized blocks at start of output

skip=BLOCKS skip BLOCKS ibs-sized blocks at start of input



124

. . .

. .D

BLOCKS and BYTES may be followed by the following multiplicative suffixes:

xM M, c 1, w 2, b 512, kD 1000, k 1024, MD 1,000,000, M 1,048,576,GD 1,000,000,000, G 1,073,741,824, and so on for T, P, E, Z, Y.

Each KEYWORD may be:

Keyword Explanation

ascii from EBCDIC to ASCII

ebcdic from ASCII to EBCDIC

ibm from ASCII to alternated EBCDIC

block pad newline-terminated records with spaces to cbs-size

unblock replace trailing spaces in cbs-size records with newline

lcase change upper case to lower case

notrunc do not truncate the output file

ucase change lower case to upper case

swap swap every pair of input bytes

noerror continue after read errors

sync pad every input block with NULs to ibs-size; when used with block or unblock, pad with spaces rather than NULs

125

D0

deal locvt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: deallocate unused virtual consoles



S Y N T A X

deallocvt [N1 N2 ...]Deallocate virtual terminal(s)

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-t virtual terminal

--vterm=v virtual terminal





126

. . .

. .D

debugfs


Location: /sbin

Description: debug an ext2 filesystem



S Y N T A X

debugfs [-b blocksize] [-s superblock] [-f cmd_file] [-R request] [-V] [[-w] [-c] device]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b blocksize forces the use of the given block size for the file system, rather than detecting the correct block size as normal

-s superblock causes the file system superblock to be read from the given block number, rather than the default (1). If you give a -s option, you must also give a -b option

-f cmd_file causes debugfs to read in commands from cmd_file, and execute them; when debugfs is finished executing those commands, it will exit

-R request causes debugfs to execute the single command specified by request


-w device specifies the file system should be opened in read-write mode; without this option, the file system is opened in read-only mode

127

D0

-c device specifies the file system should be opened in catastrophic mode, in which the inode and group bitmaps are not read initially; can be useful for filesystems with significant corruption, but because of this, catastrophic mode forces the filesystem to be opened read-only

Supported Commands Explanation

cat filespec dump the contents of the inode filespec to stdout

cd filespec change the current working directory to filespec

chroot filespec change the root directory to be the directory filespec

close close the currently open file system

clri file clear the contents of the inode file

dump [-p] filspec out_file dump the contents of the inode filespec to the out put file out_file; if the -p option is given set the owner, group and permissions information on out_file to match filespec

expand_dir filespec expand the directory filespec

feature [fs_feature] [-fs_feature] ...

set or clear various file system features in the superblock; after setting or clearing any file system features that were requested, print the current state of the file system feature set

find_free_block [count [goal]] find the first count free blocks, starting from goal and allocate it

Option Explanation

128

. . .

. .D

find_free_inode [dir [mode]] find a free inode and allocate it; if present, dir specifies the inode number of the directory which the inode is to be located; the second optional argument mode specifies the permissions of the new inode. (if the directory bit is set on the mode, the allocation routine will function differently)

freeb block [count] mark the block number block as not allocated; if the optional argument count is present, then count size blocksize; note that this does not fully initialize all of the data structures; to do this, use the mke2fs program; this is just a call to the low-level library, which sets up the superblock and block descriptors

kill_file filespec deallocate the inode filespec and its blocks; note that this does not remove any directory entries (if any) to this inode; see the rm command if you wish to unlink a file

lcd directory change the current working directory of the debugfs process to directory on the native filesystem

ln filespec dest_file create a link named dest_file which is a link to filespec; note this does not adjust the inode reference counts

logdump [-ac] [-b<block>] [-i<inode>] [-f<journal_file>] [output_file]

dump the contents of the ext3 journal

ls [-l] [-d] filespec print a listing of the files in the directory filespec; the -l flag will list files using a more verbose format; the -d flag will list deleted entries in the directory.


129

D0

modify_inode filespec modify the contents of the inode structure in the inode filespec

mkdir filespec make a directory

mknod filespec [p|[[c|b] major minor]]

create a special device file (a named pipe, character or block device); if a character or block device is to be made, the major and minor device numbers must be specified

ncheck inode_num ... take the requested list of inode numbers, and print a listing of pathnames to those inodes

open [-w] [-f] [-i] [-c] [-b blocksize] [-s superblock] device

open a filesystem for editing; the -w flag causes the filesystem to be opened for writing; the -f should be an existing directory on the native filesystem

rm pathname unlink pathname; if this causes the inode pointed to by pathname to have no other references, deallocate the file; this command functions as the unlink() system call

rmdir filespec remove the directory filespec; this function is currently not implemented

setb block [count] mark the block number block as allocated; if the optional argument count is present, then count blocks starting at block number block will be marked as allocated

seti filespec mark inode filespec as in use in the inode bitmap


130

. . .

. .D

set_super_value field value set the superblock field field to value; the list of valid superblock fields which can be set via this command can be displayed by using the command: set_super_value -l

show_super_stats [-h] list the contents of the super block and the block group descriptors; if the -h flag is given, only print out the superblock contents

stat filespec display the contents of the inode structure of the inode filespec

testb block [count] test if the block number block is marked as allocated in the block bitmap; if the optional argument count is present, then count blocks starting at block number block will be tested

testi filespec test if the inode filespec is marked as allocated in the inode bitmap

unlink pathname remove the link specified by pathname to an inode; note this does not adjust the inode reference counts


131

D0

depmod


Location: /sbin

Description: create a dependency file for the module specified at the command line



S Y N T A X

depmod 2.4.13depmod -[aA] [-n -e -v -q -V -r -u] [-C configfile] [-F kernelsyms] [-b basedirectory] [forced_version]depmod [-n -e -v -q -r -u] [-F kernelsyms] module1.o module2.o ...If no arguments (except options) are given, ‘depmod -a’ is assumed

depmod will output a dependancy list suitable for the modprobe utility.depmod -a will find the list of modules to probe from the file/etc/modules.conf. It will output the result into the depfile specifiedin this configuration file

depmod -A is the same as depmod -a, but will first compare the timestampsof the files involved to see if the depfile needs updating.

Normally depmod operates silently, reporting only the list of modules that won't load properly (missing symbols).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a probe modules listed in /etc/modules.conf

--all probe modules listed in /etc/modules.conf

-A like -a, compares timestamps first

-q don't report missing symbols

132

. . .

. .D

--quiet don't report missing symbols

-e list unresolved symbols for the given module

--errsyms list unresolved symbols for the given module

-s report errors using syslog

--syslog report errors using syslog

-v print all visited modules

--verbose print all visited modules

-n write the dependency file on stdout only

--show write the dependency file on stdout only

-r allow root to allow modules not owned by root

--root allow root to allow modules not owned by root

-V print the version and exit

--version print the version and exit

-u set an error return code for unresolved symbols

--unresolved-error set an error return code for unresolved symbols

-h print help and exit

--help print help and exit

The following options are useful for people managing distributions:

-b basedirectory use an image of a module tree

--basedir basedirectory use an image of a module tree

Option Explanation

133

D0

-C configfile use the file configfile instead of /etc/modules.conf

--config configfile use the file configfile instead of /etc/modules.conf

-F kernelsyms use the file kernelsyms instead of the current kernel symbols

--filesyms kernelsyms use the file kernelsyms instead of the current kernel symbols

Option Explanation

134

. . .

. .D

df


Location: /bin

Description: report on free disk space



S Y N T A X

df [OPTION]... [FILE]...Show information about the filesystem on which each FILE resides,or all filesystems by default.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a include filesystems having 0 blocks

--all include filesystems having 0 blocks

--block-size=SIZE use SIZE-byte blocks

-h print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K 234M 2G)

--human-readable print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K 234M 2G)

-H likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024

--si likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024

-i list inode information instead of block usage

--inodes list inode information instead of block usage

-k like --block-size=1024

135

D0

--kilobytes like --block-size=1024

-l limit listing to local filesystems

--local limit listing to local filesystems

-m like --block-size=1048576

--megabytes like --block-size=1048576

--no-sync do not invoke sync before getting usage info (default)

-P use the POSIX output format

--portability use the POSIX output format

--sync invoke sync before getting usage info

-t TYPE limit listing to filesystems of type TYPE

--type=TYPE limit listing to filesystems of type TYPE

-T print filesystem type

--print-type print filesystem type

-x TYPE limit listing to filesystems not of type TYPE

--exclude-type=TYPE limit listing to filesystems not of type TYPE

-v ignored



Option Explanation

136

. . .

. .D

dhcpcd


Location: /sbin

Description: DHCP client daemon



S Y N T A X

dhcpcd [-dknrBCDHRT] [-l leasetime] [-h hostname] [-t timeout][-i vendorClassID] [-I ClientID] [-c filename] [-s [ipaddr]] [interface]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d force dhcpd to the forground; log to the standard error descriptor; debugging mode

-k sends a SIGTERM signal to the dhcpcd process that is currently running

-n sends SIGALRM signal to the dhcpcd process that is currently running which forces dhcpcd to try to renew the lease; if dhcpcd is not running the flag is ignored and dhcpcd follows the normal startup procedure

-r makes dhcpcd RFC1541 (obsolete) compliant; dhcpcd is RFC2131 compliant unless this option is specified

-B requests broadcast response from DHCP server

-C forces dhcpcd to calculate checksum on received packets

137

D0

-D forces dhcpcd to set domainname of the host to the domainname option supplied by DHCP server; by default dhcpcd will NOT set domainname of the host to the domainname option received from DHCP server

-H forces dhcpcd to set hostname of the host to the hostname option supplied by DHCP server; by default dhcpcd will NOT set hostname of the host to the hostname option received from DHCP server

-R prevents dhcpcd from replacing existing /etc/resolv.conf file

-T test case, when dhcpcd goes through the DHCP negotiation sequence but doesn't actually configure the interface; it does however write the <ConfigDir>/dhcpcd<interface>.info and <ConfigDir>/dhcpcd<interface>.cache files and it does attempt to execute <ConfigDir>/dhcpcd.exe script. The pathname of dhcpcd.exe executable script can be changed with -c <ExecFilePath> option; -T option is used primarily for testing DHCP servers, for obtaining multiple IP addresses for the same dummy interface, and/or configuring virtual interfaces in conjunction with -L <ConfigDir> and -I <ClientID> options

-l leasetime specifies (in seconds) the recommended lease time to the server; note that the server can override this value if it sees fit; this value is used in the DHCPDISCOVER message

Option Explanation

138

. . .

. .D

-h hostname specifies a string used for the hostname option field when dhcpcd sends DHCP messages; some DHCP servers require the hostname option field containing a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients

-t timeout specifies (in seconds ) for how long dhcpcd will try to get an IP address; default is 60 seconds; dhcpcd will not fork into background until it gets a valid IP address in which case dhcpcd will return 0 to the parent process; in a case dhcpcd times out before receiving a valid IP address from DHCP server dhcpcd will return exit code 1 to the parent process

-i vendorClassID specifies the vendor class identifier string. dhcpcd uses the default vendor class identifier string (system name, sytem release, and machine type) if it is not specified

-I ClientID specifies the client identifier string. dhcpcd uses the default client identifier (Ethernet Address of the network interface) if it is not specified

-c filename specifies the command file which is invoked when dhcpcd successfully gets an IP address

-s ipaddr sends DHCP_INFORM message to DHCP server using ipaddr; the optional ipaddr parameter must be in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; if no ipaddr parameter is given on the command line dhcpcd will use the IP address currently assigned to the interface; if there is no IP address currently assigned to the interface dhcpcd will use previously obtained IP address stored in <ConfigDir>/dhcpcd-<interface>.cache file

Option Explanation

139

D0

di f f


Location: /usr/bin

Description: compare two text files



S Y N T A X

diff [OPTION]... FILESFILES are `FILE1 FILE2' or `DIR1 DIR2' or `DIR FILE...' or `FILE... DIR';if --from-file or --to-file is given, there are no restrictions on FILES.If a FILE is `-', read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-i consider upper- and lower-case to be the same

--ignore-case consider upper- and lower-case to be the same

-w ignore all white space

--ignore-all-space ignore all white space

-b ignore changes in the amount of white space

--ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space

-B ignore changes whose lines are all blank

--ignore-blank-lines ignore changes whose lines are all blank

-I RE ignore changes whose lines all match RE

140

. . .

. .D

--ignore-matching-lines=RE ignore changes whose lines all match RE

--binary read and write data in binary mode (no effect on this platform)

-a treat all files as text

--text treat all files as text

-c output NUM (default 2) lines of copied context

-C NUM output NUM (default 2) lines of copied context

--context[=NUM] output NUM (default 2) lines of copied context

-u output NUM (default 2) lines of unified context

-U NUM output NUM (default 2) lines of unified context

--unified[=NUM] output NUM (default 2) lines of unified context

-NUM use NUM context lines

-L LABEL use LABEL instead of file name

--label LABEL use LABEL instead of file name

-p show which C function each change is in

--show-c-function show which C function each change is in

-F RE show the most recent line matching RE

--show-function-line=RE show the most recent line matching RE

-q output only whether files differ

Option Explanation

141

D0

--brief output only whether files differ

-e output an ed script

--ed output an ed script

-n output an RCS format diff

--rcs output an RCS format diff

-y output in two columns

--side-by-side output in two columns

-W NUM output at most NUM (default 130) characters per line

--width=NUM output at most NUM (default 130) characters per line

--left-column output only the left column of common lines

--suppress-common-lines do not output common lines

-D NAME output merged file to show `#ifdef NAME' diffs

--ifdef=NAME output merged file to show `#ifdef NAME' diffs

--GTYPE-group-format=GFMT similar, but format GTYPE input groups with GFMT

--line-format=LFMT similar, but format all input lines with LFMT

--LTYPE-line-format=LFMT similar, but format LTYPE input lines with LFMT

LTYPE is old, new, or unchanged. GTYPE is LTYPE or changed.

GFMT may contain:

%< lines from FILE1

%> lines from FILE2

Option Explanation

142

. . .

. .D

%= lines common to FILE1 and FILE2

%[-][WIDTH][.[PREC]]{doxX}LETTER printf-style spec for LETTER

LETTERs are as follows for new group, lower case for old group:

F first line number

L last line number

N number of lines = L-F+1

E F-1

M L+1

LFMT may contain:

%L contents of line

%l contents of line, excluding any trailing newline

%[-][WIDTH][.[PREC]]{doxX}n printf-style spec for input line number

Either GFMT or LFMT may contain:

%% %

%c'C' the single character C

%c'\OOO' the character with octal code OOO

Option Explanation

-l pass the output through pr to paginate it

--paginate pass the output through pr to paginate it

-t expand tabs to spaces in output

Option Explanation

143

D0

--expand-tabs expand tabs to spaces in output

-T make tabs line up by prepending a tab

--initial-tabs make tabs line up by prepending a tab

-r recursively compare any subdirectories found

--recursive recursively compare any subdirectories found

-N treat absent files as empty

--new-file treat absent files as empty

-P treat absent first files as empty

--unidirectional-new-file treat absent first files as empty

-s report when two files are the same

--report-identical-files report when two files are the same

-x PAT exclude files that match PAT

--exclude=PAT exclude files that match PAT

-X FILE exclude files that match any pattern in FILE

--exclude-from=FILE exclude files that match any pattern in FILE

-S FILE start with FILE when comparing directories

--starting-file=FILE start with FILE when comparing directories

--from-file=FILE1 compare FILE1 to all operands; FILE1 can be a directory

--to-file=FILE2 compare all operands to FILE2; FILE2 can be a directory

Option Explanation

144

. . .

. .D

--horizon-lines=NUM keep NUM lines of the common prefix and suffix

--inhibit-hunk-merge do not merge hunks

-d try hard to find a smaller set of change

--minimal try hard to find a smaller set of change

-H assume large files and many scattered small changes

--speed-large-files assume large files and many scattered small changes




Option Explanation

145

D0

di f f3


Location: /usr/bin

Description: compare three text files and report the differences



S Y N T A X

diff3 [OPTION]... MYFILE OLDFILE YOURFILEIf a FILE is `-', read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-e output unmerged changes from OLDFILE to YOURFILE into MYFILE

--ed output unmerged changes from OLDFILE to YOURFILE into MYFILE

-E output unmerged changes, bracketing conflicts

--show-overlap output unmerged changes, bracketing conflicts

-A output all changes, bracketing conflicts

--show-all output all changes, bracketing conflicts

-x output overlapping changes

--overlap-only output overlapping changes

-X output overlapping changes, bracketing them

146

. . .

. .D

-3 output unmerged nonoverlapping changes

--easy-only output unmerged nonoverlapping changes

-m output merged file instead of ed script (default -A)

--merge output merged file instead of ed script (default -A)

-L LABEL use LABEL instead of file name

--label=LABEL use LABEL instead of file name

-i append `w' and `q' commands to ed scripts

-a treat all files as text

--text treat all files as text

-T make tabs line up by prepending a tab

--initial-tab make tabs line up by prepending a tab




Option Explanation

147

D0

dir


Location: /usr/bin

Description: list directory contents



S Y N T A X

dir [OPTION]... [FILE]...List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).Sort entries alphabetically if none of -cftuSUX nor --sort.By default, color is not used to distinguish types of files. That isequivalent to using --color=none. Using the --color option without theoptional WHEN argument is equivalent to using --color=always. With--color=auto, color codes are output only if standard output is connectedto a terminal (tty).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a do not hide entries starting with .

--all do not hide entries starting with .

-A do not list implied . and ..

--almost-all do not list implied . and ..

-b print octal escapes for nongraphic characters

--escape print octal escapes for nongraphic characters


-B do not list implied entries ending with ~

148

. . .

. .D

--ignore-backups do not list implied entries ending with ~

-c with -lt: sort by, and show, ctime (time of last modification of file status information) with -l: show ctime and sort by name otherwise: sort by ctime

-C list entries by columns

--color[=WHEN] control whether color is used to distinguish file types; WHEN may be never, always, or auto

-d list directory entries instead of contents

--directory list directory entries instead of contents

-D generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode

--dired generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode

-f do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst

-F append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries --format=WORD across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C

--classify append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries --format=WORD across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C

--full-time list both full date and full time

-g ignored

-G inhibit display of group information

Option Explanation

149

D0

--no-group inhibit display of group information




-H same as --si for now; soon to change to conform to POSIX

--indicator-style=WORD append indicator with style WORD to entry names: none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p)

-i print index number of each file

--inode print index number of each file

-I PATTERN do not list implied entries matching shell PATTERN

--ignore=PATTERN do not list implied entries matching shell PATTERN



-l use a long listing format

-L list entries pointed to by symbolic links

--deference list entries pointed to by symbolic links

-m fill width with a comma separated list of entries

-n list numeric UIDs and GIDs instead of names

Option Explanation

150

. . .

. .D

--numeric-uid-gid list numeric UIDs and GIDs instead of names

-N print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control characters specially)

--literal print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control characters specially)

-o use long listing format without group info

-p append indicator (one of / = @ | ) to entries

--file-type append indicator (one of / = @ | ) to entries

-q print ? instead of non graphic characters

--hide-control-chars print ? instead of non graphic characters

--show-control-chars show non graphic characters as-is (default unless program is ls and output is a terminal)

-Q enclose entry names in double quotes

--quote-name enclose entry names in double quotes

--quoting-style=WORD use quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape

-r reverse order while sorting

--reverse reverse order while sorting

-R list subdirectories recursively

--recursive list subdirectories recursively

-s print size of each file, in blocks

Option Explanation

151

D0

--size print size of each file, in blocks

-S sort by file size

--sort=WORD extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t, version -v status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use -u

--time=WORD show time as WORD instead of modification time: atime, access, use, ctime or status; use specified time as sort key if --sort=time

-t sort by modification time

-T COLS assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8

--tabsize=COLS assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8

-u with -lt; sort by, and show, access time with -l; show access time and sort by name otherwise; sort by access time

-U do not sort; list entries in directory order

-v sort by version

-w COLS assume screen width instead of current value

--width=COLS assume screen width instead of current value

-x list entries by lines instead of by columns

-X sort alphabetically by entry extension

-l list one file per line


Option Explanation

152

. . .

. .D


Option Explanation

153

D0

dirname


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print pathname, excluding the last level



S Y N T A X

dirname NAME or: dirname OPTIONPrint NAME with its trailing /component removed; if NAME contains no /'s,output `.' (meaning the current directory).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



154

. . .

. .D

dmesg


Location: /bin

Description: display system control message for the kernel ring buffer



S Y N T A X

dmesg [-c] [-n level] [-s bufsize]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c clear the ring buffer contents after printing

-n LEVEL set the LEVEL at which logging of messages is done to the console

-s BUFF_SIZE use a buffer of BUFF_SIZE

155

D0

dnsdomainname (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to hostname



S Y N T A X

See hostname

O P T I O N S

See hostname

156

. . .

. .D

doexec


Location: /bin

Description: execute command in place of the current process



S Y N T A X

doexec /path/to/executable argv[0] [argv[1-n]]

O P T I O N S

All options are passed in the argv list to the executable being run.

157

D0

domainname (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to hostname



S Y N T A X

See hostname

O P T I O N S

See hostname

158

. . .

. .D

du


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print disk usage to the standard output



S Y N T A X

du [OPTION]... [FILE]...Summarize disk usage of each FILE, recursively for directories.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a write counts for all files, not just directories

--all write counts for all files, not just directories


-b print size in bytes

--bytes print size in bytes

-c produce a grand total

--total produce a grand total

-D dereference PATHs when symbolic link

--dereference-args dereference PATHs when symbolic link



159

D0

-H likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024




-l count sizes many times if hard linked

--count-links count sizes many times if hard linked

-L dereference all symbolic links

--dereference dereference all symbolic links

-m like --block-size=1048576

--megabytes like --block-size=1048576

-S do not include size of subdirectories

--separate-dirs do not include size of subdirectories

-s display only a total for each argument

--summarize display only a total for each argument

-x skip directories on different filesystems

--one-file-system skip directories on different filesystems

-X FILE exclude files that match any pattern in FILE

--exclude-from=FILE exclude files that match any pattern in FILE

Option Explanation

160

. . .

. .D

--exclude=PAT exclude files that match PAT

--max-depth=N print the total for a directory (or file, with --all) only if it is N or fewer levels below the command line argument; --max-depth=0 is the same as --summarize



Option Explanation

161

D0

dumpe2fs


Location: /sbin

Description: print information about a device's superblock and blocks group to the standard output



S Y N T A X

dumpe2fs [-bfhixV] [-ob superblock] [-oB blocksize] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b print the blocks which are reserved as bad in the filesystem

-f force dumpe2fs to display a filesystem even though it may have some filesystem feature flags which dumpe2fs may not understand (and which can cause some of dumpe2fs's display to be suspect)

-h only display the superblock information and not any of the block group descriptor detail information

-i display the filesystem data from an image file created by e2image, using device as the pathname to the image file


-ob superblock use the block superblock when examining the filesystem

-oB blocksize use blocks of blocksize bytes when examining the filesystem

162

. . .

. .D

dumpkeys


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print information about the keyboard driver's translation tables to the standard output



S Y N T A X

dumpkeys [options...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-i display information about keyboard driver

--short-info display information about keyboard driver

-l display above and symbols known to loadkeys

--long-info display above and symbols known to loadkeys

-n display keytable in hexadecimal notation

--numeric display keytable in hexadecimal notation

-f don't use short-hand notations, one row per keycode

--full-table don't use short-hand notations, one row per keycode

-1 one line per (modifier,keycode) pair

163

D0

--separate-lines one line per (modifier,keycode) pair

--funcs-only display only the function key strings

--keys-only display only the function key strings

-S shape choose output shape, where shape is:0 = default1 = same as --full-table2 = same as --separate-lines3 = one line per keycode, until 1st hole

--shape=shape choose output shape, where shape is:0 = default1 = same as --full-table2 = same as --separate-lines3 = one line per keycode, until 1st hole

--compose-only display only compose key combinations

-c charset_name interpret character action codes to be from the specified character set charset_name

--charset=charset_name interpret character action codes to be from the specified character set charset_name





Option Explanation

164

. . .

. .D

Available Character Sets

iso-8859-1

iso-8859-2

iso-8859-3

iso-8859-4

iso-8859-5

iso-8859-7

iso-8859-8

iso-8859-9

iso-8859-14

iso-8859-15

mazovia

koi8-r

koi8-u

iso-10646-18

165

D0

166

. . .

. .E

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E

e2fsckDo not run e2fsck on a mounted file system. Running e2fsck on a mounted file system can damage the file system beyond repair.


Location: /sbin

Description: similar to fsck, but specifically for Linux Second Extended filesystems



S Y N T A X

e2fsck [-panyrcdfvstFSV] [-b superblock] [-B blocksize] [-I inode_buffer_blocks] [-P process_inode_size] [-l|-L bad_blocks_file] [-C fd] [-j ext-journal] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p automatic repair (no questions)

-n make no changes to the filesystem

-y assume yes to all questions

-c check for bad blocks

-f force checking even if filesystem is marked clean

-v be verbose

-b superblock use alternative superblock

167

E0

-B blocksize Force blocksize when looking for superblock

-j external_journal set location of the external journal to external_journal

-l bad_blocks_file add to badblocks list

-L bad_blocks_file set badblocks list

Option Explanation

168

. . .

. .E

e2label


Location: /sbin

Description: display or change the filesystem label on the ext2 filesystem located on device



S Y N T A X

e2label device [newlabel]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options available for the e2label command.

169

E0

echo


Location: /bin

Description: write string to standard output



S Y N T A X

echo [OPTION]... [STRING]...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n do not output the trailing newline

-e enable interpretation of the backslash-escaped characters listed below

-E disable interpretation of the backslash-escaped characters listed below



Without -E, the following sequences are recognized and interpolated:

\NNN the character whose ASCII code is NNN (octal)

\\ backslash

\a alert (Bell)

\b backspace

\c suppress trailing newline

\f form feed

170

. . .

. .E

\n new line

\r carriage return

\t horizontal tab

\v vertical tab

Option Explanation

171

E0

egrep


Location: /bin

Description: search one or more files for lines that match an extended regular expression



S Y N T A X

egrep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE] ...Search for PATTERN in each FILE or standard input.Example: egrep -i 'hello world' menu.h main.cègrep' means `grep -E'. `fgrep' means `grep -F'.With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. If less thantwo FILEs given, assume -h. Exit status is 0 if match, 1 if no match,and 2 if trouble.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

Regexp selection and interpretation:

-E PATTERN is an extended regular expression

--extended-regexp PATTERN is an extended regular expression

-F PATTERN is a set of newline-separated strings

--fixed-strings PATTERN is a set of newline-separated strings

-G PATTERN is a basic regular expression

--basic-regexp PATTERN is a basic regular expression

172

. . .

. .E

-e PATTERN use PATTERN as a regular expression

--regexp=PATTERN use PATTERN as a regular expression

-f FILE obtain PATTERN from FILE

--file=FILE obtain PATTERN from FILE

-i ignore case distinctions

--ignore-case ignore case distinctions

-w force PATTERN to match only whole words

--word-regexp force PATTERN to match only whole words

-x force PATTERN to match only whole lines

--line-regexp force PATTERN to match only whole lines

-z a data line ends in 0 byte, not newline

--null-data a data line ends in 0 byte, not newline

Miscellaneous:

-s suppress error messages

--no-messages suppress error messages

-v select non-matching lines

--invert-match select non-matching lines




Option Explanation

173

E0

--mmap use memory-mapped input if possible

Output control:

-b print the byte offset with output lines

--byte-offset print the byte offset with output lines

-n print line number with output lines

--line-number print line number with output lines

-H print the filename for each match

--with-filename print the filename for each match

-h suppress the prefixing filename on output

--no-filename suppress the prefixing filename on output

-q suppress all normal output

--quiet suppress all normal output

--silent suppress all normal output

--binary-files=TYPE assume that binary files are TYPETYPE is binary, text, or without-match

-a equivalent to --binary-files=text

--text equivalent to --binary-files=text

-I equivalent to --binary-files=without-match

-d ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is read, recurse, or skip

--directories=ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is read, recurse, or skip

Option Explanation

174

. . .

. .E

-r equivalent to --directories=recurse

--recursive equivalent to --directories=recurse

-L only print FILE names containing no match

--files-without-match only print FILE names containing no match

-l only print FILE names containing matches

--files-with-matches only print FILE names containing matches

-c only print a count of matching lines per FILE

--count only print a count of matching lines per FILE

-Z print 0 byte after FILE name

--null print 0 byte after FILE name

Context control:

-B NUM print NUM lines of leading context

--before-context=NUM print NUM lines of leading context

-A NUM print NUM lines of trailing context

--after-context=NUM print NUM lines of trailing context

-C [NUM] print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B

--contect[=NUM] print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B

-NUM same as --context=NUM

Option Explanation

175

E0

-U do not strip CR characters at EOL (MSDOS)

--binary do not strip CR characters at EOL (MSDOS)

-u report offsets as if CRs were not there (MSDOS)

--unix-byte-offsets report offsets as if CRs were not there (MSDOS)

Option Explanation

176

. . .

. .E

elvtune


Location: /sbin

Description: tune the I/O elevator per block device queue basis



S Y N T A X

elvtune [-r r_lat] [-w w_lat] [-b b_lat] /dev/blkdev1 [/dev/blkdev2...]elvtune -helvtune -v

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r r_lat set the max latency that the I/O scheduler will provide on each read

-w w_lat set the max latency that the I/O scheduler will provide on each write

-b b_lat max coalescing factor allowed on writes when there are reads pending in the queue



177

E0

env


Location: /usr/bin

Description: display the current environment



S Y N T A X

env [OPTION]... [-] [NAME=VALUE]... [COMMAND [ARG]...]Set each NAME to VALUE in the environment and run COMMAND.A mere - implies -i. If no COMMAND, print the resulting environment.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-i start with an empty environment

--ignore-environment start with an empty environment

-u NAME remove the variable named NAME from the environment

--unset=NAME remove the variable named NAME from the environment



178

. . .

. .E

ex (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to vi



S Y N T A X

See vi

O P T I O N S

See vi

179

E0

exper t_passwd


Location: /bin

Description: utility for changing the Expert Mode password



S Y N T A X

expert_passwd

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the expert_passwd command.

180

. . .

. .E

expert_patch


Location: /bin

Description: script for patching SecurePlatform



S Y N T A X

patch add tftp <ip> <patch_name>patch add cd [<patch_name>]patch add <full_patch_path>patch remove <patch_name>patch log

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

add add a patch to SecurePlatform

remove remove a patch from SecurePlatform

log view the patch log

181

E0

expr


Location: /usr/bin

Description: evaluate arguments as expressions and print the result to the standard output



S Y N T A X

expr EXPRESSIONPrint the value of EXPRESSION to standard output. A blank line belowseparates increasing precedence groups. or: expr OPTIONBeware that many operators need to be escaped or quoted for shells.Comparisons are arithmetic if both ARGs are numbers, else lexicographical.Pattern matches return the string matched between $ and $ or null; if$ and $ are not used, they return the number of characters matched or 0.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



Expression Explanation

ARG1 | ARG2 ARG1 if it is neither null nor 0, otherwise ARG2

ARG1 & ARG2 ARG1 if neither argument is null or 0, otherwise 0

ARG1 < ARG2 ARG1 is less than ARG2

182

. . .

. .E

ARG1 <= ARG2 ARG1 is less than or equal to ARG2

ARG1 = ARG2 ARG1 is equal to ARG2

ARG1 != ARG2 ARG1 is unequal to ARG2

ARG1 >= ARG2 ARG1 is greater than or equal to ARG2

ARG1 > ARG2 ARG1 is greater than ARG2

ARG1 + ARG2 arithmetic sum of ARG1 and ARG2

ARG1 - ARG2 arithmetic difference of ARG1 and ARG2

ARG1 * ARG2 arithmetic product of ARG1 and ARG2

ARG1 / ARG2 arithmetic quotient of ARG1 divided by ARG2

ARG1 % ARG2 arithmetic remainder of ARG1 divided by ARG2

STRING : REGEXP anchored pattern match of REGEXP in STRING

match STRING REGEXP same as STRING : REGEXP

substr STRING POS LENGTH substring of STRING, POS counted from 1

index STRING CHARS index in STRING where any CHARS is found, or 0

length STRING length of STRING

quote TOKEN interpret TOKEN as a string, even if it is a keyword like `match' or an operator like `/'

( EXPRESSION ) value of EXPRESSION

Expression Explanation

183

E0

184

. . .

. .F

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F

fai l log


Location: /usr/bin

Description: formats the contents of the failure log, /var/log/faillog, and maintains failure counts and limits



S Y N T A X

faillog [-u login-name] [-a] [-t days] [-m max] [-pr]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p causes failure entries to be printed in UID order

-u login_name cause the failure record for login_name only to be printed

-t days overrides the use of -u

-a causes all users to be selected

-m used to set the maximum number of login failures before the account is disabled

-r used to reset the count of login failures

185

F0

fa lse

I N F O M A T I O N

Location: /bin

Description: a null command that returns an unsuccessful exit status



S Y N T A X

false

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the false command.

186

. . .

. .F

fdformat


Location: /usr/bin

Description: low-level format for floppy disks



S Y N T A X

fdformat [ -n ] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n no verify

187

F0

fd isk


Location: /sbin

Description: maintains disk partitions, via a menu



S Y N T A X

fdisk [-b SSZ] [-u] DISK Change partition tablefdisk -l [-b SSZ] [-u] DISK List partition table(s)fdisk -s PARTITION Give partition size(s) in blocksfdisk -v Give fdisk versionHere DISK is something like /dev/hdb or /dev/sdaand PARTITION is something like /dev/hda7

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-u give Start and End in sector (instead of cylinder) units

-b 2048: (for certain MO drives) use 2048-byte sectors

-b sector_size specify the sector size of the disk; valid values are 512, 1024, or 2048; (recent kernels know the sector size; use this only on old kernels or to override the kernel's ideas.)

-l list the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit; if no devices are given, those mentioned in /proc/partitions (if that exists) are used


188

. . .

. .F

fgate_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start FloodGate-1



S Y N T A X

The fgate_start command accepts the same options and arguments as the fgate command.

O P T I O N S

The fgate_start command accepts the same options and arguments as the fgate command.

189

F0

fgconsole


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the number of the active vt



S Y N T A X

fgconsole [vt_number]Print foreground console

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





190

. . .

. .F

fgrep


Location: /bin

Description: search one or more files for lines that match a literal text string pattern



S Y N T A X

fgrep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE] ...Search for PATTERN in each FILE or standard input.Example: fgrep -i 'hello world' menu.h main.cWith no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. If less thantwo FILEs given, assume -h. Exit status is 0 if match, 1 if no match,and 2 if trouble.ègrep' means `grep -E'. `fgrep' means `grep -F'.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

Regexp selection and interpretation:







191

F0

-e PATTERN use PATTERN as a regular expression












Miscellaneous:








Option Explanation

192

. . .

. .F

-mmap use memory-mapped input, ifpossible

Output control:












--binary-files=TYPE ssume that binary files are TYPE;TYPE is binary, text, or without-match




-d ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is read, recurse, or skip

--directories=ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is read, recurse, or skip

Option Explanation

193

F0











Context control:





-C [NUM] print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B

--context[=NUM] print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B


Option Explanation

194

. . .

. .F





Option Explanation

195

F0

f i le


Location: /usr/bin

Description: determine file type



S Y N T A X

file [-bciknsvzL] [-f namefile] [-m magicfiles] file...file -C [-m magic]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b fuction unknown

-c cause a checking printout of the parsed form of the magic file; usually used in conjunction with-m to debug a new magic file before installing it

-i displays information about default settings

-k function unknown

-n function unknown

-s function unknown


-z try to look inside compressed files

-L causes symlinks to be followed

-f namefile read the names of the files to be examined from namefile (one per line) before the argument list

196

. . .

. .F

-m magicfiles specify an alternate list of files containing magic numbers; this can be a single file, or a colon-separated list of files

-C function unknown

Option Explanation

197

F0

f ind


Location: /usr/bin

Description: find files that match the conditions specified



S Y N T A X

find [path...] [expression]default path is the current directory; default expression is -printexpression may consist of:operators (decreasing precedence; -and is implicit where no others are given): ( EXPR ) ! EXPR -not EXPR EXPR1 -a EXPR2 EXPR1 -and EXPR2EXPR1 -o EXPR2 EXPR1 -or EXPR2 EXPR1 , EXPR2tests (N can be +N or -N or N)

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-daystart measure times (for -amin, -atime, -cmin, -ctime, -mmin, and -mtime) from the beginning of today rather than from 24 hours ago

-depth always true; same as the -d option; -depth can be useful when find is used with cpio to process files that are contained in directories with unusual permissions; it ensures that you have write permission while you are placing files in a directory, then sets the directory's permissions as the last thing

-follow dereferences symbolic links; implies -noleaf


198

. . .

. .F

-maxdepth LEVELS true if the depth of the current file into the tree is less than or equal to LEVELS

-mindepth LEVELS true if the depth of the current file into the tree is greater than or equal to LEVELS

-mount do not descend directories on other filesystems; an alternate name for -xdev, for compatibility with some other versions of find

-noleaf do not optimize by assuming that directories contain 2 fewer subdirectories than their hard link count; this option is needed when searching filesystems that do not follow the Unix directory- link convention, such as CD-ROM or MS-DOS file systems or AFS volume mount points; each directory on a normal Unix filesystem has at least 2 hard links: its name and its ‘.’ entry; additionally, its subdirectories (if any) each have a ‘..’ entry linked to that directory; when find is examining a directory, after it has statted 2 fewer subdirectories than the directory's link count, it knows that the rest of the entries in the directory are non-directories (‘leaf' files in the directory tree); if only the files' names need to be examined, there is no need to stat them; this gives a significant increase in search speed


-xdev do not descend directories on other file systems

Option Explanation

199

F0

Test Explanation

-amin N true if the difference between the file last access time and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full minute, is N minutes

-anewer FILE file was last accessed more recently than FILE was modified; -anewer is affected by -follow only if -follow comes before -anewer on the command line

-atime N true if the difference between the file last access time and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full 24-hour period, is N 24-hour periods

-cmin N true if the difference between the time of last change of file status information and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full minute, is N minutes

-cnewer FILE file's status was last changed more recently than FILE was modified; -cnewer is affected by -follow only if -follow comes before -cnewer on the command line

-ctime N true if the difference between the time of last change of file status information and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full 24-hour period, is N 24-hour periods

-empty true if the current file or directory is empty

-false always false

200

. . .

. .F

-fstype TYPE true if the file is contained in a file system of type TYPE; the sysctl command can be used to find out the types of filesystems that are available on the system: sysctl vfs In addition, there are two pseudo-types, ‘local’ and ‘rdonly’; the former matches any file system physically mounted on the system where the find is being executed and the latter matches any file system which is mounted read-only

-gid N file’s numeric group ID is N

-group GNAME true if the file belongs to the group GNAME; if GNAME is numeric and there is no such group name, then GNAME is treated as a group ID

-ilname PATTERN like -lname but the match is case insensitive

-iname PATTERN like -name, but the match is case insensitive

-inum N true if the file has inode number N

-ipath PATTERN like -path, but the match is case insensitive

-iregex PATTERN like -regex, but the match is case insensitive

-links N true if the file has N links

-lname PATTERN file is a symbolic link whose contents match shell pattern PATTERN; the metacharacters do not treat ‘/’ or ‘.’ specially

-mmin N true if the difference between the file last modification time and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full minute, is N minutes

Test Explanation

201

F0

-mtime N true if the difference between the file last modification time and the time find was started, rounded up to the next full 24-hour period, is N 24-hour periods

-name PATTERN true if the last component of the pathname being examined matches PATTERN; special shell pattern matching characters (‘[‘,’]’, ‘*’, and ‘?’) may be used as part of PATTERN; these characters may be matched explicitly by escaping them with a backslash (‘\’)

-newer FILE true if the current file has a more recent last modification time than FILE

-nouser true if the file belongs to an unknown user

-nogroup true if the file belongs to an unknown group

-path PATTERN true if the pathname being examined matches PATTERN; special shell pattern matching characters (‘[‘,’]’, ‘*’, and ‘?’) may be used as part of PATTERN; these characters may be matched explicitly by escaping them with a backslash (‘\’); slashes (‘/’) are treated as normal characters and do not have to be matched explicitly

Test Explanation

202

. . .

. .F

-perm [+|-]MODE the MODE may be either symbolic (see chmod) or an octal number; if the MODE is symbolic, a starting value of zero is assumed and the mode sets or clears permissions without regard to the process' file mode creation mask; if the MODE is octal, only bits 07777 (S_ISUID | S_ISGID | S_ISTXT | S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXO) of the file's MODE bits participate in the comparison; if the MODE is preceded by a dash (‘-’), this primary evaluates to true if at least all of the bits in the mode are set in the file's MODE bits; if the MODE is preceded by a plus (‘+’), this primary evaluates to true if any of the bits in the MODE are set in the file's MODE bits; otherwise, this primary evaluates to true if the bits in the MODE exactly match the file's MODE bits; note, the first character of a symbolic mode may not be a dash (‘-’).

-regex PATTERN true if the whole path of the file matches PATTERN using regular expression; to match a file named ./foo/xyzzy, you can use the regular expression .*/[xyz]* or .*/foo/.*, but not xyzzy or /foo/

-size N[bckw] true if the file's size, rounded up, in 512-byte blocks is N; if N is followed by a c, then the primary is true if the file's size is N bytes (characters)

-true always true

Test Explanation

203

F0

-type [bcdpfls] true if the file is of the specified type; possible file types are as follows:b block specialc character speciald directoryf regular filel symbolic linkp FIFOs socket

-uid N file’s number user ID is N

-used N file was last accessed N days after its status was last changed

-user NAME true if the file belongs to the user NAME; if NAME is numeric and there is no such user name, then NAME is treated as a user ID

-xtype [bcdpfls] the same as -type unless the file is a symbolic link; for symbolic links: if -follow has not been given, true if the file is a link to a file of type c; if -follow has been given, true if c is ‘l’; in other words, for symbolic links, -xtype checks the type of the file that -type does not check

Test Explanation

204

. . .

. .F

Action Explanation

-exec COMMAND true if the program named COMMAND returns a zero value as its exit status; optional arguments may be passed to the COMMAND; the expression must be terminated by a semicolon (‘;’); if the string ‘{}’ appears anywhere in the COMMAND name or the arguments it is replaced by the pathname of the current file; COMMAND will be executed from the directory from which find was executed; COMMAND and arguments are not subject to the further expansion of shell patterns and constructs

-fprint FILE true; print the full file name into file FILE; if file does not exist when find is run, it is created; if it does exist, it is truncated; the file names /dev/stdout and /dev/stderr are handled specially; they refer to the standard output and standard error output, respectively

-fprint0 FILE true; like -print0 but write to FILE like -fprint

-fprintf FILE FORMAT true; like -printf but write to FILE like -fprint

-ok COMMAND [argument ...]; the -ok primary is identical to the -exec primary with the exception that find requests user affirmation for the execution of the COMMAND by printing a message to the terminal and reading a response; if the response is other than ‘y’ the COMMAND is not executed and the value of the -ok expression is false

205

F0

-print this primary always evaluates to true; it prints the pathname of the current file to standard output; if none of -exec, -ls, -print0, or -ok is specified, the given expression shall be effectively replaced by (given expression) -print

-print0 this primary always evaluates to true; it prints the pathname of the current file to standard output, followed by an ASCII NUL character (character code 0).

-printf FORMAT true; print FORMAT on the standard output, interpreting ‘\’ escapes and ‘%’ directives; field widths and precisions can be specified as with the ‘printf’ C function; unlike -print, -printf does not add a newline at the end of the string

-prune this primary always evaluates to true; it causes find to not descend into the current file; note, the -prune primary has no effect if the -d option was specified

-ls this primary always evaluates to true; the following information for the current file is written to standard output: its inode number, size in 512-byte blocks, file permissions, number of hard links, owner, group, size in bytes, last modification time, and pathname; if the file is a block or character special file, the major and minor numbers will be displayed instead of the size in bytes; if the file is a symbolic link, the pathname of the linked-to file will be displayed preceded by ‘->’; the format is identical to that produced by ls -dgils

Action Explanation

206

. . .

. .F

Escapes and Directives Explanation

\a alarm bell

\b backspace

\c stop printing from this format immediately and flush the output

\f form feed

\n newline

\r carriage return

\t horizontal tab

\v vertical tab

\\ a literal backslash (‘\’)

A ’\’character followed by any other character is treated as an ordinary character, so they both are printed

%% a literal percent sign

%a file's last access time in the format returned by the C `ctime' function

%Ak file's last access time in the format specified by k, which is either `@' or a directive for the C ‘strftime’ function; the possible values for k are listed below; some of them might not be available on all systems, due to differences in ‘strftime’ between systems

%b file's size in 512-byte blocks (rounded up)

%c file's last status change time in the format returned by the C ‘ctime’ function

%Ck file's last status change time in the format specified by k, which is the same as for %A

%d file's depth in the directory tree; 0 means the file is a command line argument

207

F0

%f file's name with any leading directories removed (only the last element)

%F type of the filesystem the file is on; this value can be used for -fstype

%g file's group name, or numeric group ID if the group has no name

%G file's numeric group ID

%h leading directories of file's name (all but the last element)

%H command line argument under which file was found

%i file's inode number (in decimal)

%k file's size in 1K blocks (rounded up)

%l object of symbolic link (empty string if file is not a symbolic link)

%m file's permission bits (in octal)

%n number of hard links to file

%p file's name

%P file's name with the name of the command line argument under which it was found removed

%s file's size in bytes

%t file's last modification time in the format returned by the C ‘ctime’ function

%Tk file's last modification time in the format specified by k, which is the same as for %A

%u file's user name, or numeric user ID if the user has no name

%U file's numeric user ID


208

. . .

. .F

A ’%’ character followed by any other character is discarded (but the other character is printed)

Time Fields Explanation

@ seconds since Jan. 1, 1970, 00:00 GMT

H hour (00..23)

I hour (01..12)

k hour ( 0..23)

l hour ( 1..12)

M minute (00..59)

p locale's AM or PM

r time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M)

S second (00..61)

T time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss)

X locale's time representation (H:M:S)

Z time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable

Date Fields Explanation

a locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat)

A locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sunday..Saturday)

b locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec)


209

F0

B locale's full month name, variable length (January..December)

c locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989)

d day of month (01..31)

D date (mm/dd/yy)

h same as b

j day of year (001..366)

m month (01..12)

U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)

w day of week (0..6)

W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)

x locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy)

y last two digits of year (00..99)

Y year (1970...)

Operators (Listed in order of Decreasing Precedence) Explanation

( expr ) force precedence

! expr true if expr is false

-not expr same as ! expr

expr1 expr2 and (implied); expr2 is not evaluated if expr1 is false

expr1 -a expr2 same as expr1 expr2

Date Fields Explanation

210

. . .

. .F

expr1 -and expr2 same as expr1 expr2

expr1 -o expr2 or; expr2 is not evaluated if expr1 is true

expr1 -or expr2 same as expr1 -o expr2

expr1 , expr2 list; both expr1 and expr2 are always evaluated; the value of expr1 is discarded; the value of the list is the value of expr2

Operators (Listed in order of Decreasing Precedence) Explanation

211

F0

f ix_bs_and_del


Location: /usr/bin

Description: script to fix the behavior of the backspace and delete keys



S Y N T A X

fix_bs_and_del

O P T I O N S

The fix_bs_and_del command accepts the same arguments and options as the loadkeys command.

212

. . .

. .F

f ree


Location: /usr/bin

Description: display statistics about memory usage



S Y N T A X

free [-b|-k|-m] [-o] [-s delay] [-t] [-V]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b display output in bytes

-k display output in kilobytes

-m display output in megabytes

-o disable display of a buffer-adjusted line

-s delay activates continuous polling delay seconds apart

-t displays a line containing the totals

-V display version information and exit

213

F0

fsckDo not run fsck on a mounted file system. Running fsck on a mounted file system can damage the file system beyond repair.


Location: /sbin

Description: call the system checker for the appropriate system type, to check and repair filesystems



S Y N T A X

fsck [-sACVRTNP] [-t fstype] filesys [ ... ] [--] [fsck-options ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s serialize fsck operations

-t fslist specifies the type(s) of file system to be checked

-A walk through the /etc/fstab file and try to check all file systems in one run

-C display completion/progress bars for those filesystems checkers

-R when checking all file systems with the -A flag, skip the root file system

-T do not show the title on startup

-V produce verbose output, including all file system-specific commands that are executed

214

. . .

. .F

-a automatically repair the file system without any questions

-r interactively repair the filesystem

Option Explanation

215

F0

fsck.ext2


Location: /sbin

Description: similar to fsck, but specifically intended for Linux ext2 filesystems



S Y N T A X

fsck.ext2 [-panyrcdfvstFSV] [-b superblock] [-B blocksize][-I inode_buffer_blocks] [-P process_inode_size] [-l|-L bad_blocks_file] [-C fd] [-j ext-journal] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p Automatic repair (no questions)

-n Make no changes to the filesystem

-y Assume "yes" to all questions

-c Check for bad blocks

-f Force checking even if filesystem is marked clean

-v Be verbose

-b superblock Use alternative superblock


-j external-journal Set location of the external journal

-l bad_blocks_file Add to badblocks list

-L bad_blocks_file Set badblocks list

216

. . .

. .F

fsck.ext3


Location: /sbin

Description: similar to fsck, but specifically intended for Linux ext3 filesystems



S Y N T A X

fsck.ext3 [-panyrcdfvstFSV] [-b superblock] [-B blocksize][-I inode_buffer_blocks] [-P process_inode_size] [-l|-L bad_blocks_file] [-C fd] [-j ext-journal] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p Automatic repair (no questions)

-n Make no changes to the filesystem

-y Assume ‘yes’ to all questions

-c Check for bad blocks

-f Force checking even if filesystem is marked clean

-v Be verbose

-b superblock Use alternative superblock


-j external-journal Set location of the external journal

-l bad_blocks_file dd to badblocks list

-L bad_blocks_file Set badblocks list

217

F0

f tp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: transfer files to and from remote network sites



S Y N T A X

ftp [-pinegvd] [host]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p use passive mode for data transfers

-i turn off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers

-n restrains ftp from attempting auto-login on initial connection

-e disables command editing and history support

-g disables file name globbing

-v show all responses from remote server; report on data transfer statistics

-d enables debugging

218

. . .

. .F

fuser


Location: /sbin

Description: identify processes using a file or filesystem



S Y N T A X

fuser [ -a | -s ] [ -n space ] [ -signal ] [ -kimuv ] name ...[ - ] [ -n space ] [ -signal ] [ -kimuv ] name ...fuser -lfuser -Vudp/tcp names: [local_port][,[rmt_host][,[rmt_port]]]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a display unused files too

-k kill processes accessing that file

-i ask before killing (ignored without -k)

-l list signal names

-m mounted FS

-n space search in the specified name space (file, udp, or tcp)

-s silent operation

-signal send signal instead of SIGKILL

-u display user ids

-v verbose output

-V display version information

- reset options

219

F0

fwaccel_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start fwaccel



S Y N T A X

fwaccel on | off | ver | stat | cfg <...> | conns | dbg <...> | help

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

on turn acceleration on

off turn acceleration off

ver show accelerator/FW version

stat show acceleration status

cfg <options> configure acceleration parameters

stats <options> print the acceleration statistics

conns <options> print the accelerator's connections table

templates <options> print the accelerator's templates table

dbg <options> set debug flags

help display help and exit

220

. . .

. .F

fwm_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start the VPN-1/FireWall-1 Management Server daemon



S Y N T A X

fwm

O P T I O N S

The fwm_start script uses the same options and arguments as fwm.

221

F0

222

. . .

. .G

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G

gawk


Location: /bin

Description: a program that does pattern matching, record processing, and other forms of text manipulation



S Y N T A X

gawk [POSIX or GNU style options] -f progfile [--] file ...gawk [POSIX or GNU style options] [--] 'program' file ...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f progfile read the awk program source from the file specified

--file=progfile read the awk program source from the file specified

-F fs use fs for the input field separator

--field-separator=fs use fs for the input field separator

-v var=val assign the value val to the variable var

--assign=var=val assign the value val to the variable var

-m[fr] val set various memory limits

-W compat run in compatibility mode

--compat run in compatibility mode

223

G0

-W copyleft print short version of the GNU copyright information and exit

--copyleft print short version of the GNU copyright information and exit

-W copyright print short version of the GNU copyright information and exit

--copyright print short version of the GNU copyright information and exit

-W dump-variables[=file] print a sorted list of global variables, their types and final values to file; if no file is provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in the current directory; having a list of all the global variables is a good way to look for typographical errors in your programs; you would also use this option if you have a large program with a lot of functions, and you want to be sure that your functions don't inadvertently use global variables that you meant to be local; (this is a particularly easy mistake to make with simple variable names like i, j, and so on.)

--dump-variables[=file] print a sorted list of global variables, their types and final values to file; if no file is provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in the current directory; having a list of all the global variables is a good way to look for typographical errors in your programs; you would also use this option if you have a large program with a lot of functions, and you want to be sure that your functions don't inadvertently use global variables that you meant to be local; (this is a particularly easy mistake to make with simple variable names like i, j, and so on.)

Option Explanation

224

. . .

. .G

-W gen-po scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a GNU .po format file on standard output with entries for all localizable strings in the program; the program itself is not executed; see the GNU gettext distribution for more information on .po files

--gen-po scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a GNU .po format file on standard output with entries for all localizable strings in the program; the program itself is not executed; see the GNU gettext distribution for more information on .po files

-W help display help and exit


-W lint[=fatal] provide warnings about constructs that are dubious or non-portable to other awk implementations

--lint[=fatal] provide warnings about constructs that are dubious or non-portable to other awk implementations

-W lint-old provide warnings about constructs that are not portable to the original version of Unix awk

--lint-old provide warnings about constructs that are not portable to the original version of Unix awk

-W non-decimal-data recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input data; Use this option with great caution!

--non-decimal-data recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input data; Use this option with great caution!

Option Explanation

225

G0

-W profile[=file] send profiling data to prof_file; the default is awkprof.out; when run with gawk, the profile is just a ‘pretty printed’ version of the program; when run with pgawk, the profile contains execution counts of each statement in the program in the left margin and function call counts for each user-defined function

--profile[=file] send profiling data to prof_file; the default is awkprof.out; when run with gawk, the profile is just a ‘pretty printed’ version of the program; when run with pgawk, the profile contains execution counts of each statement in the program in the left margin and function call counts for each user-defined function

-W posix run in compatibility mode (with additional restrictions)

--posix run in compatibility mode (with additional restrictions)

-W re-interval enable the use of interval expressions in regular expression matching

--re-interval enable the use of interval expressions in regular expression matching

-W source=PROGRAM_TEXT use PROGRAM_TEXT as awk source code program

--source=PROGRAM_TEXT use PROGRAM_TEXT as awk source code program

-W traditional run in compatibility mode

--traditional run in compatibility mode

-W usage display help and exit

Option Explanation

226

. . .

. .G

--usage display help and exit

-W version display version and exit


Option Explanation

227

G0

gawk (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/gawk



S Y N T A X

See gawk

O P T I O N S

See gawk

228

. . .

. .G

gawk-3.1 .0


Location: /bin

Description: a program that does pattern matching, record processing, and other forms of text manipulation



S Y N T A X

gawk-3.1.0 [POSIX or GNU style options] -f progfile [--] file ...gawk-3.1.0 [POSIX or GNU style options] [--] 'program' file ...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f progfile read the AWK program source from the file progfile, instead of from the first command line argument; multiple -f (or --file) options may be used

--file=progfile read the AWK program source from the file progfile, instead of from the first command line argument; multiple -f (or --file) options may be used

-F fs use fs for the input field separator (the value of the FS predefined variable)

--field-separator=fs use fs for the input field separator (the value of the FS predefined variable)

-v var=val assign the value val to the variable var, before execution of the program begins; such variable values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK program

229

G0

--assign=var=val assign the value val to the variable var, before execution of the program begins; such variable values are available to the BEGIN block of an AWK program

-m[fr] val set various memory limits to the value val; the f flag sets the maximum number of fields, and the r flag sets the maximum record size; these two flags and the -m option are from the Bell Laboratories research version of UNIX awk; they are ignored by gawk, since gawk has no pre-defined limits

-W compat run in compatibility mode; in compatibility mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized; the use of --traditional is preferred over the other forms of this option

--compat run in compatibility mode; in compatibility mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized; the use of --traditional is preferred over the other forms of this option

-W copyleft print the short version of the GNU copyright informa tion message on the standard output and exit successfully

--copyleft print the short version of the GNU copyright informa tion message on the standard output and exit successfully

-W copyright print the short version of the GNU copyright informa tion message on the standard output and exit successfully

Option Explanation

230

. . .

. .G

--copyright print the short version of the GNU copyright informa tion message on the standard output and exit successfully

-W dump-variables[=file] print a sorted list of global variables, their types and final values to file; if no file is provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in the current directory; having a list of all the global variables is a good way to look for typographical errors in your programs; you would also use this option if you have a large program with a lot of functions, and you want to be sure that your functions don't inadvertently use global variables that you meant to be local; (this is a particularly easy mistake to make with simple variable names like i, j, and so on.)

--dump-variables[=file] print a sorted list of global variables, their types and final values to file; if no file is provided, gawk uses a file named awkvars.out in the current directory; having a list of all the global variables is a good way to look for typographical errors in your programs; you would also use this option if you have a large program with a lot of functions, and you want to be sure that your functions don't inadvertently use global variables that you meant to be local; (this is a particularly easy mistake to make with simple variable names like i, j, and so on.)

Option Explanation

231

G0

-W gen-po scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a GNU .po format file on standard output with entries for all localizable strings in the program; the program itself is not executed; see the GNU gettext distribution for more information on .po files

--gen-po scan and parse the AWK program, and generate a GNU .po format file on standard output with entries for all localizable strings in the program; the program itself is not executed; see the GNU gettext distribution for more information on .po files

-W help print a relatively short summary of the available options on the standard output

--help print a relatively short summary of the available options on the standard output

-W lint[=fatal] provide warnings about constructs that are dubious or non-portable to other AWK implementations; with an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings become fatal errors; this may be drastic, but its use will certainly encourage the development of cleaner AWK programs

--lint[=fatal] provide warnings about constructs that are dubious or non-portable to other AWK implementations; with an optional argument of fatal, lint warnings become fatal errors; this may be drastic, but its use will certainly encourage the development of cleaner AWK programs

Option Explanation

232

. . .

. .G

-W lint-old provide warnings about constructs that are not portable to the original version of Unix awk

--lint-old provide warnings about constructs that are not portable to the original version of Unix awk

-W non-decimal-data recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input data; Use this option with great caution!

--non-decimal-data recognize octal and hexadecimal values in input data; Use this option with great caution!

-W profile[=file] send profiling data to file; the default is awkprof.out; when run with gawk, the profile is just a ‘pretty printed’ version of the program; when run with pgawk, the profile contains execution counts of each statement in the program in the left margin and func tion call counts for each user-defined function

--profile[=file] send profiling data to file; the default is awkprof.out; when run with gawk, the profile is just a ‘pretty printed’ version of the program; when run with pgawk, the profile contains execution counts of each statement in the program in the left margin and func tion call counts for each user-defined function

Option Explanation

233

G0

-W posix this turns on compatibility mode, with the following additional restrictions:\x escape sequences are not recognizedonly space and tab act as field separators when FS isset to a single space, newline does notyou cannot continue lines after ? and :the synonym func for the keyword function is not recognizedthe operators ** and **= cannot be used in place of ^ and ^=the fflush() function is not available

--posix this turns on compatibility mode, with the following additional restrictions:\x escape sequences are not recognizedonly space and tab act as field separators when FS isset to a single space, newline does notyou cannot continue lines after ? and :the synonym func for the keyword function is not recognizedthe operators ** and **= cannot be used in place of ^ and ^=the fflush() function is not available

Option Explanation

234

. . .

. .G

-W re-interval enable the use of interval expressions in regular expression matching; interval expressions were not traditionally available in the AWK language; the POSIX standard added them, to make awk and egrep consistent with each other; however, their use is likely to break old AWK programs, so gawk only provides them if they are requested with this option, or when --posix is specified

--re-interval enable the use of interval expressions in regular expression matching; interval expressions were not traditionally available in the AWK language; the POSIX standard added them, to make awk and egrep consistent with each other; however, their use is likely to break old AWK programs, so gawk only provides them if they are requested with this option, or when --posix is specified

-W source=program_text use program_text as AWK program source code; this option allows the easy intermixing of library functions (used via the -f and --file options) with source code entered on the command line; it is intended primarily for medium to large AWK programs used in shell scripts

--source=program_text use program_text as AWK program source code; this option allows the easy intermixing of library functions (used via the -f and --file options) with source code entered on the command line; it is intended primarily for medium to large AWK programs used in shell scripts

Option Explanation

235

G0

-W traditional run in compatibility mode; in compatibility mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized; the use of --traditional is preferred over the other forms of this option

--traditional run in compatibility mode; in compatibility mode, gawk behaves identically to UNIX awk; none of the GNU-specific extensions are recognized; the use of --traditional is preferred over the other forms of this option

-W usage print a relatively short summary of the available options on the standard output

--usage print a relatively short summary of the available options on the standard output

-W version print version and exit

--version print version and exit

Option Explanation

236

. . .

. .G

gcc


Location: /usr/bin

Description: GNU C compiler



S Y N T A X

gcc [options] file...(Use '-v --help' to display command line options of sub-processes)Permissable languages include: c c++ assembler none'none' means revert to the default behaviour ofguessing the language based on the file's extensionOptions starting with -g, -f, -m, -O or -W are automatically passed on tothe various sub-processes invoked by gcc. In order to pass other optionson to these processes the -W<letter> options must be used.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-pass-exit-codes Exit with highest error code from a phase

--help Display help and exit

-dumpspecs Display all of the built in spec strings

-dumpversion Display the version of the compiler

-dumpmachine Display the compiler's target processor

-print-search-dirs Display the directories in the compiler's search path

-print-libgcc-file-name Display the name of the compiler's companion library

-print-file-name=<lib> Display the full path to library <lib>

237

G0

-print-prog-name=<prog> Display the full path to compiler component <prog>

-print-multi-directory Display the root directory for versions of libgcc

-print-multi-lib Display the mapping between command line options and multiple library search directories

-Wa,<options> Pass comma-separated <options> on to the assembler

-Wp,<options> Pass comma-separated <options> on to the preprocessor

-Wl,<options> Pass comma-separated <options> on to the linker

-Xlinker <arg> Pass <arg> on to the linker

-save-temps Do not delete intermediate files

-pipe Use pipes rather than intermediate files

-time Time the execution of each subprocess

-specs=<file> Override builtin specs with the contents of <file>

-std=<standard> Assume that the input sources are for <standard>

-B <directory> Add <directory> to the compiler's search paths

-b <machine> Run gcc for target <machine>, if installed

-V <version> Run gcc version number <version>, if installed

-v Display the programs invoked by the compiler

Option Explanation

238

. . .

. .G

-E Preprocess only; do not compile, assemble or link

-S Compile only; do not assemble or link

-c Compile and assemble, but do not link

-o <file> Place the output into <file>

-x <language> Specify the language of the following input files

Option Explanation

239

G0

gendi f f


Location: /usr/bin

Description: script to find differences in RPM files



S Y N T A X

/usr/bin/gendiff <directory> <diff-extension>

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the gendiff command.

240

. . .

. .G

genksyms


Location: /sbin

Description: used for automatic loading and unloading of modules



S Y N T A X

genksyms [-dDwqhV] [-k kernel_version] [-p prefix] > .../linux/module/*.ver

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d Increment the debug level (repeatable)

--debug Increment the debug level (repeatable)

-D Dump expanded symbol defs (for debugging only)

--dump Dump expanded symbol defs (for debugging only)

-w Enable warnings

--warnings Enable warnings

-q Disable warnings (default)

--quiet Disable warnings (default)



-V Print the release version

--version Print the release version

241

G0

-k ver Set the kernel version for which we are compiling

--kernel ver Set the kernel version for which we are compiling

-p string prepend the given string to the CRCs generated for all symbols; this is intended for use with e.g. SMP kernels, wherein the modules are not compatible at a level below that described by the data types; this is primarily caused by inline function expansions in the module code itself

--prefix string Set a mangling prefix for all symbols

Option Explanation

242

. . .

. .G

getkey


Location: /sbin

Description: utility to determine keyboard type



S Y N T A X

getkey

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the getkey command.

243

G0

getkeycodes


Location: /usr/bin

Description: prints the kernel's scancode-to-keycode mapping table



S Y N T A X

getkeycodesPrint kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





244

. . .

. .G

getopt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: enhanced command option parser



S Y N T A X

getopt optstring parametersgetopt [options] [--] optstring parametersgetopt [options] -o|--options optstring [options] [--] parameters

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a Allow long options starting with single -

--alternative Allow long options starting with single -



-l longopts Long options to be recognized

--longoptions=longopts Long options to be recognized

-n name under which errors are reporte

--name=progname name under which errors are reported

-o optstring Short options to be recognized

--options=optstring Short options to be recognized

-q Disable error reporting by getopt(3)

245

G0

--quiet Disable error reporting by getopt(3)

-Q No normal output

--quiet-output No normal output

-s Set shell quoting conventions

--shell=shell Set shell quoting conventions

-T Test for getopt(1) version

--test Test for getopt(1) version

-u Do not quote the output

--unqote Do not quote the output



Option Explanation

246

. . .

. .G

gl ibc_post_upgrade


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: post upgrade configuration for the GNU C library

Permissions: -rwx------


S Y N T A X

glibc_post_upgrade

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the glibc_post_upgrade command.

247

G0

gpasswd


Location: /usr/bin

Description: administer the /etc/group file



S Y N T A X

gpasswd [-r|-R] groupgpasswd [-a user] groupgpasswd [-d user] groupgpasswd [-A user,...] [-M user,...] group

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r remove group password

-R disable access to the group through the newgrp command

-a add group members

-d delete group members

-A define group administrators

-M define group members

248

. . .

. .G

grep


Location: /bin

Description: search one or more files for lines that match a regular expression pattern



S Y N T A X

grep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE] ...Search for PATTERN in each FILE or standard input.Example: grep -i 'hello world' menu.h main.cègrep' means `grep -E'. `fgrep' means `grep -F'.With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. If less thantwo FILEs given, assume -h. Exit status is 0 if match, 1 if no match,and 2 if trouble.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation







-e use PATTERN as a regular expression

249

G0



















--mmap use memory-mapped input if possible

Option Explanation

250

. . .

. .G












--binary-files=TYPE assume that binary files are TYPE; TYPE is 'binary', 'text', or 'without-match'.




-d ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is 'read', 'recurse', or 'skip'

--directories=ACTION how to handle directories; ACTION is 'read', 'recurse', or 'skip'


Option Explanation

251

G0














-C NUM print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B

--context[=NUM] print NUM (default 2) lines of output context unless overridden by -A or -B




Option Explanation

252

. . .

. .G



Option Explanation

253

G0

groupadd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create new group account



S Y N T A X

groupadd [-g gid [-o]] [-r] [-f] group

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-g GID specify the group ID as GID

-o used to request a non-unique group ID

-r add a system account

-f force; stop groupadd

254

. . .

. .G

groupdel


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: remove the specified group from the system account files



S Y N T A X

groupdel group

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the groupdel command.

255

G0

groupmod


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: modify group information for the group specified



S Y N T A X

groupmod [-g gid [-o]] [-n name] group

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-g gid the numerical value of the group’s ID; must be unique unless the -o option is used

-o system group

-n name name of the group will be changed from group to name

256

. . .

. .G

groups


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the groups to which a user belongs



S Y N T A X

/usr/bin/groups [OPTION]... [USERNAME]...Same as id -Gn. If no USERNAME, use current process.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



257

G0

grpck


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: remove corrupt or duplicate entries from the files /etc/group and /etc/shadow



S Y N T A X

grpck [ -r ] [ group [ gshadow ] ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r execute the command in read-only mode

258

. . .

. .G

grpconv


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create a shadowed group file to keep your encrypted group passwords safe from password cracking programs



S Y N T A X

grpconv <group_name>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the grpconv command.

259

G0

grpunconv


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: convert a shadowed group file to a clear-text group file



S Y N T A X

grpunconv <group_name>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the grpunconv command.

260

. . .

. .G

grub


Location: /sbin

Description: enter the Grand Unified Boot Loader command shell



S Y N T A X

grub [OPTION]...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--batch turn on batch mode for non-interactive use

--boot-drive=DRIVE specify stage2 boot_drive [default=0x0]

--config-file=FILE specify stage2 config_file ;[default=/boot/grub/grub.conf]

--device-map=FILE use the device map file FILE


--hold wait until a debugger will attach

--install-partition=PAR specify stage2 install_partition; [default=0x20000]

--no-config-file do not use the config file

--no-curses do not use curses

--no-floppy do not probe any floppy drive

--no-pager do not use internal pager

--preset-menu use the preset menu

--probe-second-floppy probe the second floppy drive

261

G0

--read-only do not write anything to devices

--verbose print verbose messages


Option Explanation

262

. . .

. .G

grubby


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for configuring grub



S Y N T A X

grubby [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--add-kernel=kernel-path add an entry for the specified kernel

--args=args default arguments for the new kernel

-c path to grub config file to update ("-" for stdin)

--config-file=path path to grub config file to update ("-" for stdin)

--copy-default use the default boot entry as a template for the new entry being added; if the default is not a linux image, or if the kernel referenced by the default image does not exist, the first linux entry whose kernel does exist is used as the template

--default-kernel display the path of the default kernel

--initrd=args initrd image for the new kernel

--make-default make the newly added entry the default boot entry

263

G0

-o path to output updated config file ("-" for stdout)

--output-file=path path to output updated config file ("-" for stdout)

--remove-kernel=kernel-path remove all entries for the specified kernel

--set-default=STRING make the first entry referencing the specified kernel the default

--title=entry-title title to use for the new kernel entry

-v display version program and exit

--version display version program and exit

-? display help and exit


--usage display brief usage message

Option Explanation

264

. . .

. .G

grub- insta l l


Location: /sbin

Description: script to install grub



S Y N T A X

grub-install [OPTION] install_deviceINSTALL_DEVICE can be a GRUB device name or a system device filename.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





--root-directory=DIR install GRUB images under the directory DIR instead of the root directory

--grub-shell=FILE use FILE as the grub shell

--force-lba force GRUB to use LBA mode even for a buggy BIOS

--recheck probe a device map even if it already exists

265

G0

grub-md5-crypt


Location: /sbin

Description: script to encrypt grub password in MD5 format



S Y N T A X

grub-md5-crypt [OPTION]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





--grub-shell=FILE use FILE as the grub shell

266

. . .

. .G

gtar (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to tar



S Y N T A X

See tar

O P T I O N S

See tar

267

G0

gunzip


Location: /bin

Description: uncompress files compressed by gzip



S Y N T A X

gunzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]file... files to (de)compress. If none given, use standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c write on standard output, keep original files unchanged

--stdout write on standard output, keep original files unchanged

-d decompress

--decompress decompress

-f force overwrite of output file and compress links

--force force overwrite of output file and compress links



-l list compressed file contents

--list list compressed file contents

-L display software license

--license display software license

268

. . .

. .G

-n do not save or restore the original name and time stamp

--no-name do not save or restore the original name and time stamp

-N save or restore the original name and time stamp

--name save or restore the original name and time stamp

-q suppress all warnings

--quiet suppress all warnings

-r operate recursively on directories

--recursive operate recursively on directories

-S .suf use suffix .suf on compressed files

--suffix .suf use suffix .suf on compressed files

-t test compressed file integrity

--test test compressed file integrity

-v verbose mode

--verbose verbose mode



-1 compress faster

--fast compress faster

-9 compress better

--best compress better

Option Explanation

269

G0

gunzip (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/gunzip



S Y N T A X

See gunzip

O P T I O N S

See gunzip

270

. . .

. .G

gzexe


Location: /usr/bin

Description: compress executables



S Y N T A X

gzexe [-d] files...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d decompress the executables

271

G0

gzip


Location: /bin

Description: file compression utility



S Y N T A X

gzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]file... files to (de)compress. If none given, use standard input

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-d decompress










272

. . .

. .G













-v verbose mode




-1 compress faster


-9 compress better


Option Explanation

273

G0

gzip (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/gzip



S Y N T A X

See gzip

O P T I O N S

See gzip

274

. . .

. .H

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H

hal t


Location: /sbin

Description: insert a note in the file /var/log/wtmp; if the system is in runlevel 0 or 6, stop all processes; otherwise, call shutdown -nf



S Y N T A X

halt [-n] [-w] [-d] [-f] [-i] [-p]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n do not sync before reboot or halt

-w do not actually reboot or halt but only write the wtmp record (in the /var/log/wtmp file)

-d do not write the wtmp record; the -n flag implies -d

-f force halt or reboot; do not call shutdown

-i shut down all network interfaces just before halt or reboot

-p when halting the system, do a power-off

275

H0

hdparm

Some options associated with hdparm are dangerous. Use caution when executing this command.


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for setting IDE hard drive parameters



S Y N T A X

hdparm [options] [device] ..

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a get/set fs readahead

-A set drive read-lookahead flag (0/1)

-B get Advanced Power Management setting (1-255)

-c get/set IDE 32-bit IO setting

-C check IDE power mode status

-d get/set using_dma flag

-D enable/disable drive defect-mgmt

-E set cd-rom drive speed

-f flush buffer cache for device on exit

-g display drive geometry

276

. . .

. .H

-h display terse usage information

-i display drive identification

-I read drive identification directly from drive

-k get/set keep_settings_over_reset flag (0/1)

-K set drive keep_features_over_reset flag (0/1)

-L set drive doorlock (0/1) (removable harddisks only)

-m get/set multiple sector count

-n get/set ignore-write-errors flag (0/1)

-p set PIO mode on IDE interface chipset (0,1,2,3,4,...)

-P set drive prefetch count

-q change next setting quietly

-r get/set readonly flag (DANGEROUS to set)

-R register an IDE interface (DANGEROUS)

-S set standby (spindown) timeout

-t perform device read timings

-T perform cache read timings

-u get/set unmaskirq flag (0/1)

-U un-register an IDE interface (DANGEROUS)

-v default; same as -acdgkmnru (-gr for SCSI, -adgr for XT)

Option Explanation

277

H0

-V display program version and exit immediately

-w perform device reset (DANGEROUS)

-W set drive write-caching flag (0/1) (DANGEROUS)

-x perform device for hotswap flag (0/1) (DANGEROUS)

-X set IDE xfer mode (DANGEROUS)

-y put IDE drive in standby mode

-Y put IDE drive to sleep

-Z disable Seagate auto-powersaving mode

Option Explanation

278

. . .

. .H

head


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the first few lines of one or more files



S Y N T A X

head [OPTION]... [FILE]...Print first 10 lines of each FILE to standard output.With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giving the file name.With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.SIZE may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, m for 1 Meg.If -VALUE is used as first OPTION, read -c VALUE when one ofmultipliers bkm follows concatenated, else read -n VALUE.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c SIZE print first SIZE bytes

--bytes=SIZE print first SIZE bytes

-n NUMBER print first NUMBER lines instead of first 10

--lines=NUMBER print first NUMBER lines instead of first 10

-q never print headers giving file names

--quiet never print headers giving file names

--silent never print headers giving file names

-v always print headers giving file names

279

H0

--verbose always print headers giving file names

--help display this help and exit


Option Explanation

280

. . .

. .H

host id


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the ID number of the current host; output is in hexadecimal format



S Y N T A X

hostidhostid OPTION

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



281

H0

hostname


Location: /bin

Description: set or print name of current host system



S Y N T A X

hostnamehostname <host>hostname <host> <external_ip_address>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the hostname command.

282

. . .

. .H

hosts_start


Location: /bin

Description: script for adding entries to the /etc/hosts file



S Y N T A X

hosts [(add|del) <ip-address> <hostname> [<hostname> ...] ]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the hosts_start command.

283

H0

hwclock


Location: /sbin

Description: read or set the hardware clock



S Y N T A X

hwclock [function] [options...]

O P T I O N S

Function Explanation

--help show this help

--show read hardware clock and print result

--set set the rtc to the time given with --date

--hctosys set the system time from the hardware clock

--systohc set the hardware clock to the current system time

--adjust adjust the rtc to account for systematic drift since the clock was last set or adjusted

--getepoch print out the kernel's hardware clock epoch value

--setepoch set the kernel's hardware clock epoch value to the value given with --epoch

--version print out the version of hwclock to stdout

284

. . .

. .H

Options Explanation

--utc the hardware clock is kept in coordinated universal time

--localtime the hardware clock is kept in local time

--directisa access the ISA bus directly instead of /dev/rtc

--badyear ignore rtc's year because the bios is broken

--date specifies the time to which to set the hardware clock

--epoch=year specifies the year which is the beginning of the hardware clock's epoch value

--noadjfile do not access /etc/adjtime; requires the use of either --utc or --localtime

285

H0

hwclock (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/hwclock



S Y N T A X

See hwclock

O P T I O N S

See hwclock

286

. . .

. .I

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

id


Location: /usr/bin

Description: display information about yourself or another user



S Y N T A X

id [OPTION]... [USERNAME]Without any OPTION, print some useful set of identified information.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a ignore, for compatibility with other versions

-g print only the group ID

--group print only the group ID

-G print only the supplementary groups

--groups print only the supplementary groups

-n print a name instead of a number, for -ugG

--name print a name instead of a number, for -ugG

-r print the real ID instead of effective ID, for -ugG

287

I0

--real print the real ID instead of effective ID, for -ugG

-u print only the user ID

--user print only the user ID



Option Explanation

288

. . .

. .I

i fcfg


Location: /sbin

Description: script to configure IP forwarding



S Y N T A X

ifcfg DEV [[add|del [ADDR[/LEN]] [PEER] | stop]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

add add new address

del delete address

stop completely disable IP

289

I0

i fconf ig


Location: /sbin

Description: configure network interface parameters



S Y N T A X

ifconfig [--save] [-a] [-i] [-v] [-s] <interface> [[<AF>] <address>]<HW>=Hardware Type<AF>=Address family. Default: inet

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

add <address>[/<prefixlen>] add an IP address to this interface

del <address>[/<prefixlen>] delete an IP address from this interface

[-]broadcast [<address>] add a broadcast address to this interface

[-]pointopoint [<address>] enable point-to-point mode on an interface; meaning that it is a direct link between two machines with nobody else listening on it

netmask ADDRESS add a netmask to this interface to the given ADDRESS

dstaddr ADDRESS set the remote IP for a point-point link to the given ADDRESS

tunnel ADDRESS create a new SIT (IPv6-in-IPv4) device, tunnelling to the given destination ADDRESS

outfill NN the function of this option is not know at this time

290

. . .

. .I

keepalive NN set the keepalive value for the interface to NN

hw HW ADDRESS set the hardware address of this interface to HW hardware type and ADDRESS address

metric NN set the interface metric to NN

mtu NN set the Maximum Transfer Unit of the interface to NN

[-]trailers enable or disable the use of trailer link leve encapsulation

[-]arp enable or disable use of the ARP protocol on this interface

[-]allmulti enable or disable all-multicast mode

multicast set the multicast flag on the interface

[-]promisc enable or disable promiscous mode on the interface

mem_start NN set the start address for shared memory used by this device to NN; only a few devices need this

io_addr NN set the start address in IO space for this device to NN

irq NN set the interrupt line used by this device to NN

media <type> set the physical port or medium type to be used by the device; not all devices can change this setting, and those that can vary in what values they support

txqueuelen NN set the length of the transmit queue of the device to NN

Option Explanation

291

I0

[-]dynamic enable or disable DHCP on the interface

up|down activate or deactivate the interface


loop Local Loopback

slip Serial Line IP

cslip VJ Serial Line IP

slip6 6-bit Serial Line IP

cslip6 VJ 6-bit Serial Line IP

adaptive Adaptive Serial Line IP


ash Ash

ether Ethernet



ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

rose AMPR ROSE

tunnel IPIP Tunnel

ppp Point-to-Point Protocol

hdlc (Cisco)-HDLC

lapb LAPB

arcnet ARCnet


Option Explanation

292

. . .

. .I

frad Frame Relay Access Device

sit IPv6-in-IPv4


hippi HIPPI

irda IrLA

ec Econet

x25 generic X.25

Address Family Explanation

unix UNIX Domain

inet DARPA Internet

inet6 IPv6

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

rose AMPR ROSE

ipx Novell IPX

ddp Appletalk DDP

ec Econet

ash Ash

x25 CCITT X.25


293

I0

i fdown


Location: /sbin

Description: script to down an interface



S Y N T A X

The ifdown command has the same syntax as the ifconfig command.

O P T I O N S

The ifdown command accepts the same arguments as ifconfig.

294

. . .

. .I

i fenslave


Location: /sbin

Description: set master and slave interfaces



S Y N T A X

ifenslave [-afrvV] <master-interface> <slave-interface> [metric <N>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a

-f force actions to be taken if one of the specified interfaces appears not to belong to an ethernet device

-r make a receive-only slave

-v be verbose


metric N

295

I0

i fup


Location: /sbin

Description: script to set interface parameters when an interface is brought up



S Y N T A X

ifup <device name>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the ifup command.

296

. . .

. .I

igawk


Location: /bin

Description: enhancement script for gawk



S Y N T A X

No syntax information is available for the igawk script

O P T I O N S

No information about options is available for the igawk script.

297

I0

in i t


Location: /sbin

Description: the program that launches the init process; init controls all other processes



S Y N T A X

init 0123456SsQqAaBbCcUu

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

0 start init in runlevel 0







S start init in single user mode

s start init in single user mode

Q tell init to re-examine the /etc/inittab file

q tell init to re-examine the /etc/inittab file

A

298

. . .

. .I

a tell init to process only those /etc/inittab file entries having runlevel a

B

b tell init to process only those /etc/inittab file entries having runlevel b

C

c tell init to process only those /etc/inittab file entries having runlevel c

U tell init to re-execute itself, preserving the state

u tell init to re-execute itself, preserving the state

Option Explanation

299

I0

in i t log


Location: /sbin

Description: used to set configuration parameters for logging the init process



S Y N T A X

initlog [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--conf=STRING configuration file (default: /etc/initlog.conf)

-n STRING name of service being logged

--name=STRING name of service being logged

-e INIT event being logged (see man page)

--event=INT event being logged (see man page)

-c STRING command to run, logging output

--cmd=STRING command to run, logging output

-d print lots of verbose debugging info

--debug print lots of verbose debugging info

-r STRING command to run, accepting input on open fd

--run=STRING command to run, accepting input on open fd

-s STRING string to log

300

. . .

. .I

--string=STRING string to log

-f STRING facility to log at (default: 'local7')

--facility=STRING facility to log at (default: 'local7')

-p STRING priority to log at (default: 'notice')

--priority=STRING priority to log at (default: 'notice')

-q suppress stdout/stderr

--quiet suppress stdout/stderr



--usage Display brief usage message

Option Explanation

301

I0

insmod (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to /sbin/insmod.static



S Y N T A X

See insmod.static

O P T I O N S

See insmod.static

302

. . .

. .I

insmod.stat ic


Location: /sbin

Description: installs a loadable module in the running kernel



S Y N T A X

insmod [-fhkLmnpqrsSvVxXyY] [-e persist_name] [-o module_name] [-O blob_name] [-P prefix] module [ symbol=value ... ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

module Name of a loadable kernel module ('.o' can be omitted)

-f Force loading under wrong kernel version

--force Force loading under wrong kernel version



-k Make module autoclean-able

--autoclean Make module autoclean-able

-L Prevent simultaneous loads of the same module

--lock Prevent simultaneous loads of the same module

-m Generate load map (so crashes can be traced)

--map Generate load map (so crashes can be traced)

303

I0

-n Don't load, just show

--noload Don't load, just show

-p Probe mode; check if the module matches the kernel

--probe Probe mode; check if the module matches the kernel

-q Don't print unresolved symbols

--quiet Don't print unresolved symbols

-r Allow root to load modules not owned by root

--root Allow root to load modules not owned by root

-s Report errors via syslog

--syslog Report errors via syslog

-S Force kallsyms on module

--kallsyms Force kallsyms on module

-v Verbose output

--verbose Verbose output

-V Show version

--version Show version

-x Do not export externs

--noexport Do not export externs

-X Do export externs (default)

--export Do export externs (default)

-y Do not add ksymoops symbols

--noksymoops Do not add ksymoops symbols

Option Explanation

304

. . .

. .I

-Y Do add ksymoops symbols (default)

--ksymoops Do add ksymoops symbols (default)

-e persist_name Filename to hold any persistent data from the module

--persist=persist_name Filename to hold any persistent data from the module

-o NAME Set internal module name to NAME

--name=NAME Set internal module name to NAME

-O NAME Save the object as a binary blob in NAME

--blob=NAME Save the object as a binary blob in NAME

-P PREFIX Prefix for kernel or module symbols

--prefix=PREFIX Prefix for kernel or module symbols

Option Explanation

305

I0

insmod_ksymoops_clean


Location: /sbin

Description: script to delete ksyms and modules not accessed in two days



S Y N T A X

insmod_ksymoops_clean

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the insmod_ksymoops_clean command.

306

. . .

. .I

insta l l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: copy files and set attributes; used in make files to update files



S Y N T A X

install [OPTION]... SOURCE DEST (1st format)install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY (2nd format)install -d [OPTION]... DIRECTORY... (3rd format)

In the first two formats, copy SOURCE to DEST or multiple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY, while setting permission modes and owner/group.

In the third format, create all components of the given DIRECTORY(ies).

The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


-b like --backup but does not accept an argument

-c (ignored)

-d treat all arguments as directory names; create all components of the specified directories

--directory treat all arguments as directory names; create all components of the specified directories

307

I0

-D create all leading components of DEST except the last,then copy SOURCE to DEST; useful in the 1st format

-g GROUP set group ownership, instead of process' current group

--group=GROUP set group ownership, instead of process' current group

-m MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), instead of rwxr-xr-x

--mode=MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), instead of rwxr-xr-x

-o OWNER set ownership (super-user only)

--owner=OWNER set ownership (super-user only)

-p apply access/modification times of SOURCE files to corresponding destination files

--preserve-timestamps apply access/modification times of SOURCE files to corresponding destination files

-s strip symbol tables, only for 1st and 2nd formats

--strip strip symbol tables, only for 1st and 2nd formats



-v print the name of each directory as it is created

--verbose print the name of each directory as it is created


Option Explanation

308

. . .

. .I

The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or throughthe VERSION_CONTROL environment variable.


Version Control Value Explanation

none never make backups (even if --backup is given)

off never make backups (even if --backup is given)

numbered make numbered backups

t make numbered backups

existing numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise

never always make simple backups

simple always make simple backups

nil numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise

Option Explanation

309

I0

insta l lkernel


Location: /sbin

Description: script to install the kernel



S Y N T A X

installkernel

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the installkernel command.

310

. . .

. .I

ip


Location: /sbin

Description: this utility allows you to configure your network interfaces in various ways



S Y N T A X

ip [ OPTIONS ] OBJECT { COMMAND | help }where OBJECT := { link | addr | route | rule | neigh | tunnel |maddr | mroute | monitor }

O P T I O N S

OPTION Explanation

-V version

-s statistics

-r resolve

-f family; acceptable values for family include: inet, inet6, ipx, dnet, and link

-o oneline

311

I0

ipca lc


Location: /bin

Description: simple IP calculator; can be used to determine broadcast address, default netmask, and network address; can also attempt to show the hostname determined via DNS



S Y N T A X

ipcalc [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b Display calculated broadcast address

--broadcast Display calculated broadcast address

-h Show hostname determined via DNS

--hostname Show hostname determined via DNS

-m Display default netmask for IP (class A, B, or C)

--netmask Display default netmask for IP (class A, B, or C)

-n Display network address

--network Display network address

-p Display network prefix

--prefix Display network prefix

312

. . .

. .I

-s Don't ever display error messages

--silent Don't ever display error messages



--usage Display brief usage message and exit

Option Explanation

313

I0

ipmaddr


Location: /sbin

Description: used to configure multi-cast addresses



S Y N T A X

ipmaddr [ add | del ] MULTIADDR dev STRINGipmaddr show [ dev STRING ] [ ipv4 | ipv6 | link | all ]ipmaddr -V | -version

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


-version display version and exit

314

. . .

. .I

iptunnel


Location: /sbin

Description: used to configure IP tunnels



S Y N T A X

iptunnel { add | change | del | show } [ NAME ][ mode { ipip | gre | sit } ] [ remote ADDR ] [ local ADDR ][ [i|o]seq ] [ [i|o]key KEY ] [ [i|o]csum ][ ttl TTL ] [ tos TOS ] [ nopmtudisc ] [ dev PHYS_DEV ]iptunnel -V | --version

Where: NAME := STRINGADDR := { IP_ADDRESS | any }TOS := { NUMBER | inherit }TTL := { 1..255 | inherit }KEY := { DOTTED_QUAD | NUMBER }

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



315

I0

316

. . .

. .K

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

kernelversion


Location: /sbin

Description: script to get the kernel version



S Y N T A X

kernelversion

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the kernelversion command.

317

K0

ki l l


Location: /bin

Description: send a signal to terminate one or more process Ids



S Y N T A X

kill [-s sigspec | -n signum | -sigspec] [pid | job]kill -l [sigspec]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s sigspec specify the signal to send

-n signum where n is greater than one, all processes in group n are sent the signal signum

-sigspec a non-negative decimal integer or a symbolic signal name, specifying the signal to be sent instead of the default TERM

-l print a list of signal names

318

. . .

. .K

ki l la l l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: kill processes by command name



S Y N T A X

killall [ OPTIONS ] [ -- ] name ...killall -l, --listkillall -V --version

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-e require exact match for very long names

--exact require exact match for very long names

-g kill process group instead of process

--process-group kill process group instead of process

-i ask for confirmation before killing

--interactive ask for confirmation before killing

-l list all known signal names

--list list all known signal names

-q don't print complaints

--quiet don't print complaints

-s send signal instead of SIGTERM

--signal send signal instead of SIGTERM

319

K0

-v report if the signal was successfully sent

--verbose report if the signal was successfully sent



-w wait for processes to die

--wait wait for processes to die

Option Explanation

320

. . .

. .K

ki l la l l5


Location: /sbin

Description: system V equivalent of killall; command kills all processes except those on which it depends



S Y N T A X

killall5 -signalnumber

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the killall5 command.

321

K0

klogd


Location: /sbin

Description: controls which kernel messages are displayed on the console; prioritize all messages and log them through syslogd



S Y N T A X

klogd [ -c n ] [ -d ] [ -f fname ] [ -iI ] [ -n ] [ -o ] [-p ] [ -s ] [ -k fname ] [ -v ] [ -x ] [ -2 ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c n sets the default log level of console messages to n

-d enable debugging mode; will generate LOTS of output to stderr

-f fname log messages to the specified filename fname rather than to the syslog facility

-i signal the currently executing klogd daemon; signals the daemon to reload the kernel module symbols

-I signal the currently executing klogd daemon; signals for a reload of both the static kernel symbols and the kernel module symbols

-n avoid auto-backgrounding

-o execute in ‘one-shot’ mode

-p enable paranoia

322

. . .

. .K

-s force klogd to use the system call interface to the kernel message buffers

-k fname use the specified file fname as the source of kernel symbol information


-x omits EIP translation and there doesn't read the System.map

Option Explanation

323

K0

ksymoops


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to convert meaningless machine-specific numbers into meaningful symbols and offsets



S Y N T A X

ksymoops [OPTIONS]All flags can occur more than once. With the exception of -o and -d which are cumulative, the last occurrence of each flag is used. Note that "-v my.vmlinux -V" will be taken as "No vmlinux available" but "-V -v my.vmlinux" will read my.vmlinux. You will be warned about such combinations. Each occurrence of -d increases the debug level. Each -o flag can refer to a directory or to a single object file. If a directory is specified then all *.o files in that directory and its subdirectories are assumed to be modules. If any of the vmlinux, object, ksyms or system.map options contain the string *r (*m, *n, *s) then it is replaced at run time by the current value of ùname -r` (-m, -n, -s).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v vmlinux where to read vmlinux

-- vmlinux where to read vmlinux

-V No vmlinux is available

--no-vmlinux No vmlinux is available

-k ksyms Where to read ksyms

--ksyms=ksyms Where to read ksyms

-K No ksyms is available

--no-ksyms No ksyms is available

324

. . .

. .K

-l lsmod Where to read lsmod

--lsmod=lsmod Where to read lsmod

-L No lsmod is available

--no-lsmod No lsmod is available

-o object Directory containing modules or anindividual object name

--object=object Directory containing modules or anindividual object name -O

--no-object No objects are available

-m system.map Where to read System.map

--system-map=system.map Where to read System.map

-M No System.map is available

--no-system-map No System.map is available

-s save.map Save consolidated map

--save-map=save.map] Save consolidated map

-S Short or long lines toggle

--short-lines Short or long lines toggle

-e Toggle endianess of code bytes

--endian-swap Toggle endianess of code bytes

-x Hex or decimal toggle

--hex Hex or decimal toggle

-1 One shot toggle (exit after first Oops)

--one-shot One shot toggle (exit after first Oops)

-d Increase debug level by 1

Option Explanation

325

K0

The defaults can be changed in the Makefile.

--debug Increase debug level by 1



-t target Target of oops log

--target=target Target of oops log

-a architecture Architecture of oops log < Oops.fileOops report to decode

--architecture=architecture Architecture of oops log < Oops.fileOops report to decode

Current Defaults

-V

-k /proc/ksyms

-l /proc/modules

-o /lib/modules/*r/

-m /boot/System.map-*r

Options use for ksymoops 2.4.1 on i686 2.4.9-36cp

-V (default)

-k /proc/ksyms (default)

-l /proc/modules (default)

-o /lib/modules/2.4.9-36cp/ (default)

-m /boot/System.map-2.4.9-36cp (default)

Option Explanation

326

. . .

. .K

ksyms (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to insmod.static (through insmod)



S Y N T A X

See insmod.static

O P T I O N S

See insmod.static

327

K0

kudzu


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: hardware probing tool; run at system boot



S Y N T A X

kudzu [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Options Explanation

-s do only 'safe' probes that won't disturb hardware

--safe do only 'safe' probes that won't disturb hardware

-p probe only, print information to stdout

--probe probe only, print information to stdout

-b STRING probe only the specified 'bus' defined by STRING

--bus=STRING probe only the specified 'bus' defined by STRING

-c STRING probe only for the specified 'class' defined by STRING

--class=STRING probe only for the specified 'class' defined by STRING

-f FILE FILE to read hardware info from read probed hardware from a file

--file=FILE FILE to read hardware info from read probed hardware from a file

328

. . .

. .K



--usage display brief usage message

Options Explanation

329

K0

330

. . .

. .L

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L

last


Location: /usr/bin

Description: show listing of last logged in users



S Y N T A X

last [-num | -n num] [-f file] [-R] [-x] [-o] [username..] [tty..]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-num count telling last how many lines to show

-n NUM count telling last how many lines to show

-f FILE search the file specified by FILE, instead of the /var/log/wtmp file

-R suppress display of hostname field

-x display system shutdown entries and runlevel changes

-o read an old type wtmp file

331

L0

lastb (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to last



S Y N T A X

See last

O P T I O N S

See last

332

. . .

. .L

last log


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the last login time for system accounts



S Y N T A X

lastlog [-u LOGIN_NAME] [-t DAYS]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-u LOGIN_NAME cause the lastlog record for LOGIN_NAME only to be printed

-t DAYS overrides -u

333

L0

lcrash


Location: /sbin

Description: used to collect and view core files from kernel crashes



S Y N T A X

lcrash [-r] [-n bounds] [-H include path] [-M macro path] map dump kerntypeslcrash [-r] [-H include path] [-M macro path] [-s <dumpdev> <dumpdir>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r

-n BOUNDS

-H INCLUDE_PATH

-M MACRO_PATH

-s DUMPDEV DUMPDIR

334

. . .

. .L

ld


Location: /usr/bin

Description: completes the final process of linking all necessary references to sharable objects and unreferenced symbols in an impure executable, (usually a dynamically linked executable), to produce a runnable file



S Y N T A X

ld [options] file...Supported demangler style: {auto,gnu,lucid,arm,hp,edg,gnu-v3,java,gnat,compaq}

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a KEYWORD Shared library control for HP/UX compatibility

-A ARCH set architecture

--architecture ARCH set architecture

-b TARGET Specify target for following input files

--format TARGET Specify target for following input files

-c FILE Read MRI format linker script

--mri-script FILE Read MRI format linker script

-d Force common symbols to be defined

-dc Force common symbols to be defined

335

L0

-dp Force common symbols to be defined

-e ADDRESS Set start address

--entry ADDRESS Set start address

-E Export all dynamic symbols

--export-dynamic Export all dynamic symbols

-EB Link big-endian objects

-EL Link little-endian objects

-f SHLIB Auxiliary filter for shared object symbol tabl

--auxiliary SHLIB Auxiliary filter for shared object symbol table

-F SHLIB Filter for shared object symbol table

--filter SHLIB Filter for shared object symbol table

-g Ignored

-G SIZE Small data size (if no size, same as --shared)

--gpsize SIZE Small data size (if no size, same as --shared)

-h FILENAME Set internal name of shared library

-soname FILENAME Set internal name of shared library

-l LIBNAME Search for library LIBNAME

--library LIBNAME Search for library LIBNAME

-L DIRECTORY Add DIRECTORY to library search path

Option Explanation

336

. . .

. .L

--library-path DIRECTORY Add DIRECTORY to library search path

-m EMULATION Set emulation

-M Print map file on standard output

--print-map Print map file on standard output

-n Do not page align data

--nmagic Do not page align data

-N Do not page align data, do not make text readonly

--omagic Do not page align data, do not make text readonly

-o FILE Set output file name

--output FILE Set output file name

-O Optimize output file

-Qy Ignored for SVR4 compatibility

-q Generate relocations in final output

--emit-relocs Generate relocations in final output

-r Generate relocateable output

-i Generate relocateable output

--relocateable Generate relocateable output

-R FILE Just link symbols (if directory, same as --rpath)

--just-symbols FILE Just link symbols (if directory, same as --rpath)

-s Strip all symbols

--strip-all Strip all symbols

Option Explanation

337

L0

-S Strip debugging symbols

--strip-debug Strip debugging symbols

-t Trace file opens

--trace Trace file opens

-T FILE Read linker script

--script FILE Read linker script

-u SYMBOL Start with undefined reference to SYMBOL

--undefined SYMBOL Start with undefined reference to SYMBOL

--unique [=SECTION] Don't merge input [SECTION | orphan] sections

-Ur Build global constructor/destructor tables



-V Print version and emulation information

-x Discard all local symbols

--discard-all Discard all local symbols

-X Discard temporary local symbols (default)

--discard-locals Discard temporary local symbols (default)

--discard-none Don't discard any local symbols

-y SYMBOL Trace mentions of SYMBOL

--trace-symbol SYMBOL Trace mentions of SYMBOL

Option Explanation

338

. . .

. .L

-Y PATH Default search path for Solaris compatibility

-( Start a group

--start-group Start a group

-) End a group

--end-group End a group

-assert KEYWORD Ignored for SunOS compatibility

-Bdynamic Link against shared libraries

-dy Link against shared libraries

-call_shared Link against shared libraries

-Bstatic Do not link against shared libraries

-dn Do not link against shared libraries

-non_shared Do not link against shared libraries

-static Do not link against shared libraries

-Bsymbolic Bind global references locally

--check-sections Check section addresses for overlaps (default)

--no-check-sections Do not check section addresses for overlaps

--cref Output cross reference table

--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION Define a symbol

--demangle [=STYLE] Demangle symbol names [using STYLE]

--demangler DSO:FUNCTION Set DSO and demangler function

--dynamic-linker PROGRAM Set the dynamic linker to use

--embedded-relocs Generate embedded relocs

Option Explanation

339

L0

-fini SYMBOL Call SYMBOL at unload-time

--force-exe-suffix Force generation of file with .exe suffix

--gc-sections Remove unused sections (on some targets)

--no-gc-sections Don't remove unused sections (default)

--help Print option help

-init SYMBOL Call SYMBOL at load-time

-Map FILE Write a map file

--multilib-dir PATH Specify a target directory

--no-demangle Do not demangle symbol names

--no-keep-memory Use less memory and more disk I/O

--no-undefined Allow no undefined symbols

--allow-shlib-undefined Allow undefined symbols in shared objects

--no-warn-mismatch Don't warn about mismatched input files

--no-whole-archive Turn off --whole-archive

--noinhibit-exec Create an output file even if errors occur

--oformat TARGET Specify target of output file

-qmagic Ignored for Linux compatibility

--relax Relax branches on certain targets

--retain-symbols-file FILE Keep only symbols listed in FILE

-rpath PATH Set runtime shared library search path

Option Explanation

340

. . .

. .L

-rpath-link PATH Set link time shared library search path

-shared Create a shared library

-Bshareable Create a shared library

--sort-common Sort common symbols by size

--spare-dynamic-tags COUNT How many tags to reserve in .dynamic section

--split-by-file [=SIZE] Split output sections every SIZE octets

--split-by-reloc [=COUNT] Split output sections every COUNT relocs

--stats Print memory usage statistics

--target-help Display target specific options

--task-link SYMBOL Do task level linking

--traditional-format Use same format as native linker

--section-start SECTION=ADDRESS Set address of named section

-Tbss ADDRESS Set address of .bss section

-Tdata ADDRESS Set address of .data section

-Ttext ADDRESS Set address of .text section

--verbose Output lots of information during link

--version-script FILE Read version information script

--version-exports-section SYMBOL Take export symbols list from .exports, using SYMBOL as the version.

--warn-common Warn about duplicate common symbols

Option Explanation

341

L0

--warn-constructors Warn if global constructors/destructors are seen

--warn-multiple-gp Warn if the multiple GP values are used

--warn-once Warn only once per undefined symbol

--warn-section-align Warn if start of section changes due to alignment

--fatal-warnings Treat warnings as errors

--whole-archive Include all objects from following archives

--wrap SYMBOL Use wrapper functions for SYMBOL

--mpc860c0 [=WORDS] Modify problematic branches in last WORDS (1-10, default 5) words of a page

-Bgroup Selects group name lookup rules for DSO

--disable-new-dtags Disable new dynamic tags

--enable-new-dtags Enable new dynamic tags

-z defs Disallows undefined symbols

-z initfirst Mark DSO to be initialized first at runtime

-z interpose Mark object to interpose all DSOs but executable

-z loadfltr Mark object requiring immediate process

-z nodefaultlib Mark object not to use default search paths

-z nodelete Mark DSO non-deletable at runtime

Option Explanation

342

. . .

. .L

-z nodlopen Mark DSO not available to dlopen

-z nodump Mark DSO not available to dldump

-z now Mark object non-lazy runtime binding

-z origin Mark object requiring immediate $ORIGIN processing at runtime

-z KEYWORD Ignored for Solaris compatibility

-Bgroup Selects group name lookup rules for DSO

--disable-new-dtags Disable new dynamic tags

--enable-new-dtags Enable new dynamic tags

-z defs Disallows undefined symbols

-z initfirst Mark DSO to be initialized first at runtime

-z interpose Mark object to interpose all DSOs but executable

-z loadfltr Mark object requiring immediate process

-z nodefaultlib Mark object not to use default search paths

-z nodelete Mark DSO non-deletable at runtime

-z nodlopen Mark DSO not available to dlopen

-z nodump Mark DSO not available to dldump

-z now Mark object non-lazy runtime binding

-z origin Mark object requiring immediate $ORIGIN processing at runtime

-z KEYWORD Ignored for Solaris compatibility

Option Explanation

343

L0

ld Supported Targets

elf32-i386

a.out-i386-linux

efi-app-ia32

elf32-little

elf32-big

srec

symbolsrec

tekhex

binary

ihex

trad-core

ld Supported Emulations

elf_i386

i386linux

elf_i386_glibc21

ld Emulation Specific Options

elf_i386:

344

. . .

. .L

ldconf ig


Location: /sbin

Description: configure dynamic linker runtime bindings



S Y N T A X

ldconfig [OPTION...]Mandatory or optional arguments to long options are also mandatory or optional for any corresponding short options.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c FORMAT Format to use: new, old or compat (default)

--format=FORMAT Format to use: new, old or compat (default)

-C CACHE Use CACHE as cache file

-f CONF Use CONF as configuration file

-l Manually link individual libraries.

-n Only process directories specified on the command line; do not build cache.

-N do not build cache

-p Print cache

--print-cache Print cache

-r ROOT Change to and use ROOT as root directory

-v Generate verbose messages

345

L0

--verbose Generate verbose messages

-X Don't generate links



--usage Give a short usage message

-V Print program version

--version Print program version

Option Explanation

346

. . .

. .L

less


Location: /usr/bin

Description: program for paging through text files or other output



S Y N T A X

less -?less --helpless -Vless --versionless [-[+]aBcCdeEfgGiImMnNqQrsSuUVWwXZ] [-b bufs] [-h lines] [-j line] [-k keyfile] [-K character set] [-{oO} logfile] [-p pattern] [-P prompt] [-t tag] [-T tagsfile] [-x tab] [-y lines] [-[z] lines] [+[+]cmd] [--] [filename]...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

h display summary of less commands

H display summary of less commands

SPACE scroll forward N lines

^V scroll forward N lines

f scroll forward N lines

^F scroll forward N lines

z like SPACE, but if N is specified, it becomes the new window size

ESC-SPACE like SPACE, but scrolls a full screenful, even if it reaches end-of-file in the process

347

L0

RETURN scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

^N scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

e scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

Ê scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

j scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

^J scroll forward N lines; default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size

d scroll forward N lines, default one half of the screen size; if N is specified, it becomes the new default for subsequent d and u commands

^D scroll forward N lines, default one half of the screen size; if N is specified, it becomes the new default for subsequent d and u commands

b scroll backward N lines, default one window; if N is more than the screen size, only the final screenful is displayed

^B scroll backward N lines, default one window; if N is more than the screen size, only the final screenful is displayed

Option Explanation

348

. . .

. .L

ESC-v scroll backward N lines, default one window; if N is more than the screen size, only the final screenful is displayed

w like ESC-v, but if N is specified, it becomes the new window size

y scroll backward N lines, default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size; warning: some systems use ^Y as a special job control character

^Y scroll backward N lines, default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size; warning: some systems use ^Y as a special job control character

^P scroll backward N lines, default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size; warning: some systems use ^Y as a special job control character

k scroll backward N lines, default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size; warning: some systems use ^Y as a special job control character

^K scroll backward N lines, default 1; entire N lines are displayed, even if N is more than the screen size; warning: some systems use ^Y as a special job control character

u scroll backward N lines, default one half of the screen size; if N is specified, it becomes the new default for subsequent d and u commands

Option Explanation

349

L0

Û scroll backward N lines, default one half of the screen size; if N is specified, it becomes the new default for subsequent d and u commands

ESC-) scroll horizontally right N characters, default half the screen width (see the -# option); while the text is scrolled, it acts as though the -S option (chop lines) were in effect; note that if you wish to enter a number N, you must use ESC-), not RIGHTARROW, because the arrow is taken to be a line editing command

RIGHTARROW scroll horizontally right N characters, default half the screen width (see the -# option); while the text is scrolled, it acts as though the -S option (chop lines) were in effect; note that if you wish to enter a number N, you must use ESC-), not RIGHTARROW, because the arrow is taken to be a line editing command

ESC-( scroll horizontally left N characters, default half the screen width (see the -# option)

LEFTARROW scroll horizontally left N characters, default half the screen width (see the -# option)

r repaint the screen

^R repaint the screen

^L repaint the screen

R repaint the screen, discarding any buffered input; useful if the file is changing while it is being viewed

Option Explanation

350

. . .

. .L

F scroll forward, and keep trying to read when the end of file is reached; normally this command would be used when already at the end of the file; it is a way to monitor the tail of a file which is growing while it is being viewed

g go to line N in the file, default 1 (beginning of file); warning: this may be slow if N is large

< go to line N in the file, default 1 (beginning of file); warning: this may be slow if N is large

ESC-< go to line N in the file, default 1 (beginning of file); warning: this may be slow if N is large

G go to line N in the file, default the end of the file; warning: this may be slow if N is large, or if N is not specified and standard input, rather than a file, is being read

> go to line N in the file, default the end of the file; warning: this may be slow if N is large, or if N is not specified and standard input, rather than a file, is being read

ESC-> go to line N in the file, default the end of the file; warning: this may be slow if N is large, or if N is not specified and standard input, rather than a file, is being read

p go to a position N percent into the file; N should be between 0 and 100

% go to a position N percent into the file; N should be between 0 and 100

Option Explanation

351

L0

{ if a left curly bracket appears in the top line displayed on the screen, the { command will go to the matching right curly bracket; the matching right curly bracket is positioned on the bottom line of the screen; if there is more than one left curly bracket on the top line, a number N may be used to specify the N-th bracket on the line

} if a right curly bracket appears in the bottom line displayed on the screen, the } command will go to the matching left curly bracket; the matching left curly bracket is positioned on the top line of the screen; if there is more than one right curly bracket on the top line, a number N may be used to specify the N-th bracket on the line

( like {, but applies to parentheses rather than curly brackets

) like }, but applies to parentheses rather than curly brackets

[ like {, but applies to square brackets rather than curly brackets

] like }, but applies to square brackets rather than curly brackets

ESC-^F followed by two characters, acts like {, but uses the two characters as open and close brackets, respectively

ESC-^B followed by two characters, acts like }, but uses the two characters as open and close brackets, respectively

m followed by any lowercase letter, marks the current position with that letter

Option Explanation

352

. . .

. .L

‘ single quote; followed by any lowercase letter, returns to the position which was previously marked with that letter; followed by another single quote, returns to the position at which the last "large" movement command was executed; followed by a ^ or $, jumps to the beginning or end of the file respectively; marks are preserved when a new file is examined, so the ' command can be used to switch between input files

^X^X same as single quote

/pattern search for pattern

Option Explanation

353

L0

lkcd


Location: /sbin

Description: Linux kernel crash dump utility



S Y N T A X

/sbin/lkcd <config|save>

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the lkcd command.

354

. . .

. .L

lkcd_conf ig


Location: /sbin

Description: configuration utility for lkcd



S Y N T A X

lkcd_config [-d device_name | -D device_num] [-c compression_type][-f flags] [-l level]lkcd_config [-q]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d device_name

-D device_name

-c compression_type

-f flags

-l level

-q

355

L0

lkcd_ksyms


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for reconstructing kernel symbols; part of the Linux kernel crash dump utilities



S Y N T A X

lkcd_ksyms map dump kerntypes

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options available for the lkcd_ksyms command.

356

. . .

. .L

ln


Location: /bin

Description: create links for files



S Y N T A X

ln [OPTION]... TARGET [LINK_NAME]ln [OPTION]... TARGET... DIRECTORYln [OPTION]... --target-directory=DIRECTORY TARGET...Create a link to the specified TARGET with optional LINK_NAME.If LINK_NAME is omitted, a link with the same basename as the TARGET iscreated in the current directory. When using the second form with morethan one TARGET, the last argument must be a directory; create linksin DIRECTORY to each TARGET. Create hard links by default, symboliclinks with --symbolic. When creating hard links, each TARGET must exist.The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-d hard link directories (super-user only)

-F hard link directories (super-user only)

--directory hard link directories (super-user only)

-f remove existing destination files

357

L0

--force remove existing destination files

-n treat destination that is a symlink to a directory as if it were a normal file

--no-dereference treat destination that is a symlink to a directory as if it were a normal file

-i prompt whether to remove destinations

--interactive prompt whether to remove destinations

-s make symbolic links instead of hard links

--symbolic make symbolic links instead of hard links



--target-directory=DIRECTORY specify the DIRECTORY in which to create the links

-v print name of each file before linking

--verbose print name of each file before linking



Version Control Environment Variable Explanation


Option Explanation

358

. . .

. .L









359

L0

loadkeys


Location: /bin

Description: used to control keyboard behavior



S Y N T A X

loadkeys [option...] [mapfile...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c clear kernel compose table

--clearcompose clear kernel compose table

-d load default keymap file

--default load default keymap file

-m output a "defkeymap.c" to stdout

--mktable output a "defkeymap.c" to stdout

-s clear kernel string table

--clearstrings clear kernel string table

-q be silent

--quiet be silent

-v report the changes

--verbose report the changes

-v report more changes

--verbose report more changes


360

. . .

. .L




Option Explanation

361

L0

loadkeys (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to ../../bin/loadkeys



S Y N T A X

See loadkeys

O P T I O N S

See loadkeys

362

. . .

. .L

loadunimap


Location: /usr/bin

Description: load the kernel unicode-to-font mapping table



S Y N T A X

This is a shell wrapper; use the consolechars command instead.

O P T I O N S


363

L0

log_star t


Location: /bin

Description: log management utility



S Y N T A X

log --helplog listlog limit <log-index> <max-size> <backlog-copies>log unlimit <log-index>log show <log-index> [<lines>]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the log_start command.

364

. . .

. .L

logger


Location: /usr/bin

Description: add entries to the system log



S Y N T A X

logger [-is] [-f file] [-p pri] [-t tag] [-u socket] [ message ... ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s log the message to standard error as well as the system log

-i log the process ID of the logger process with each line

-f FILE log the file specified by FILE

-p PRI enter the message with the priority specified by PRI

-t TAG mark every line in the log with the tag specified by TAG

-u SOCKET write to the socket specified by SOCKET instead of the built-in syslog routines

365

L0

log in


Location: /bin

Description: log in to the system



S Y N T A X

login [-fp] [username]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f do not perform authentication; user is pre-authenticated

-p preserve environment

366

. . .

. .L

logname


Location: /usr/bin

Description: check the /var/run/utmp for the user's login name



S Y N T A X

logname [OPTION]Print the name of the current user.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



367

L0

losetup


Location: /sbin

Description: setup, get information about, and delete loop devices



S Y N T A X

losetup loop_device # give infolosetup -d loop_device # deletelosetup [ -e encryption ] [ -o offset ] loop_device file # setup

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d LOOP_DEVICE delete LOOP_DEVICE

-e ENCRYPTION_KEYWORD enable data encryption as specified by ENCRYPTION_KEYWORD

-o OFFSET data start is moved by OFFSET bytes into the specified file or device

Encryption Keyword Explanation

NONE use no encryption (default).

XOR use a simple XOR encryption.

AES use Advanced Encryption Standard encryption. AES encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and AES encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API. enabled in the Crypto API.

368

. . .

. .L

Blowfish use Blowfish encryption. Blowfish encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and Blowfish encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

Twofish use Twofish encryption. Twofish encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and Twofish encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

CAST use CAST encryption. CAST encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and CAST encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

DES use DES encryption. DES encryption is only available if the optional DES package has been added to the kernel. DES encryption uses an additional start value that is used to protect passwords against dictionary attacks. Use of DES is deprecated.

DFC use DFC encryption. DFC encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and DFC encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

IDEA use IDEA encryption. IDEA encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and IDEA encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

MARS use MARS encryption. MARS encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and MARS encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.


369

L0

RC5 use RC5 encryption. RC5 encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and RC5 encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

RC6 use RC6 encryption. RC6 encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and RC6 encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.

Serpent use Serpent encryption. Serpent encryption is only available if you are using the international kernel and Serpent encryption has been enabled in the Crypto API.


370

. . .

. .L

ls


Location: /bin

Description: list contents of directories



S Y N T A X

ls [OPTION]... [FILE]...List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).

Sort entries alphabetically if none of -cftuSUX nor --sort.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a do not hide entries starting with .

--all do not hide entries starting with .

-A do not list implied . and ..

--almost-all do not list implied . and ..

-b print octal escapes for nongraphic characters

--escape print octal escapes for nongraphic characters


-B do not list implied entries ending with ~

--ignore-backups do not list implied entries ending with ~

371

L0

-c with -lt sort by, and show, ctime (time of last modification of file status information) with -l: show ctime and sort by name otherwise: sort by ctime

-C list entries by columns

--color[=WHEN] control whether color is used to distinguish file types. WHEN may be `never', àlways', or àuto'; not available in some versions of SecurePlatform

-d list directory entries instead of contents

--directory list directory entries instead of contents

-D generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode

--dired generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode

-f do not sort, enable -aU, disable -lst

-F append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries

--classify append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries

--format=WORD across -x, commas -m, horizontal -x, long -l, single-column -1, verbose -l, vertical -C

--full-time list both full date and full time

-g (ignored)

-G inhibit display of group information

--no-group inhibit display of group information

Option Explanation

372

. . .

. .L




-H same as `--si' for now; soon to change to conform to POSIX

--indicator-style=WORD append indicator with style WORD to entry names: none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p)

-i print index number of each file

--inode print index number of each file

-I do not list implied entries matching shell PATTERN

--ignore=PATTERN do not list implied entries matching shell PATTERN



-l use a long listing format

-L list entries pointed to by symbolic links

--dereference list entries pointed to by symbolic links

-m fill width with a comma separated list of entries

-n list numeric UIDs and GIDs instead of names

--numeric-uid-gid list numeric UIDs and GIDs instead of names

Option Explanation

373

L0

-N print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control characters specially)

--literal print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control characters specially)

-o use long listing format without group info

-p append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries

--file-type append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries

-q print ? instead of non graphic characters

--hide-control-chars print ? instead of non graphic characters

--show-control-chars show non graphic characters as-is (default unless program is `ls' and output is a terminal)

-Q enclose entry names in double quotes

--quote-name enclose entry names in double quotes

--quoting-style=WORD use quoting style WORD for entry names: literal, locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape

-r reverse order while sorting

--reverse reverse order while sorting

-R list subdirectories recursively

--recursive list subdirectories recursively

-s print size of each file, in blocks

--size print size of each file, in blocks

Option Explanation

374

. . .

. .L

-S sort by file size

--sort=WORD extension -X, none -U, size -S, time -t, version -v status -c, time -t, atime -u, access -u, use -u

--time=WORD show time as WORD instead of modification time: atime, access, use, ctime or status; use specified time as sort key if -sort=time

-t sort by modification time

-T assume tab stops at each COLS instead of

--tabsize=COLS assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8

-u with -lt: sort by, and show, access time with -l: show access time and sort by name otherwise: sort by access time

-U do not sort; list entries in directory order

-v sort by version

-w assume screen width instead of current value

--width=COLS assume screen width instead of current value

-x list entries by lines instead of by columns

-X sort alphabetically by entry extension

-1 list one file per line



Option Explanation

375

L0

lsat t r


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print attributes of files on a Linux Second Extended filesystem



S Y N T A X

lsattr [-RVadlv] [files...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-R recursively list attributes of directories and their contents

-V display the program version

-a list all files in directories, including hidden files

-d list directories like other files, rather than listing their contents

-l print attribute names, rather than letter codes, in list

-v list the file’s version/generation number

376

. . .

. .L

lsmod (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin




S Y N T A X

See insmod.static

O P T I O N S

See insmod.static

377

L0

lspci


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for inspecting and setting devices connected to the pci bus



S Y N T A X

lspci [<options>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v Be verbose

-n Show numeric ID's

-b Bus-centric view (PCI addresses and IRQ's instead of those seen by the CPU)

-x Show hex-dump of config space

-s [[<bus>]:][<slot>][.[<func>]] Show only devices in selected slots

-d [<vendor>]:[<device>] Show only selected devices

-t Show bus tree

-m Produce machine-readable output

-i <file> Use specified ID database instead of /usr/share/pci.ids

-M Enable `bus mapping' mode (dangerous; root only)

-P <dir> Use specified directory instead of /proc/bus/pci

-H <mode> Use direct hardware access (<mode> = 1 or 2)

378

. . .

. .L

-F <file> Read configuration data from given file

-G Enable PCI access debugging

Option Explanation

379

L0

380

. . .

. .M

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M

mapscrn


Location: /usr/bin

Description: load screen output mapping table



S Y N T A X


O P T I O N S


381

M0

mbchk


Location: /usr/bin

Description: check if the format of files complies with the multiboot specification



S Y N T A X

mbchk [OPTION]... [FILE]...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation







382

. . .

. .M

md5sum


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print or check MD5 checksums



S Y N T A X

md5sum [OPTION] [FILE]...md5sum [OPTION] --check [FILE]With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.The sums are computed as described in RFC 1321. When checking, the inputshould be a former output of this program. The default mode is to printa line with checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` ' fortext), and name for each FILE.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b read files in binary mode (default on DOS/Windows)

--binary read files in binary mode (default on DOS/Windows)

-c check MD5 sums against given list

--check check MD5 sums against given list

-t read files in text mode (default)

--text read files in text mode (default)

--status don't output anything, status code shows success ;useful only when verifying checksums

-w warn about improperly formated checksum lines ;useful only when verifying checksums

383

M0

--warn warn about improperly formated checksum lines ;useful only when verifying checksums



Option Explanation

384

. . .

. .M

mesg


Location: /usr/bin

Description: check the ability of other users to send write messages to your terminal



S Y N T A X

mesg [y|n]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the mesg command.

385

M0

messages_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to view and manipulate /var/log/messages



S Y N T A X

messages [<number-of-lines>]messages --help

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


386

. . .

. .M

mii - tool


Location: /sbin

Description: utility checks or sets the status of a network interface's Media Independent Interface (MII) unit



S Y N T A X

mii-tool [-VvRrwl] [-A media,... | -F media] [interface ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


--version display version information

-v more verbose output

--verbose more verbose output

-R reset MII to poweron state

--reset reset MII to poweron state

-r restart autonegotiation

--restart restart autonegotiation

-w monitor for link status changes

--watch monitor for link status changes

-l with -w, write events to syslog

--log with -w, write events to syslog

-A advertise only specified media

--advertise=media,... advertise only specified media

387

M0

-F force specified media technology

--force=media force specified media technology

Media Types

100baseT4

100baseTx-FD

100baseTx-HD

10baseT-FD

10baseT-HD,

(to advertise both HD and FD) 100baseTx

10baseT

Option Explanation

388

. . .

. .M

mini logd


Location: /sbin

Description: one of the init scripts used to boot the SecurePlatform kernel



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is avaiable for the minilogd command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about minilogd options.

389

M0

mk_modmap


Location: /usr/bin

Description: script to translate a keytable file into a file parseable by xmodmap; need for language support



S Y N T A X

mk_modmap [ -v ] keymap_file

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v verbose output

390

. . .

. .M

mkdict


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: script to invoke sort with the -T option, pointing to a lot of free space in a directory somewhere; used in the event of a system crash



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the mkdict command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about mkdict options.

391

M0

mkdir


Location: /bin

Description: create one or more directories



S Y N T A X

mkdir [OPTION] DIRECTORY...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-m MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not rwxrwxrwx - umask

--mode=MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not rwxrwxrwx - umask

-p no error if existing, make parent directories as needed

--parents no error if existing, make parent directories as needed

-v print a message for each created directory

--verbose print a message for each created directory



392

. . .

. .M

mke2fs


Location: /sbin

Description: format a device as a Linux Second Edition filesystem



S Y N T A X

mke2fs [-c|-T|-l filename] [-b block-size] [-f fragment-size][-i bytes-per-inode] [-j] [-J journal-options] [-N number-of-inodes][-m reserved-blocks-percentage] [-o creator-os] [-g blocks-per-group][-L volume-label] [-M last-mounted-directory] [-O feature[,...]][-r fs-revision] [-R raid_opts] [-qvSV] device [blocks-count]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c FILENAME check the device specified by FILENAME for bad blocks before creating the file system

-T FS_TYPE specify how the filesystem is going to be used, so that mke2fs can chose optimal filesystem parameters for that use; supported filesystem types are:news: one inode per 4kb blocklargefile:one inode per megabytelargefile4: one inode per 4 megabytes

-l FILENAME read the bad blocks list from FILENAME

-b BLOCK_SIZE specify the size BLOCK_SIZE of the blocks in bytes

393

M0

-f FRAGMENT_SIZE specify the size of fragments in bytes

-i BYTES_PER_INODE specify the bytes-to-inode ration

-j create the file system with an ext3 journal

-J JOURNAL_OPTIONS create the ext3 journal with the JOURNAL_OPTIONS specified

-N NUMBER_OF_INODES override the default calculation of the number of inodes that should be reserved for the file system

-m RESERVED_BLOCKS_PERCENTAGE specify the number of file system blocks reserved for the super user

-o CREATOR_OS manually override the default value of the CREATOR_OS field specified in the file system

-g BLOCKS_PER_GROUP

-L VOLUME_LABEL set the VOLUME_LABEL for the file system

-M LAST_MOUNTED_DIRECTORY set the last mounted directory for the file system

-O feature create file system with given features

-r FS_VERSION set the file system revision for the file system

-R RAID_OPTS set raid-related options for the file system

-q quiet execution

-v verbose execution

-S write super block and group descriptors only

-V print program version and exit

Option Explanation

394

. . .

. .M

Journal Option Explanation

size=journal-size Create a journal stored in the filesystem of size journal -size megabytes. The size of the journal must be at least 1024 filesystem blocks (i.e., 1MB if using 1k blocks, 4MB if using 4k blocks, etc.) and may be no more than 102,400 filesystem blocks. The journal must fit within the newly created filesystem.

device=external-journal Attach the filesystem to the journal block device located on external-journal. The external journal must already have been created using the command mke2fs -O journal_dev external-journal Note that external-journal must have been created with the same block size as the new filesystem. Instead of specifying a device name directly, external-journal can also be specified by either LABEL=label or UUID=UUID to locate the external journal by either the volume label or UUID stored in the ext2 superblock at the start of the journal. Use dumpe2fs(8) to display a journal device's volume label and UUID. See also the -L option of tune2fs(8).

File System Feature Option Explanation

sparse_super Create a filesystem with fewer superblock backup copies (saves space on large filesystems).

filetype Store file type information in directory entries.

395

M0

has_journal Create an ext3 journal (as if using the -j option).

journal_dev Create an external ext3 journal on the given device instead of a regular ext2 filesystem. Note that external-journal must be created with the same block size as the filesystems that will be using it.

File System Feature Option Explanation

396

. . .

. .M

mkfi fo


Location: /usr/bin

Description: create named pipes with the names given



S Y N T A X

mkfifo [OPTION] NAME...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-m MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask

--mode=MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask



397

M0

mkfs


Location: /sbin

Description: construct a filesystem on a devices



S Y N T A X

mkfs.ext2 [-c|-T|-l filename] [-b block-size] [-f fragment-size][-i bytes-per-inode] [-j] [-J journal-options] [-N number-of-inodes][-m reserved-blocks-percentage] [-o creator-os] [-g blocks-per-group][-L volume-label] [-M last-mounted-directory] [-O feature[,...]][-r fs-revision] [-R raid_opts] [-qvSV] device [blocks-count]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c FILENAME check device for bad blocks before creating the file system

-T FILENAME specify how the filesystem is going to be used, so that mke2fs can chose optimal filesystem parameters for that use; supported filesystem types are:news: one inode per 4kb blocklargefile:one inode per megabytelargefile4: one inode per 4 megabytes

-l FILENAME read the bad blocks list from the file specified by FILENAME

-b BLOCK_SIZE specify block size in bytes

-f FRAGMENT_SIZE specify fragment size in bytes

-i BYTES-PER-INODE specify the bytes-to-inode ration

-j create the file system with a journal

398

. . .

. .M

-J JOURNAL_OPTIONS create journal with JOURNAL_OPTIONS specified


-m RESERVED_BLOCKS_PERCENTAGE specify the number of blocks that should be reserved for the super user

-o CREATOR_OS override the CREATOR_OS default value

-g BLOCKS_PER_GROUP


-M LAST_MOUNTED_DIRECTORY set the LAST_MOUNTED_DIRECTORY for the file system

-O FEATURE create file system with the FEATURE(s) specified

-r FS_REVISION set the file system revision

-R RAID_OPTS set RAID-related options for the file system

-q be quiet

-v be verbose

-S write super block and descriptors only

-V display program version and exit

Option Explanation

399

M0

mkfs.ext2


Location: /sbin

Description: create an ext2 filesystem



S Y N T A X

mkfs.ext2 [-c|-T|-l filename] [-b block-size] [-f fragment-size][-i bytes-per-inode] [-j] [-J journal-options] [-N number-of-inodes][-m reserved-blocks-percentage] [-o creator-os] [-g blocks-per-group][-L volume-label] [-M last-mounted-directory] [-O feature[,...]][-r fs-revision] [-R raid_opts] [-qvSV] device [blocks-count]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c FILENAME check device for bad blocks before creating the file system

-T FILENAME specify how the filesystem is going to be used, so that mke2fs can chose optimal filesystem parameters for that use; supported filesystem types are:news: one inode per 4kb blocklargefile:one inode per megabytelargefile4: one inode per 4 megabytes

-l FILENAME read the bad blocks list from the file specified by FILENAME

-b BLOCK_SIZE specify block size in bytes

-f FRAGMENT_SIZE specify fragment size in bytes

-i BYTES-PER-INODE specify the bytes-to-inode ration

-j create the file system with a journal

400

. . .

. .M

-J JOURNAL_OPTIONS create journal with JOURNAL_OPTIONS specified


-m RESERVED_BLOCKS_PERCENTAGE specify the number of blocks that should be reserved for the super user

-o CREATOR_OS override the CREATOR_OS default value

-g BLOCKS_PER_GROUP


-M LAST_MOUNTED_DIRECTORY set the LAST_MOUNTED_DIRECTORY for the file system

-O FEATURE create file system with the FEATURE(s) specified

-r FS_REVISION set the file system revision

-R RAID_OPTS set RAID-related options for the file system

-q be quiet

-v be verbose

-S write super block and descriptors only


Option Explanation

401

M0

mkini t rd


Location: /sbin

Description: script to create initrd



S Y N T A X

mkinitrd [--version] [-v] [-f] [--ifneeded] [--preload <module>][--omit-scsi-modules] [--omit-raid-modules] [--with=<module>][--image-version] [--fstab=<fstab>] [--nocompress] <initrd-image><kernel-version> (ex: mkinitrd /boot/initrd-2.2.5-15.img 2.2.5-15)

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--version prints the version of mkinitrd that is being used and then exits

-v prints out verbose information while creating the image (normally the mkinitrd runs silently)

-f allows mkinitrd to overwrite an existing image file

--ifneeded only builds the image if their are modules that need to be loaded at boot time

--preload MODULE load the module MODULE in the initial ramdisk image; the module gets loaded before any SCSI modules which are specified in /etc/conf.modules; this option may be used as many times as necessary

--omit-scsi-modules do not load any scsi modules, including ‘scsi_mod’ and ‘sd_mod’ modules, even if they are present

402

. . .

. .M

--omit-raid-modules do not load any RAID modules, even if /etc/fstab and /etc/raidtab expect them

--with=MODULE load the modules MODULE in the initial ramdisk image; the module gets loaded after any SCSI modules which are specified in /etc/conf.modules; this option may be used as many times as necessary

--image-version the kernel version number is appended to the initrd image path before the image is created

--fstab=FSTAB use FSTAB to automatically determine what type of file system the root device is on; normally /etc/fstab is used

--nocompress

Option Explanation

403

M0

mkkerneldoth


Location: /sbin

Description: script to make the kernel



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the mkkerneldoth command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the mkkerneldoth command.

404

. . .

. .M

mklost+found


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create a lost+found directory in the current working directory



S Y N T A X

mklost+found

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the mklost+found command.

405

M0

mknod


Location: /bin

Description: make character or block files for devices



S Y N T A X

mknod [OPTION]... NAME TYPE [MAJOR MINOR]Create the special file NAME of the given TYPE.MAJOR MINOR are forbidden for TYPE p, mandatory otherwise.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-m MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask

--mode=MODE set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask



Major and Minor Types Explanation

b create a block (buffered) special file

c create a character (unbuffered) special file

u create a character (unbuffered) special file

p create a FIFO

406

. . .

. .M

mksock


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: make a new socket



S Y N T A X

mksock -Vmksock PATH

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


407

M0

mkswap


Location: /sbin

Description: create swap space on a device



S Y N T A X

mkswap [-c] [-v0|-v1] [-pPAGESZ] /dev/name [blocks]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c check the device for bad blocks before creating the swap area

-v0 create an old-style swap area

-v1 create a new-style swap area

-p PAGE_SZ specify the page size to use

408

. . .

. .M

mktemp


Location: /bin

Description: make template



S Y N T A X

mktemp [-d] [-q] [-u] template

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d make a directory instead of a file

-q fail silently if an error occurs

-u operate in unsafe mode

409

M0

modinfo


Location: /sbin

Description: print information about a module to the standard output



S Y N T A X

modinfo <options> <module>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a display module author

--author display module author

-d display module description

--description display module description

-l display module license

--license display module license

-n display module filename

--filename display module filename

-f <str> print the <query-string>

--format <str> print the <query-string>

-p display module parameters

--parameters display module parameters



-h Display help and exit

410

. . .

. .M


Option Explanation

411

M0

modprobe (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin




S Y N T A X

See insmod.static

O P T I O N S

See insmod.static

412

. . .

. .M

module_upgrade


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: changes obsolete modules.conf mappings to new, correct ones. It is for use when a module changes names.



S Y N T A X

module_upgrade

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the module_upgrade command.

413

M0

more


Location: /bin

Description: display file contents, on a terminal, one screen at a time



S Y N T A X

more [-dflpcsu] [+linenum | +/pattern] name1 name2 ...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-num this option specifies an integer which is the screen size (in lines).

-d more will prompt the user with the message "[Press space to continue, 'q' to quit.]" and will display "[Press 'h' for instructions.]" instead of ringing the bell when an illegal key is pressed.

-l more usually treats ^L (form feed) as a special character, and will pause after any line that contains a form feed. The -l option will prevent this behavior.

-f Causes more to count logical, rather than screen lines (i.e., long lines are not folded).

-p Do not scroll. Instead, clear the whole screen and then display the text.

-c Do not scroll. Instead, paint each screen from the top, clearing the remainder of each line as it is displayed.

414

. . .

. .M

-s Squeeze multiple blank lines into one.

-u Suppress underlining.

+/ +/ option specifies a string that will be searched for before each file is displayed.

+num Start at line number num.

Option Explanation

415

M0

mount


Location: /bin

Description: mount a file structure



S Y N T A X

mount [OPTIONS]mount -t fstype something somewheremount devicemount directorymount -t type dev dirIf the mount command is issued without options, a list of mounted file systems is displayed.Details found in /etc/fstab may be omitted.Note that one does not really mount a device, one mountsa filesystem (of the given type) found on the device.One can also mount an already visible directory tree elsewhere:mount --bind olddir newdirA device can be given by name, say /dev/hda1 or /dev/cdrom,or by label.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-V print version


-l add the ext2, ext3 and XFS labels in the mount output; mount must have permission to read the disk device (e.g. be suid root) for this to work

-a mount all file systems mentioned in /etc/fstab

416

. . .

. .M

-t FSTYPE the argument following the -t is used to indicate the file system type

-O used in conjunction with -a, to limit the set of filesystems to which the -a is applied

-L LABEL mount the partition that has the specified LABEL

-U UUID mount the partition that has the specified UUID; option requires the file /proc/partitions (present since Linux 2.1.116) to exist

-n mount without writing in /etc/mtab; this is neces sary for example when /etc is on a read-only file system

-f causes everything to be done except for the actual system call; if it's not obvious, this ‘fakes’ mounting the file system; this option is useful in conjunction with the -v flag to determine what the mount command is trying to do; can also be used to add entries for devices that were mounted earlier with the -n option

-F used in conjunction with -a; fork off a new incarnation of mount for each device; this will do the mounts on different devices or different NFS servers in parallel; this has the advantage that it is faster; also NFS timeouts go in parallel; a disadvantage is that the mounts are done in undefined order; thus, you cannot use this option if you want to mount both /usr and /usr/spool

-r mount the file system read-only; a synonym is -o ro

Option Explanation

417

M0

-s tolerate sloppy mount options rather than failing; this will ignore mount options not supported by a filesystem type; not all filesystems support this option; this option exists for support of the Linux autofs-based automounter

-v be verbose

-w mount the file system read/write; this is the default; a synonym is -o rw

-o options options are specified with a -o flag followed by a comma separated string of options; some of these options are only useful when they appear in the /etc/fstab file

Option (for use with -o) Explanation

async all I/O to the file system should be done asynchronously.

atime update inode access time for each access; this is the default

auto can be mounted with the -a option

defaults use default options: rw, suid, dev, exec, auto, nouser, and async

dev interpret character or block special devices on the file system

exec permit execution of binaries

noatime do not update inode access times on this file system (e.g, for faster access on the news spool to speed up news servers)

noauto can only be mounted explicitly (i.e., the -a option will not cause the file system to be mounted)

Option Explanation

418

. . .

. .M

nodev do not interpret character or block special devices on the file system

noexec do not allow execution of any binaries on the mounted file system; this option might be useful for a server that has file systems containing binaries for architectures other than its own

nosuid do not allow set-user-identifier or set-group-identifier bits to take effect; (this seems safe, but is in fact rather unsafe if you have suidperl(1) installed)

nouser forbid an ordinary (i.e., non-root) user to mount the file system; this is the default

remount attempt to remount an already-mounted file system: this is commonly used to change the mount flags for a file system, especially to make a readonly file system writeable

ro mount the file system read-only

rw mount the file system read-write

suid allow set-user-identifier or set-group-identifier bits to take effect

sync all I/O to the file system should be done synchronously

user allow an ordinary user to mount the file system; this option implies the options noexec, nosuid, and nodev (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line user,exec,dev,suid)

Option (for use with -o) Explanation

419

M0

mv


Location: /bin

Description: move or rename files and directories



S Y N T A X

mv [OPTION]... SOURCE DESTmv [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORYmv [OPTION]... --target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE...Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-f never prompt before overwriting

--force never prompt before overwriting

-i prompt before overwrite

--interactive prompt before overwrite

--strip-trailing-slashes remove any trailing slashes from each SOURCE argument



420

. . .

. .M

--target-directory=DIRECTORY move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY

-u move only older or brand new non-directories

--update move only older or brand new non-directories














Option Explanation

421

M0

422

. . .

. .N

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

namei


Location: /usr/bin

Description: follow a pathname until a terminal point is found



S Y N T A X

namei [-mx] pathname [pathname ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-m show the mode bits of each file type in the style of ls

-x show mount point directories with a D rather than a d

423

N0

nash


Location: /sbin

Description: simple script interpreter designed to be as small as possible



S Y N T A X

nash [options]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--quiet be quiet

--force allows force really execute the script, even though nash does not appear to be running from an initrd image

424

. . .

. .N

ndsapi_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start the NDS API



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the ndsapi_start command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about ndsapi_start options.

425

N0

netrepor t


Location: /sbin

Description: utility to request notification of network interface changes



S Y N T A X

netreport [-r]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r remove the current request (if any) for the calling process

426

. . .

. .N

netstat


Location: /bin

Description: show network status



S Y N T A X

netstat [-veenNcCF] [<Af>] -r netstat {-V|--version|-h|--help}netstat [-vnNcaeol] [<Socket> ...]netstat { [-veenNac] -i | [-cnNe] -M | -s }<AF>=Use '-A <af>' or '--<af>'; default: inet

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r display routing table

--route display routing table

-i display interface table

--interfaces display interface table

-g display multicast group memberships

--groups display multicast group memberships

-s display networking statistics (like SNMP)

--statistics display networking statistics (like SNMP)

-M display masqueraded connections

--masquerade display masqueraded connections

-v be verbose

427

N0


-n don't resolve names

--numeric don't resolve names

--numeric-hosts don't resolve host names

--numeric-ports don't resolve port names

--numeric-users don't resolve user names

-N resolve hardware names

--symbolic resolve hardware names

-e display other/more information

--extend display other/more information

-p display PID/Program name for sockets

--programs display PID/Program name for sockets

-c continuous listing

--continuous continuous listing

-l display listening server sockets

--listening display listening server sockets

-a display all sockets (default: connected)

--all display all sockets (default: connected)

--listening display all sockets (default: connected)

-o display timers

--timers display timers

Option Explanation

428

. . .

. .N

-F display Forwarding Information Base (default)

--fib display Forwarding Information Base (default)

-C display routing cache instead of FIB

--cache display routing cache instead of FIB

Address Families that Support Routing Explanation

inet DARPA Internet

inet6 IPv6

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

ipx Novell IPX

ddp Appletalk DDP

x25 CCITT X.25

Option Explanation

429

N0

newgrp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change user's group identification to the group specified



S Y N T A X

newgrp USER_NAME GROUP_NAME

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the newgrp command.

430

. . .

. .N

new-kernel -pkg


Location: /sbin

Description: performs tasks associated with the installation and removal of kernel packages



S Y N T A X

new-kernel-pkg [-v] [--mkinitrd] [--rminitrd][--initrdfile=<initrd-image>] [--depmod] [--rmmoddep]<--install | --remove> <kernel-version>(ex: new-kernel-pkg --mkinitrd --depmod --install 2.4.7-2)

O P T I O N S

Options Explanation

-v

--mkinitrd

--rminitrd

--initrdfile=<initrd-image>

--depmod

--rmmoddep

--install kernel_version

--remove kernel_version

431

N0

newusers


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create or update system users from entries in the file specified



S Y N T A X

newusers [ input_file ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

pw_passwd this field will be encrypted and used as the new value of the encrypted password

pw_age this field will be ignored for shadow passwords if the user already exists

pw_gid this field may be the name of an existing group, in which case the named user will be added as a member; if a non-existent numerical group is given, a new group will be created having this number

pw_dir this field will be checked for existence as a directory and a new directory with the same name will be created if it does not already exist; the ownership of the directory will be set to be that of the user being created or updated

432

. . .

. .N

nice


Location: /bin

Description: execute a command with a lower priority



S Y N T A X

nice [OPTION] [COMMAND [ARG]...]Run COMMAND with an adjusted scheduling priority.With no COMMAND, print the current scheduling priority. ADJUST is 10by default. Range goes from -20 (highest priority) to 19 (lowest).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-ADJUST increment priority by ADJUST first

-n ADJUST same as -ADJUST

--adjustment=ADJUST same as -ADJUST



433

N0

nm


Location: /usr/bin

Description: list symbols from object files

Permissions: -rwxrwxr-x


S Y N T A X

nm [OPTION]... [FILE]...List symbols from FILEs (a.out by default).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a Display debugger-only symbols

--debug-syms Display debugger-only symbols

-A Print name of the input file before every symbol

--print-file-name Print name of the input file before every symbol

-B Same as --format=bsd

-C Decode low-level symbol names into user-level names

--demangle[={auto,gnu,lucid,arm,hp,edg,gnu-v3,java,gnat,compaq}]

Decode low-level symbol names into user-level names

--no-demangle Do not demangle low-level symbol names

--demangler=<dso:function> Set dso and demangler function

-D Display dynamic symbols instead of normal symbols

434

. . .

. .N

--dynamic Display dynamic symbols instead of normal symbols

--defined-only Display only defined symbols

-e (ignored)

-f Use the output format FORMAT. FORMAT can be `bsd', `sysv' or `posix'; default is `bsd'

--format=FORMAT Use the output format FORMAT. FORMAT can be `bsd', `sysv' or `posix'; default is `bsd'

-g Display only external symbols

--extern-only Display only external symbols



-l Use debugging information to find a filename and line number for each symbol

--line-numbers Use debugging information to find a filename and line number for each symbol

-n Sort symbols numerically by address

--numeric-sort Sort symbols numerically by address

-o Same as -A

-p Do not sort the symbols

--no-sort Do not sort the symbols

-P Same as --format=posix

--portability Same as --format=posix

Option Explanation

435

N0

-r Reverse the sense of the sort

--reverse-sort Reverse the sense of the sort

-s Include index for symbols from archive members

--print-armap Include index for symbols from archive members

--size-sort Sort symbols by size

-t Use RADIX for printing symbol values

--radix=RADIX Use RADIX for printing symbol values

--target=BFDNAME Specify the target object format as BFDNAME

-u Display only undefined symbols

--undefined-only Display only undefined symbols

-V Display this program's version number

--version Display this program's version number

-X 32_64 (ignored)

Supported Targets

elf32-i386

a.out-i386-linux

efi-app-ia32

elf32-little

elf32-big

Option Explanation

436

. . .

. .N

srec

symbolsrec

tekhex

binary

ihex

trad-core

Supported Targets

437

N0

nohup


Location: /usr/bin

Description: run a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty



S Y N T A X

/usr/bin/nohup COMMAND [ARG].../usr/bin/nohup OPTIONRun COMMAND, ignoring hangup signals.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



438

. . .

. .N

nologin


Location: /sbin

Description: associated with the login program; indicates an account is unavailable; replacement shell field for disabled accounts



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the nologin command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the nologin command.

439

N0

440

. . .

. .O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O

openvt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: start a program on a new virtual terminal



S Y N T A X

openvt [-c vtnumber] [-l] [-u] [-s] [-v] [-w] -- command_line

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c vtnumber use the given VTNUMBER and not the first available

-l make the command a login shell

-u figure out the owner of the current VT and run login as that user

-s switch to new VT when starting command

-v be verbose

-w wait for command to complete

441

O0

ospfd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: an OSPF v2 routing engine for use with zebra



S Y N T A X

ospfd [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d Runs in daemon mode

--daemon Runs in daemon mode

-f Set configuration file name

--config_file Set configuration file name

-i Set process identifier file name

--pid_file Set process identifier file name

-A Set vty's bind address

--vty_addr Set vty's bind address

-P Set vty's port number

--vty_port Set vty's port number

-v Print program version




442

. . .

. .P

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P

packer


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: database packing utility



S Y N T A X

packer dbname

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the packer command.

443

P0

pam_console_apply


Location: /sbin

Description: sets or resets permissions on devices in the same manner as pam_console



S Y N T A X

pam_console_apply [-f /etc/fstab] [-c /etc/security/console.perms] [-r]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f /etc/fstab

-c /etc/security/console.perms

-r signals pam_console_apply to reset permissions; the default is to set permissions so that the user listed in /var/run/console.lock has access to the devices, and to reset permissions if no such file exists

444

. . .

. .P

pam_ta l ly


Location: /sbin

Description: keeps track of login attempts, and optionally lock an account after a certain number of failures.



S Y N T A X

pam_tally: [--file rooted-filename] [--user username] [--reset[=n]] [--quiet]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--file rooted-filename

--user username

--reset[=n]

--quiet

445

P0

passwd


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change or create a password associated with a username

Permissions: -r-x--x--x


S Y N T A X

passwd [OPTION...] <accountName>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d delete the password for the named account (root only)

--delete delete the password for the named account (root only)

-f force operation

--force force operation

-k keep non-expired authentication tokens

--keep-tokens keep non-expired authentication tokens

-l lock the named account (root only)

--lock lock the named account (root only)

-S report password status on the named account (root only)

--status report password status on the named account (root only)

--stdin read new tokens from stdin (root only)

446

. . .

. .P

-u unlock the named account (root only)

--unlock unlock the named account (root only)




Option Explanation

447

P0

pgawk


Location: /bin

Description: a program that does pattern matching, record processing, and other forms of text manipulation; pgawk is the profiling version of gawk. It is identical in every way to gawk, except that programs run more slowly, and it automatically produces an execution profile in the file awkprof.out when done.



S Y N T A X

pgawk [POSIX or GNU style options] -f progfile [--] file ...Usage: pgawk [POSIX or GNU style options] [--] 'program' file ...

O P T I O N S

See gawk

448

. . .

. .P

pgrep


Location: /usr/bin

Description: look up, or signal, processes based on name and other attributes



S Y N T A X

pgrep [-flnvx] [-d DELIM] [-P PPIDLIST] [-g PGRPLIST] [-s SIDLIST][-u EUIDLIST] [-U UIDLIST] [-G GIDLIST] [-t TERMLIST] [PATTERN]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d delimiter Sets the string used to delimit each process ID in the output (by default a newline). (pgrep only.)

-f The pattern is normally only matched against the process name. When -f is set, the full command line is used.

-g pgrp,... Only match processes in the process group IDs listed. Process group 0 is translated into pgrep's or pkill's own process group.

-G gid,... Only match processes whose real group ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-l List the process name as well as the process ID. (pgrep only.)

-n Select only the newest (most recently started) of the matching processes.

-P ppid,... Only match processes whose parent process ID is listed.

449

P0

-s sid,... Only match processes whose process session ID is listed. Session ID 0 is translated into pgrep's or pkill's own session ID.

-t term,... Only match processes whose controlling terminal is listed. The terminal name should be specified without the "/dev/" prefix.

-u euid,... Only match processes whose effective user ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-U uid,... Only match processes whose real user ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-v Negates the matching.

-x Only match processes whose name (or command line if -f is specified) exactly match the pattern.

-signal Defines the signal to send to each matched process. Either the numeric or the symbolic signal name can be used. (pkill only.)

Option Explanation

450

. . .

. .P

pidof (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to killall5



S Y N T A X

See killall5

O P T I O N S

See killall5

451

P0

ping


Location: /bin

Description: confirm that a remote host is on line and responding



S Y N T A X

ping [-LRUbdfnqrvV] [-c count] [-i interval] [-w wait][-p pattern] [-s packetsize] [-t ttl] [-I interface address][ -T timestamp option ] [ -Q tos ] host

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c count Stop after sending (and receiving) count ECHO_RESPONSE packets.

-d Set the SO_DEBUG option on the socket being used.

-f Flood ping. Outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second, whichever is more. For every ECHO_REQUEST sent a period ``.'' is printed, while for ever ECHO_REPLY received a backspace is printed. This provides a rapid display of how many packets are being dropped. Only the super-user may use this option. This can be very hard on a network and should be used with caution.

-i wait Wait wait seconds between sending each packet. The default is to wait for one second between each packet. This option is incompatible with the -f option.

452

. . .

. .P

-l preload If preload is specified, ping sends that many packets as fast as possible before falling into its normal mode of behavior. Only the super-user may use this option.

-n Numeric output only. No attempt will be made to lookup symbolic names for host addresses.

-p pattern You may specify up to 16 ``pad'' bytes to fill out the packet you send. This is useful for diagnosing data-dependent problems in a network. For example, ``-p ff'' will cause the sent packet to be filled with all ones.

-q Quiet output. Nothing is displayed except the summary lines at startup time and when finished.

-R Record route. Includes the RECORD_ROUTE option in the ECHO_REQUEST packet and displays the route buffer on returned packets. Note that the IP header is only large enough for nine such routes. Many hosts ignore or discard this option.

-r Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host on an attached network. If the host is not on a directly-attached network, an error is returned. This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface that has no route through it (e.g., after the interface was dropped by routed(8)).

-s packetsize Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent. The default is 56, which translates into 64 ICMP data bytes when combined with the 8 bytes of ICMP header data.

Option Explanation

453

P0

-v Verbose output. ICMP packets other than ECHO_RESPONSE that are received are listed.

Option Explanation

454

. . .

. .P

ping6


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: ping for ipv6



S Y N T A X

ping6 [-lRUdfnqrvV] [-c count] [-i interval] [-w wait][-p pattern] [-s packetsize] [-t ttl] [-I interface address][-T timestamp option] [-F flow label] [-P traffic class] host

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-l PRELOAD if PRELOAD is specified, ping6 sends that many packets as fast as possible before falling into its normal mode of behavior; only the super-user may use this option

-R make the kernel believe that the target host (or the first hop if you specify hops) is reachable, by injecting upper-layer reachability confirmation hint; the option is meaningful only if the target host (or the first hop) is a neighbor

-U

-d set the SO_DEBUG option on the socket being used

455

P0

-f flood ping; outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second, whichever is more; for every ECHO_REQUEST sent a period ‘.’ is printed, while for every ECHO_REPLY received a backspace is printed; this provides a rapid display of how many packets are being dropped; only the super-user may use this option; this can be very hard on a network and should be used with caution

-n numeric output only; no attempt will be made to lookup symbolic names from addresses in the reply

-q quiet output; nothing is displayed except the summary lines at startup time and when finished

-r

-v verbose output; ICMP packets other than ECHO_RESPONSE that are received are listed

-V

-c COUND stop after sending (and receiving) COUNT ECHO_RESPONSE packets

-i INTERVAL wait INTERVAL seconds between sending each packet; the default is to wait for one second between each packet; this option is incompatible with the -f option

-w wait

-p PATTERN

Option Explanation

456

. . .

. .P

-s PACKET_SIZE specifies the number of data bytes to be sent; the default is 56, which translates into 64 ICMP data bytes when combined with the 8 bytes of ICMP header data; you may need to specify -b as well to extend socket buffer size

-t ttl

-I INTERFACE_ADDRESS source packets with the given INTERFACE_ADDRESS; this flag applies if the ping destination is a multicast address, or linklocal/site-local unicast address

-T timestamp option

-F flow label

-P POLICY POLICY specifies IPsec policy to be used for the probe

Option Explanation

457

P0

pivot_root


Location: /sbin

Description: moves the root file system of the current process to the directory put_old and makes new_root the new root file system



S Y N T A X

pivot_root new_root put_old

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the pivot_root command.

458

. . .

. .P

pki l l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: send specified signal, by default SIGTERM, to each process instead of listing them on stdout



S Y N T A X

pkill [-SIGNAL] [-fnvx] [-P PPIDLIST] [-g PGRPLIST] [-s SIDLIST][-u EUIDLIST] [-U UIDLIST] [-G GIDLIST] [-t TERMLIST] [PATTERN]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d delimiter Sets the string used to delimit each process ID in the output (by default a newline). (pgrep only.)

-f The pattern is normally only matched against the process name. When -f is set, the full command line is used.

-g pgrp,... Only match processes in the process group IDs listed. Process group 0 is translated into pgrep's or pkill's own process group.

-G gid,... Only match processes whose real group ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-l List the process name as well as the process ID. (pgrep only.)

-n Select only the newest (most recently started) of the matching processes.

459

P0

-P ppid,... Only match processes whose parent process ID is listed.

-s sid,... Only match processes whose process session ID is listed. Session ID 0 is translated into pgrep's or pkill's own session ID.

-t term,... Only match processes whose controlling terminal is listed. The terminal name should be specified without the "/dev/" prefix.

-u euid,... Only match processes whose effective user ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-U uid,... Only match processes whose real user ID is listed. Either the numerical or symbolical value may be used.

-v Negates the matching.

-x Only match processes whose name (or command line if -f is specified) exactly match the pattern.

-signal Defines the signal to send to each matched process. Either the numeric or the symbolic signal name can be used. (pkill only.)

Option Explanation

460

. . .

. .P

powerof f (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to halt



S Y N T A X

See halt

O P T I O N S

See halt

461

P0

pppd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: attempts to configure tty for PPP



S Y N T A X

pppd [ options ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

<device> Communicate over the named device

<speed> Set the baud rate to <speed>

<loc>:<rem> Set the local and/or remote interface IP addresses. Either one may be omitted.

asyncmap <n> Set the desired async map to hex <n>

auth Require authentication from peer

connect <p> Invoke shell command <p> to set up the serial line

crtscts Use hardware RTS/CTS flow control

defaultroute Add default route through interface

file <f> Take options from file <f>

modem Use modem control lines

mru <n> Set MRU value to <n> for negotiation

462

. . .

. .P

pppoe


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for configuring PPPoE



S Y N T A X

pppoe [options]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-I if_name specify interface (default eth0.)

-T timeout Specify inactivity timeout in seconds.

-D filename Log debugging information in filename.

-V Print version and exit.

-A Print access concentrator names and exit.

-S name Set desired service name.

-C name Set desired access concentrator name.

-U Use Host-Unique to allow multiple PPPoE sessions.

-s Use synchronous PPP encapsulation.

-m MSS Clamp incoming and outgoing MSS options.

-p pidfile Write process-ID to pidfile.

463

P0

-e sess:mac Skip discovery phase; use existing session.

-n Do not open discovery socket.

-k Kill a session with PADT (requires -e)

-d Perform discovery, print session info and exit.

-f disc:sess Set Ethernet frame types (hex).

-h Print usage information.

Option Explanation

464

. . .

. .P

pppoe (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/pppoe



S Y N T A X

See pppoe

O P T I O N S

See pppoe

465

P0

pppoe-re lay (symbol ic l ink)

***Broken Link***


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/pppoe-relay



S Y N T A X

See pppoe-relay

O P T I O N S

See pppoe-relay

466

. . .

. .P

pppoe-server (symbol ic l ink)

***Broken Link***


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/pppoe-server



S Y N T A X

See pppoe-server

O P T I O N S

See pppoe-server

467

P0

pppoe-sni f f (symbol ic l ink)

***Broken Link***


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to ../../sbin/pppoe-sniff



S Y N T A X

See pppoe-sniff

O P T I O N S

See pppoe-sniff

468

. . .

. .P

ppp-watch


Location: /sbin

Description: manages one PPP connection, including starting, stopping, and redialing. It makes starting and stopping the connection synchronous activities. ppp-watch is not really meant to be called directly. It should only be used from within the ifup-ppp script



S Y N T A X

ppp-watch [ifcfg-]<logical-name> [boot]

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the ppp-watch command.

469

P0

pptp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: point-to-point tunneling protocol client



S Y N T A X

pptp hostname [[--phone <phone number>] -- ][ pppd options]

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the pptp command.

470

. . .

. .P

pptp_cal lmgr


Location: /usr/bin

Description: call manager for point-to-point tunneling protocol client



S Y N T A X

pptp_callmgr ip.add.ress.here [--phone <phone number>]

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the pptp_callmgr command.

471

P0

pr intenv


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print values of environment variables



S Y N T A X

printenv [VARIABLE]...printenv OPTIONIf no environment VARIABLE specified, print them all.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



472

. . .

. .P

product_star t


Location: /bin

Description: update and list Check Point products installed on SecurePlatform



S Y N T A X

product add <cd | floppy | tftp <ip>> <product_name>product remove <product_name>product list

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the product_start command.

473

P0

ps


Location: /bin

Description: report on active processes



S Y N T A X

ps [OPTIONS}

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-A all processes

-C by command name

-N negate selection

-G by real group ID (supports names)

-a all w/ tty except session leaders

-U by real user ID (supports names)

-d all except session leaders

-g by session leader OR by group name

-e all processes

-p by process ID

-T all processes on this terminal

-s processes in the sessions given

-a all w/ tty, including other users

-t by tty

474

. . .

. .P

-g all, even group leaders!

-u by effective user ID (supports names)

-r only running processes

-processes for specified users

-x processes w/o controlling ttys

-t by tty

-o,o user-defined

-f full

--Group select by real group name or ID

--User select by real user name or ID

--pid select by process ID

--cols set screen width

-j,j job control

-s signal

--group select by effective group name or ID

--user select by effective user name or ID

--sid select by session ID

--rows set screen height

-O,O preloaded

-o user-defined format

-v virtual memory

--cumulative include some dead child process data as a sum with the parent

Option Explanation

475

P0

--format user-defined format

--deselect negate selection

-l,l long

-u user-oriented

--sort specify sorting order

--tty select by terminal

--forest ASCII art process tree


-X registers

--heading repeat heading line

--no-heading print no heading line at all

-V,V show version

-L list format codes

-f ASCII art forest

-m,m show threads

-S children in sum

-y change

-l format

-n,N set namelist file

-c true command name

-n numeric WCHAN,UID

-w,w wide output

-e show environment

-H process heirarchy

Option Explanation

476

. . .

. .P

477

P0

psfaddtable


Location: /usr/bin

Description: add a unicode character table to a PSF font



S Y N T A X

psfaddtable psffont_in sfm_file [psffont_out]Add a Unicode character table to a PSF font

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f input psffont filename

--font=f input psffont filename

-s screen-font-map filename

--sfm=f screen-font-map filename

-o output psffont filename

--outfile=f output psffont filename





478

. . .

. .P

psfget table


Location: /usr/bin

Description: extract a unicode character table from a PSF font



S Y N T A X

psfgettable psffont chartable [outfile]Extract a Unicode character table from a PSF font

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f psffont filename

--font=f psffont filename

-o output filename

--outfile=f output filename





479

P0

psfstr iptable


Location: /usr/bin

Description: strip a unicode character table from a PSF font



S Y N T A X

psfstriptable [options] psffont [outfile]Strip Unicode character table from a PSF font

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f psffont filename

--font=f psffont filename

-o output filename

--outfile=f output filename

-h display this help text and exit

--help display this help text and exit


--version display version information and exit

480

. . .

. .P

pstree


Location: /usr/bin

Description: display processes in tree format



S Y N T A X

pstree [ -a ] [ -c ] [ -h | -H pid ] [ -l ] [ -n ] [ -p ] [ -u ] [ -G | -U ] [ pid | user] pstree -V

O P T I O N S

-a show command line arguments

-c don't compact identical subtrees

-h highlight current process and its ancestors

-H pid highlight process "pid" and its ancestors

-G use VT100 line drawing characters

-l don't truncate long lines

-n sort output by PID

-p show PIDs; implies -c

-u show uid transitions

-U use UTF-8 (Unicode) line drawing characters


pid start at pid, default 1 (init)

user show only trees rooted at processes of that user

481

P0

pwck


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: remove corrupt or duplicate entries from the /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow files



S Y N T A X

pwck [ -qr ] [ passwd [ shadow ] ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-q be quiet

-r execute the command in read-only mode

482

. . .

. .P

pwconv


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: convert unshadowed entries in the /etc/passwd file to shadowed entries in the /etc/shadow file



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the pwconv command.

Options

At this time, no information about options for the pwconv command is available.

483

P0

pwd


Location: /bin

Description: print the full path name of the present working directory to the standard output



S Y N T A X

pwd [-PL]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-P print the physical path to the current working directory, with symbolic links in the path resolved; this is the default

-L print the logical path to the current working directory, as defined by the shell in the environment variable PWD

484

. . .

. .P

pwdb_chkpwd


Location: /sbin

Description: pam utility to check a user's password when it is stored in a read protected database



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the pwdb_chkpwd command.

Options

At this time, no information about options for the pwdb_chkpwd command is available.

485

P0

pwunconv


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: convert shadowed entries in the /etc/shadow file to unshadowed entries in the /etc/passwd file



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the pwunconv command.

Options

At this time, no information about options for the pwunconv command is available.

486

. . .

. .R

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R

ramsize (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to rdev



S Y N T A X

See rdev

O P T I O N S

See rdev

487

R0

rarpd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: utility for configuring reverse arp on an interface



S Y N T A X

rarpd [ -dveaA ] [ -b tftpdir ] [ interface]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d run in debug mode, with all the output to stderr; this option implies the -f option

-v enable verbose syslogging

-e

-a listen on all the Ethernets attached to the system; if ‘-a’ is omitted, an interface must be specified

-A

-b tftpdir

488

. . .

. .R

raw


Location: /usr/bin

Description: bind a Linux raw character device to a block device



S Y N T A X

raw /dev/raw/rawN <major> <minor>raw /dev/raw/rawN /dev/<blockdev>raw -q /dev/raw/rawNraw -qa

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-q query existing bindings

-a query all bound raw devices

489

R0

rdev


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: display a line in the /etc/mtab Usage, that describes the root file system



S Y N T A X

rdev [ -rv ] [ -o OFFSET ] [ IMAGE [ VALUE [ OFFSET ] ] ]Use -R 1 to mount root readonly, -R 0 for read/write.Note: video modes are: -3=Ask, -2=Extended, -1=NormalVga, 1=key1, 2=key2,...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

rdev /dev/fd0 (or rdev /linux, etc.)

displays the current ROOT device

rdev /dev/fd0 /dev/hda2 sets ROOT to /dev/hda2

rdev -R /dev/fd0 1 set the ROOTFLAGS (readonly status)

rdev -r /dev/fd0 627 set the RAMDISK size

rdev -v /dev/fd0 1 set the bootup VIDEOMODE

rdev -o N ... use the byte offset N

rootflags ... same as rdev -R

ramsize ... same as rdev -r

vidmode ... same as rdev -v

490

. . .

. .R

rdisc


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: implements client side of the ICMP router discovery protocol



S Y N T A X

rdisc [-b] [-d] [-s] [-v] [-f] [-a] [-V] [send_address] [receive_address]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a Accept all routers independently of the preference they have in their advertise messages. Normally rdisc only accepts (and enters in the kernel routing tables) the router or routers with the highest preference.

-b Opposite to -a, i.e. install only router with the best preference value. It is default behaviour.

-d Send debugging messages to syslog.

-f Run rdisc forever even if no routers are found. Normally rdisc gives up if it has not received any advertise message after after soliciting three


491

R0

readprof i le


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: a tool to read kernel profiling information



S Y N T A X

readprofile [options]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-m <mapfile> (default = "/usr/src/linux/System.map")

-p <pro-file> (default = "/proc/profile")

-M <mult> set the profiling multiplier to <mult>

-i print only info about the sampling step

-v print verbose data

-a print all symbols, even if count is 0

-r reset all the counters (root only)

-V print version and exit

492

. . .

. .R

reboot (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to halt



S Y N T A X

See halt

O P T I O N S

See halt

493

R0

reboot_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to provide confirmation prompt for reboots



S Y N T A X

reboot

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the reboot_start command.

494

. . .

. .R

recover


Location: /sbin

Description: script to recover nvi edit sessions



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the recover command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the recover command.

495

R0

rename


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change the name or location of a file



S Y N T A X

rename from to files...

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the rename command.

496

. . .

. .R

renice


Location: /usr/bin

Description: control the scheduling priority of processes as they run



S Y N T A X

renice priority [ [ -p ] pids ] [ [ -g ] pgrps ] [ [ -u ] users ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p pids resets the who interpretation to be (the default) process ID's

-g pgrps force who parameters to be interpreted as process group ID's

-u users force the who parameters to be interpreted as user names

497

R0

rereadsic


Location: /bin

Description: script to confirm SIC information



S Y N T A X

rereadsic

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rereadsic command.

498

. . .

. .R

rescuept


Location: /sbin

Description: utility to rescue the partition table



S Y N T A X

rescuept device

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rescuept command.

499

R0

res ize2fs


Location: /sbin

Description: maintenance utility for Second Edition filesystems; use to resize ext2 file systems



S Y N T A X

resize2fs [-d debug_flags] [-f] [-F] [-p] device [new-size]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d debug_flags turn on debugging features

-f force resize2fs to proceed with the resizing operation

-F flush the file system device’s buffer caches before proceeding

-p print percentage completion bars

500

. . .

. .R

res izecons


Location: /usr/bin

Description: change the kernel’s idea of the console size



S Y N T A X

resizecons COLSxROWSresizecons COLS ROWSresizecons -lines ROWS, with ROWS one of 25, 28, 30, 34, 36, 40, 44, 50, 60

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the resizecons command.

501

R0

restore_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script for restoring from backup



S Y N T A X

restore [-v] <name> [tftp <ip-address>]restore -list

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v be verbose

-list list local archives

502

. . .

. .R

rev


Location: /usr/bin

Description: reverse lines of a file



S Y N T A X

rev [file ...]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rev command.

503

R0

r ipd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: a RIP routing engine for use with zebra



S Y N T A X

ripd [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation











-r When program terminates, retain added route by ripd

--retain When program terminates, retain added route by ripd.



504

. . .

. .R



Option Explanation

505

R0

rm


Location: /bin

Description: delete one or more files



S Y N T A X

rm [OPTION]... FILE...To remove a file whose name starts with a `-', for example `-foo',use one of these commands: rm -- -foo rm ./-fooNote that if you use rm to remove a file, it is usually possible to recover the contents of that file. If you want more assurance that the contents are truly unrecoverable, consider using shred.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d unlink directory, even if non-empty (super-user only)

--directory unlink directory, even if non-empty (super-user only)

-f ignore nonexistent files, never prompt

--force ignore nonexistent files, never prompt

-i prompt before any removal

--interactive prompt before any removal

-r remove the contents of directories recursively

-R remove the contents of directories recursively

506

. . .

. .R

--recursive remove the contents of directories recursively





Option Explanation

507

R0

rmdir


Location: /bin

Description: delete one or more empty directories



S Y N T A X

rmdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--ignore-fail-on-non-empty ignore each failure that is solely because a directory is non-empty

-p remove DIRECTORY, then try to remove each directory component of that path name. E.g., `rmdir -p a/b/c' is similar to `rmdir a/b/c a/b a'.

--parents remove DIRECTORY, then try to remove each directory component of that path name. E.g., `rmdir -p a/b/c' is similar to `rmdir a/b/c a/b a'.

-v output a diagnostic for every directory processed

--verbose output a diagnostic for every directory processed



508

. . .

. .R

rmmod (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin




S Y N T A X

See insmod.static

O P T I O N S

See insmod.static

509

R0

root f lags (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: link to rdev



S Y N T A X

See rdev

O P T I O N S

See rdev

510

. . .

. .R

route


Location: /sbin

Description: manually manipulate routing tables



S Y N T A X

route [-nNvee] [-FC] [<AF>] List kernel routing tablesroute [-v] [-FC] {add|del|flush} ... Modify routing table for AF.<AF>=Use '-A <af>' or '--<af>'; default: inet

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-V display version/author and exit

--version display version/author and exit

-h detailed usage syntax

--help detailed usage syntax

--save save routing table

-v be verbose








511

R0



Address Families (which support routing) Explanation

inet DARPA Internet

inet6 IPv6

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

ipx Novell IPX

ddp Appletalk DDP

x25 CCITT X.25

Option Explanation

512

. . .

. .R

rpm


Location: /bin

Description: package manager; used to distribute and install software in some Linux distributions; Check Point recommends using SecureUpdate to update SecurePlatform installations


Owner/Group: rpm/rpm

S Y N T A X

rpm [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Query Option (with -q or --query) Explanation

-c list all configuration files

--configfiles list all configuration files

-d list all documentation files

--docfiles list all documentation files

--dump dump basic file information

-l list files in package

--list list files in package

--queryformat=QUERYFORMAT use the following query format

-s display the states of the listed files

--state display the states of the listed files

-v display a verbose file listing

--verbose display a verbose file listing

-a query/verify all packages

513

R0

--all query/verify all packages

-f query/verify package(s) owning file

--file query/verify package(s) owning file

-g query/verify package(s) in group

--group query/verify package(s) in group

-p query/verify a package file (i.e. a binary *.rpm file)

--package query/verify a package file (i.e. a binary *.rpm file)

--querytags display known query tags

--specfile query a spec file

--whatrequires query/verify the package(s) which require a dependency

--whatprovides query/verify the package(s) which provide a dependency

Verify options (with -V or --verify) Explanation

--nomd5[|=0x1] don't verify MD5 digest of files

--nofiles[|=0x10000] don't verify files in package

--nodeps[|=0x20000] don't verify package dependencies

--noscript[|=0x40000] don't execute %verifyscript (if any)




Query Option (with -q or --query) Explanation

514

. . .

. .R










Signature option Explanation

--addsign add a signature to a package

--resign sign a package (discard current signature)

-K verify package signature

--checksig verify package signature

--nogpg[&=~0x4] skip any GPG signatures

--nomd5[&=~0x2] do not verify file md5 checksums

Database option Explanation

--initdb initialize database

--rebuilddb rebuild database inverted lists from installed package headers


515

R0

Install/Upgrade/Erase Option Explanation

--allfiles[|=0x40] install all files, even configurations which might otherwise be skipped

--allmatches[|=0x2] remove all packages which match <package> (normally an error is generated if <package> specified multiple packages)

--badreloc[|=0x8] relocate files in non-relocateable package

-e erase (uninstall) package

--erase=<package>+ erase (uninstall) package

--excludedocs[|=0x20] do not install documentation

--excludepath=<path> skip files with leading component <path>

--force[|=0x74] short hand for --replacepkgs --replacefiles

-F upgrade package(s) if already installed

--freshen=<packagefile>+ upgrade package(s) if already installed

-h print hash marks as package installs (good with -v)

--hash[|=0x2] print hash marks as package installs (good with -v)

--ignorearch[|=0x2] don't verify package architecture

--ignoreos[|=0x1] don't verify package operating system

--ignoresize[|=0x180] don't check disk space before installing

--includedocs install documentation

--install=<packagefile>+ install package

516

. . .

. .R

--justdb[|=0x8] update the database, but do not modify the filesystem

--nodeps do not verify package dependencies

--noorder[|=0x8] do not reorder package installation to satisfy dependencies

--noscripts[|=0xff0000] do not execute package scriptlet(s)

--notriggers[|=0x990000] do not execute any scriptlet(s) triggered by this package

--oldpackage[|=0x40] upgrade to an old version of the package (--force on upgrades does this automatically)

--percent[|=0x1] print percentages as package installs

--prefix=<dir> relocate the package to <dir>, if relocatable

--relocate=<old>=<new> relocate files from path <old> to <new>

--repackage[|=0x400] save erased package files by repackaging

--replacefiles[|=0x30] install even if the package replaces installed files

--replacepkgs[|=0x4] reinstall if the package is already present

--test[|=0x1] don't install, but tell if it would work or not

-U, --upgrade=<packagefile>+ upgrade package(s)

Common options for all rpm modes Explanation

--version print the version of rpm being used

Install/Upgrade/Erase Option Explanation

517

R0

--quiet provide less detailed output

-v provide more detailed output

--verbose provide more detailed output

--define='<name> <body>' define macro <name> with value <body>

--eval=<expr>+ print macro expansion of <expr>+

-r use <dir> as the top level directory (default: "/")

--root=<dir> use <dir> as the top level directory (default: "/")

--macros=<file:...> read <file:...> instead of default macro file(s)

--rcfile=<file:...> read <file:...> instead of default rpmrc file(s)

--showrc display final rpmrc and macro configuration

Options implemented via popt alias/exec Explanation

--scripts list install/erase scriptlets from

package(s)

--setperms set permissions of files in a package

--setugids set user/group ownership of files in a

package

--conflicts list capabilities this package conflicts with


518

. . .

. .R

--obsoletes list other packages removed by installing this package

--provides list capabilities that this package provides

--requires list capabilities required by package(s)

--info list descriptive information from package(s)

--changelog list change logs for this package

--triggers list trigger scriptlets from package(s)

--last list package(s) by install time, most recent first

--filesbypkg list all files from each package

--redhatprovides find package name that contains a provided capability (needs rpmdb-redhat package installed)

--redhatrequires find package name that contains a required capability (needs rpmdb-redhat package installed)

--buildpolicy=<policy> set buildroot <policy> (e.g. compress man pages)

--with=<option> enable configure <option> for build

--without=<option> disable configure <option> for build

Help options Explanation

-? Show help and exit

--help Show help and exit


519

R0


Help options Explanation

520

. . .

. .R

rpm2cpio


Location: /usr/bin

Description: converts the .rpm file specified as a single argument to a cpio archive on standard out



S Y N T A X

rpm2cpio FILE_NAME

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rpm2cpio command.

521

R0

rpmdb


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to /lib/rpm/rpmd



S Y N T A X

rpmdb [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Database Options Explanation

--initdb initialize database

--rebuilddb rebuild database inverted lists from installed package headers










522

. . .

. .R





--dbpath=<dir> use <dir> as the directory for the database

Help Options Explanation





523

R0

rpmquery


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to /lib/rpm/rpmq



S Y N T A X

rpmquery [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Query options (with -q or --query) Explanation















524

. . .

. .R





















525

R0



-p query/verify a package file (i.e. a binary*.rpm file)

--package query/verify a package file (i.e. a binary*.rpm file)
















526

. . .

. .R








527

R0

rpmsign


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to /lib/rpm/rpmk



S Y N T A X

rpmsign [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Signature Options Explanation

--addsign add a signature to a package

--resign sign a package (discard current signature)

-K verify package signature

--checksig verify package signature

--nogpg[&=~0x4] skip any GPG signatures

--nomd5[&=~0x2] do not verify file md5 checksums







528

. . .

. .R












529

R0

rpmver i fy


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to /lib/rpm/rpmv



S Y N T A X

rpmverify [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S
















530

. . .

. .R





















531

R0




















532

. . .

. .R








533

R0

r tacct


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: used for route realms and policy propagation



S Y N T A X

rtacct [ LISTofREALMS ]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rtacct command.

534

. . .

. .R

r tm_star t


Location: /bin

Description: wrapper for starting the SmartView Monitor.



S Y N T A X

The rtm_start command is a wrapper to launch SmartView Monitor. It has the same syntax as the rtm command.

O P T I O N S

Options for commands for specific Check Point products are defined in the Check Point Command appendix.

535

R0

r tmon


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for generating history file for route state monitoring



S Y N T A X

rtmon file FILE [ all | LISTofOBJECTS]LISTofOBJECTS := [ link ] [ address ] [ route ]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the rtmon command.

536

. . .

. .R

r tmstar t_star t


Location: /bin

Description: wrapper for starting SmartView Monitor



S Y N T A X

Information about using SmartView Monitor commands is available in the Check Point Commands appendix.

O P T I O N S


537

R0

r tmstop_star t


Location: /bin

Description: wrapper for stopping the SmartView Monitor



S Y N T A X


O P T I O N S


538

. . .

. .R

r tmtopsvc_star t


Location: /bin

Description: wrapper for the SmartView Monitor top service



S Y N T A X


O P T I O N S


539

R0

runlevel


Location: /sbin

Description: reads the system utmp file (typically /var/run/utmp) to locate the runlevel record, and then prints the previous and current system runlevel on its standard output, separated by a single space. If there is no previous system runlevel, the letter N will be printed instead.



S Y N T A X

runlevel

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the runlevel command.

540

. . .

. .S

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S

save_i fconf ig


Location: /bin

Description: script to save interface configuration information in relevant startup files; uses ifconfig syntax and options



S Y N T A X

ifconfig [--save] [-a] [-i] [-v] [-s] <interface> [[<AF>] <address>][add <address>[/<prefixlen>]] [del <address>[/<prefixlen>]] [[-]broadcast [<address>]] [[-]pointopoint [<address>]] [netmask <address>] [dstaddr <address>] [tunnel <address>] [outfill <NN>] [keepalive <NN>] [hw <HW> <address>] [metric <NN>] [mtu <NN>] [[-]trailers] [[-]arp] [[-]allmulti] [multicast] [[-]promisc] [mem_start <NN>] [io_addr <NN>] [irq <NN>] [media <type>] [txqueuelen <NN>] [[-]dynamic] [up|down] ...The default address family is inet.

O P T I O N S

See ifconfig


loop Local Loopback

slip Serial Line IP

cslip VJ Serial Line IP

slip6 6-bit Serial Line IP

cslip6 VJ 6-bit Serial Line IP

adaptive Adaptive Serial Line IP


541

S0

ash Ash

ether Ethernet



ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

rose AMPR ROSE

tunnel IPIP Tunnel

ppp Point-to-Point Protocol

hdlc (Cisco)-HDLC

lapb LAPB

arcnet ARCnet


frad Frame Relay Access Device

sit IPv6-in-IPv4


hippi HIPPI

irda IrLAP

ec Econet

x25 generic X.25


unix UNIX Domain

inet DARPA Internet


542

. . .

. .S

inet6 IPv6

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

rose AMPR ROSE

ipx Novell IPX

ddp Appletalk DDP

ec Econet

ash Ash

x25 CCITT X.25


543

S0

save_route


Location: /bin

Description: script to save routing configuration information in relevant startup files



Syntax

route [-nNvee] [-FC] [<AF>] List kernel routing tablesroute [-v] [-FC] {add|del|flush} ... Modify routing table for AF.route [--save] Save routing tableroute {-h|--help} [<AF>] Detailed usage syntax for specified AF.route {-V|--version} Display version/author and exit.<AF>=Use '-A <af>' or '--<af>'; default: inet

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v be verbose









544

. . .

. .S


Address Families that Support Routing Explanation

inet DARPA Internet

inet6 IPv6

ax25 AMPR AX.25

netrom AMPR NET/ROM

ipx Novell IPX

ddp Appletalk DDP

x25 CCITT X.25

Option Explanation

545

S0

saveunimap


Location: /usr/bin

Description: shell wrapper for the consolechars command



S Y N T A X

saveunimap <mapfile>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the saveunimap command.

546

. . .

. .S

scp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: secure copy; remote file copy program



S Y N T A X

scp [-pqrvBC46] [-F config] [-S ssh] [-P port] [-c cipher] [-i identity][-o option] f1 f2scp [options] f1 ... fn directory

O P T I O N S

-a Turn on statistics display for each file.

-A Turn off statistics display for each file.

-cc cipher Selects the cipher to use for encrypting the data transfer. This option is directly passed to ssh.

-i identity_file Selects the file from which the identity (private key) for RSA authentication is read. This option is directly passed to ssh.

-L Use non privileged port. With this you cannot use rhosts or rsarhosts authentications, but it can be used to bypass some firewalls that don’t allow privileged source ports to pass. Same as saying "-o UsePriviledgePort=no" or -P to ssh; -L is used due to exhaustion of suitable letters.

-o ssh-options Ssh options passed to ssh.

547

S0

-p Preserves modification times, access times, and modes from the original file.

-q Turn off statistics display.

-Q urn on statistics display.

-r Recursively copy entire directories.

-v Verbose mode. Causes scp and ssh to print debugging messages about their progress. This is helpful in debugging connection, authentication, and configuration problems.

-B Selects batch mode (prevents asking for passwords or passphrases).

-C Compression enable. Passes the -C flag to ssh to enable compression.

-P port Specifies the port to connect to on the remote host. Note that this option is written with a capital P, because -p is already reserved for preserving the times and modes of the file in rcp.

-S path-to-ssh Specifies the path to ssh program.

-a Turn on statistics display for each file.

548

. . .

. .S

screendump


Location: /usr/bin

Description: dump the contents of the screen to the standard output



S Y N T A X

screendump [console]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s screen dump contents of screen screen

--screen=screen dump contents of screen screen





549

S0

scr ipt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: fork the current shell and make a typescript of a terminal session



S Y N T A X

script [-a] [-f] [-q] [file]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a Append the output to file or typescript, retaining the prior contents.

-f Flush output after each write.

-q Be quiet.

550

. . .

. .S

sdi f f


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to compare files



S Y N T A X

sdiff [OPTION]... FILE1 FILE2If a FILE is `-', read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-o FILE Operate interactively, sending output to FILE.

--output=FILE Operate interactively, sending output to FILE.

-i Consider upper- and lower-case to be the same

--ignore-case Consider upper- and lower-case to be the same.

-W Ignore all white space

--ignore-all-space Ignore all white space.

-b Ignore changes in the amount of white space

--ignore-space-change Ignore changes in the amount of white space.

-B Ignore changes whose lines are all blank.

--ignore-blank-lines Ignore changes whose lines are all blank.

551

S0

-I RE Ignore changes whose lines all match RE

--ignore-matching-lines=RE Ignore changes whose lines all match RE.

-a Treat all files as text

--text Treat all files as text.

-w NUM Output at most NUM (default 130) characters per line

--width=NUM Output at most NUM (default 130) characters per line.

-l Output only the left column of common lines

--left-column Output only the left column of common lines.

-s Do not output common lines

--suppress-common-lines Do not output common lines.

-t Expand tabs to spaces in output

--expand-tabs Expand tabs to spaces in output.

-d Try hard to find a smaller set of changes

--minimal Try hard to find a smaller set of changes.

-H Assume large files and many scattered small changes

--speed-large-files Assume large files and many scattered small changes.

-v Output version info

--version Output version info.

--help Output this help.

Option Explanation

552

. . .

. .S

SDSUt i l_star tLocation: /bin

Description: script to start the Check Point Software Distribution Server utility



S Y N T A X

SDSUtil <p | c> <user name | cert file path> <password> <management>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-command createCL <cl name>

-command assignCL <cl name> <profile name>

-command deleteCL <cl name>

-command editActions <cl name> <pkg name> <pre|post> <none | reboot | kill_sc>

-command addPkg <cl name> <pkg name>

-command sdsload <All |asd server name>

-command uploadPkg <pkg name> <All | asd server name>

-command PackageInstall <VENDOR> <PRODUCT> <VERSION> <OS> <SP>

553

S0

sed


Location: /bin

Description: text editor; used by utilities such as diff



S Y N T A X

sed [OPTION]... {script-only-if-no-other-script} [input-file]...If no -e, --expression, -f, or --file option is given, then the firstnon-option argument is taken as the sed script to interpret. Allremaining arguments are names of input files; if no input files arespecified, then the standard input is read.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n suppress automatic printing of pattern space

--quiet suppress automatic printing of pattern space

--silent suppress automatic printing of pattern space

-e script add the script to the commands to be executed

--expression=script add the script to the commands to be executed

-f script-file add the contents of script-file to the commands to be executed

--file=script-file add the contents of script-file to the commands to be executed


-V output version information and exit

554

. . .

. .S


Option Explanation

555

S0

ser ia l_console


Location: /bin

Description: script to control console boot setup



S Y N T A X

serial_console <on|off>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the serial_console command.

556

. . .

. .S

serv ice


Location: /sbin

Description: shell script used to display the status of a service, to start, stop or restart it



S Y N T A X

service < option > | --status-all | [ service_name [ command | --full-restart ] ]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the service command.

557

S0

set_dhcp


Location: /bin

Description: script to control DHCP startup parameters



S Y N T A X

dhcp <interface> <on|off>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the set_dhcp command.

558

. . .

. .S

set_domain


Location: /bin

Description: script to set domain name



S Y N T A X

domainname [<domain>]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the set_domain command.

559

S0

set_host


Location: /bin

Description: script to set host name



S Y N T A X

hostnamehostname <host>hostname <host> <external_ip_address>

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the set_host command.

560

. . .

. .S

set fdprm


Location: /usr/bin

Description: load disk parameters; used when auto configuring floppy devices



S Y N T A X

setfdprm [ -p ] dev namesetfdprm [ -p ] dev size sect heads tracks stretch gap rate spec1 fmt_gapsetfdprm [ -c | -y | -n ] dev

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-p device name Permanently loads a new parameter set for the specified auto-configuring floppy device for the configuration with name in /etc/fdprm. Alternatively, the parameters can be given directly from the command line.

-c device Clears the parameter set of the specified auto-con figuring floppy device.

-y device Enables format detection messages for the specified auto-configuring floppy device.

-n device Disables format detection messages for the specified auto-configuring floppy device.

561

S0

set font


Location: /usr/bin

Description: load EGA/VGA console screen font



S Y N T A X

setfont [<fontfile>] [-m <mapfile>] [-u <unimapfile>][-o <oldfontfile>] [-om <oldmapfile>] [-ou <oldunimapfile>][-h] [-v] [-V] [-<N>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h H Override font height.

-m file Load console map or Unicode console map from file.

-o file Save previous font in file.

-O file Save previous font and Unicode map in file.

-om file Store console map in file.

-ou file Save previous Unicode map in file.

-u file Load Unicode table describing the font from file.

-v Be verbose.


562

. . .

. .S

setkeycodes


Location: /usr/bin

Description: reads its arguments two at a time, each pair of arguments consisting of a scancode (given in hexadecimal) and a keycode (given in decimal). For each such pair, it tells the kernel keyboard driver to map the specified scancode to the specified keycode



S Y N T A X

setkeycodes [options] scancode keycode ...(where scancode is either xx or e0xx, given in hexadecimal, and keycode is given in decimal)

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





-v Be verbose

--verbose Be verbose

563

S0

set leds


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to influence virtual terminal flag settings



S Y N T A X

setleds [-v] [-L] [-D] [-F] [[+|-][ num | caps | scroll ]]Thus,setleds +caps -num will set CapsLock, clear NumLock and leave ScrollLock unchanged. The settings before and after the change (if any) are reported when the -v option is given or when no change is requested.Normally, setleds influences the vt flag settings (and these are usually reflected in the leds). With -L, setleds only sets the leds, and leaves the flags alone. With -D, setleds sets both the flags and the default flags, so that a subsequent reset will not change the flags.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-F This is the default. Only change the VT flags (and their setting may be reflected by the keyboard leds).

-D Change both the VT flags and their default settings (so that a subsequent reset will not undo the change). This might be useful for people who always want to have numlock set.

-L Do not touch the VT flags, but only change the leds. From this moment on, the leds will no longer reflect the VT flags (but display whatever is put into them). The command setleds -L (without further arguments) will restore the situation in which the leds reflect the VT flags.

564

. . .

. .S

-num +num Clear or set NumLock. (At present, the NumLock setting influences the interpretation of keypad keys. Pressing the NumLock key complements the NumLock setting.)

-caps +caps Clear or set CapsLock. (At present, the CapsLock setting complements the Shift key when applied to letters. Pressing the CapsLock key complements the CapsLock setting.)

-scroll +scroll Clear or set ScrollLock. (At present, pressing the ScrollLock key (or ^S/^Q) stops/starts console out put.)

Option Explanation

565

S0

setmetamode


Location: /usr/bin

Description: define keyboard meta-key handling



S Y N T A X

setmetamode [ meta|bit|metabit | esc|prefix|escprefix ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

esc prefix escprefix The Meta key sends an Escape prefix.

meta bit metabit The Meta key sets the high order bit of the character.

566

. . .

. .S

setpci


Location: /sbin

Description: utility for querying and configuring PCI devices



S Y N T A X

setpci [<options>] (<device>+ <reg>[=<values>]*)*

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f Don't complain if there's nothing to do

-v Be verbose

-D List changes, don't commit them

-P <dir> Use specified directory instead of /proc/bus/pci

-H <mode> Use direct hardware access (<mode> = 1 or 2)

-F <file> Read configuration data from given file

-G Enable PCI access debugging

-s [[<bus>]:][<slot>][.[<func>]] select devices in specified bus, slot and function; each component of the device address can be omitted or set as ‘*’ meaning ‘any value’; all numbers are hexadecimal; e.g., ‘0:’ means all devices on bus 0, ‘0’ means all functions of device 0 on any bus, ‘0.3’ selects third function of device 0 on all busses and ".4" selects only fourth function of each device

567

S0

-d [<vendor>]:[<device>] delect devices with specified vendor and device ID; both ID's are given in hexadecimal and may be omitted or given as ‘*’ meaning ‘any value’

Option Explanation

568

. . .

. .S

setsid


Location: /usr/bin

Description: execute the named command and optional command arguments in a new session



S Y N T A X

setsid program [arg ...]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the setsid command.

569

S0

setsysfont


Location: /sbin

Description: script to set the system font



S Y N T A X

At this time, there is no information available about the syntax for the setsysfont command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, there is no information available about options for the setsysfont command.

570

. . .

. .S

set term


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to set terminal parameters



S Y N T A X

setterm: Argument error, usage

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-term terminal_name can be used to override the TERM environment variable

-reset displays the terminal reset string, which typically resets the terminal to its power on state

-initialize displays the terminal initialization string, which typically sets the terminal's rendering options, and other attributes to the default values

-cursor [on|off] turns the terminal’s cursor on or off

-repeat [on|off] turns keyboard repeat on or off; virtual consoles only

-appcursorkeys [on|off] sets Cursor Key Application Mode on or off; when on, ESC O A, ESC O B, etc. will be sent for the cursor keys instead of ESC [ A, ESC [ B, etc.

-linewrap [on|off] turns automatic line wrapping on or off; virtual consoles only

-default sets the terminal's rendering options to the default values

571

S0

-foreground black|blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white|default

sets the forground text color

-background black|blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white|default

sets the background text color

-ulcolor black|grey|blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white

sets the color for underlined characters

-ulcolor bright blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white

sets the color for underlined bright characters

-hbcolor black|grey|blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white

sets the color for half-bright characters

-hbcolor bright blue|green|cyan|red|magenta|yellow|white

sets the color for half-bright bright characters

-inversescreen [on|off] inverts the screen colors; foreground and background are swapped, as are underline and half-brightness

-bold [on|off] turns bold (extra bright mode) on or off

-half-bright [on|off] turns dim (half brightness mode) on or off

-blink [on|off] turns blink mode on or off

-reverse [on|off] turns reverse video mode on or off

-underline [on|off] turns underline mode on or off

-store stores the terminal's current rendering options as the default values

Option Explanation

572

. . .

. .S

-clear [all|rest] clears the screen and homes the cursor if issued with the all argument; clears from the current cursor position to the end of the screen if used with the rest argument

-tabs [ tab1 tab2 tab3 ... ] ] (tabn = 1-160)

set tab stops at the given horizontal cursor positions

-clrtabs [ tab1 tab2 tab3 ... ] ] (tabn = 1-160)

clear tab stops from the given horizontal cursor positions

-regtabs [1-160] clears all tab stops, then sets a regular tab stop pattern, with one tab every specified number of positions; without an argument, defaults to 8

-blank [0-60] sets the interval of inactivity, in minutes, after which the screen will be automatically blanked (using APM if available); without an argument, defaults to 0 (disable console blanking); virtual consoles only

-dump [1-NR_CONSOLES] writes a snapshot of the given virtual console (with attributes) to the file specified in the -file option, overwriting its contents; the default is screen.dump; without an argument, dumps the current virtual console; overrides -append

-append [1-NR_CONSOLES] like -dump, but appends to the snapshot file instead of overwriting it; only works if no -dump options are given

-file dumpfilename sets the snapshot file name for any -dump or -append options on the same command line; if this option is not present, the default is screen.dump in the current directory

Option Explanation

573

S0

-msg [on|off] enables or disables the sending of kernel printk() messages to the console

-msglevel [0-8] sets the console logging level for kernel printk() messages; all messages strictly more important than this will be printed, so a logging level of 0 has the same effect as -msg on and a logging level of 8 will print all kernel messages; klogd may be a more convenient interface to the logging of kernel messages

-powersave [on|vsync|hsync|powerdown|off]

puts the monitor into VESA vsync suspend mode if use with the on or vsync arguments; puts the monitor into VESA hsync suspend mode if used with the hsync argument; turns off monitor VESA powersaving features if used with the off argument; puts the monitor into VESA powerdown mode if used with the powerdown argument

-powerdown [0-60] sets the VESA powerdown interval in minutes; without an argument, defaults to 0 (disable powerdown); if the console is blanked or the monitor is in suspend mode, then the monitor will go into vsync suspend mode or powerdown mode respectively after this period of time has elapsed

-blength [0-2000] bets the bell duration in milliseconds; without an argument, defaults to 0

-bfreq freqnumber sets the bell frequency in Hz; without an argument, defaults to 0

Option Explanation

574

. . .

. .S

setvesablank


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to set VESA blanking on a terminal



S Y N T A X

setvesablank ON|on|off

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b on|off turn blanking on or off

--blanking=on|off turn blanking on or off





575

S0

sg (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /usr/bin

Description: link to newgrp



S Y N T A X

See newgrp

O P T I O N S

See newgrp

576

. . .

. .S

sh (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to bash



S Y N T A X

See bash

O P T I O N S

See bash

577

S0

showcfont


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to display a screen-font's contents



S Y N T A X

showcfont

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation





-l List full character names for each glyph

--charnames List full character names for each glyph

578

. . .

. .S

showkey


Location: /usr/bin

Description: examine the scan codes and key codes sent by the keyboard



S Y N T A X

showkey [options...] <command>

O P T I O N S

Command Explanation

-s display only the raw scan-codes

--scancodes display only the raw scan-codes.

-k display only the interpreted keycodes (default)

--keycodes display only the interpreted keycodes (default).

-m display only keymap-translated chars

--keymap display only keymap-translated chars.

-u display unicode-translated chars

--unicode display unicode-translated chars.





579

S0

Option Explanation

-t N set the timeout to N seconds

--timeout=N set the timeout to N seconds.

580

. . .

. .S

shutdown


Location: /sbin

Description: terminate all processes



S Y N T A X

shutdown

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the shutdown command.

581

S0

shutdown_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to launch the shutdown wrapper



S Y N T A X

shutdown

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the shutdown_start command.

582

. . .

. .S

sim_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to launch the sim program



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the sim_start command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the sim_start command.

583

S0

ski l l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: send options to processes



S Y N T A X

skill [signal to send] [options] process selection criteriaExample: skill -KILL -v pts/*The default signal is TERM. Use -l or -L to list available signals.Particularly useful signals include HUP, INT, KILL, STOP, CONT, and 0.Alternate signals may be specified in three ways: -SIGKILL -KILL -9

O P T I O N S

General Options Explanation

-f fast mode ;This is not currently useful.

-i interactive use ;You will be asked to approve each action.

-v verbose output ;Display information about selected processes.

-w warnings enabled ;This is not currently useful.

-n no action ;This only displays the process ID.

Selection Criteria

terminal

user

584

. . .

. .S

pid

command

Options to Ensure Correct Interpretation Explanation

-t The next argument is a terminal (tty or pty).

-u The next argument is a username.

-p The next argument is a process ID number.

-c The next argument is a command name.

Selection Criteria

585

S0

slat tach


Location: /sbin

Description: attach serial lines as network interfaces



S Y N T A X

slattach [-ehlLmnqv] [-k keepalive] [-o outfill] [-c cmd] [-s speed] [-p protocol] tty | - slattach -V | --version

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c command Execute command when the line is hung up. This can be used to run scripts or re-establish connections when a link goes down.

-d Enable debugging output. Useful when determining why a given setup doesn't work.

-h Exit when the carrier is lost. This works on both /dev/tty and /dev/cua devices by directly monitoring the carrier status every 15 seconds. [-v] Enable verbose output. Useful in shell scripts.

-q Operate in quiet mode - no messages at all.

-l Create an UUCP-style lockfile for the device in /var/lock.

-n Equivalent to the "mesg n" command.

-m Do not initialize the line into 8 bits raw mode.

586

. . .

. .S

-e Exit right after initializing device, instead of waiting for the line to hangup.

-L Enable 3 wire operation. The terminal is moved into CLOCAL mode, carrier watching is disabled.

-p proto Set a specific kind of protocol to use on the line. The default is set to cslip , i.e. compressed SLIP. Other possible values are slip (normal SLIP), adaptive (adaptive CSLIP/SLIP), ppp (Point-to-Point Protocol) and kiss (a protocol used for communicating with AX.25 packet radio terminal node controllers). The special argument tty can be used to put the device back into normal serial operation. Using 'ppp' mode is not normally useful as ppp requires an additional ppp daemon pppd to be active on the line. For kiss connections the axattach program should be used.

-s speed Set a specific line speed, other than the default.

Option Explanation

587

S0

sleep


Location: /bin

Description: wait a specified amount of time before executing another command



S Y N T A X

sleep NUMBER[SUFFIX]...sleep OPTIONPause for NUMBER seconds. SUFFIX may be `s' for seconds (the default),`m' for minutes, `h' for hours or `d' for days. Unlike most implementations that require NUMBER be an integer, here NUMBER may be an arbitrary floating point number.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



588

. . .

. .S

sln


Location: /sbin

Description: symbolically links dest to source



S Y N T A X

sln src dest|file

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options available for the sln command.

589

S0

snice


Location: /usr/bin

Description: send options to processes



S Y N T A X

snice [new priority] [options] process selection criteriaExample: snice netscape crack +7The default priority is +4. (snice +4 ...)Priority numbers range from +20 (slowest) to -20 (fastest).Negative priority numbers are restricted to administrative users.

O P T I O N S

General Option Explanation

-f fast mode; This is not currently useful.

-i interactive use; You will be asked to approve each action.

-v verbose output; Display information about selected processes.

-w warnings enabled; This is not currently useful.

-n no action; This only displays the process ID.

Selection Criteria

terminal

user

590

. . .

. .S

pid

command

Option to Ensure Correct Interpretation Explanation

-t The next argument is a terminal (tty or pty).

-u The next argument is a username.

-p The next argument is a process ID number.

-c The next argument is a command name.

Selection Criteria

591

S0

sort


Location: /bin

Description: sort the lines of the named files



S Y N T A X

sort [OPTION]... [FILE]...Write sorted concatenation of all FILE(s) to standard output.POS is F[.C][OPTS], where F is the field number and C the character position in the field, both counted from one with -k, from zero with the obsolescent form. OPTS is made up of one or more single-letter ordering options, which override global ordering options for that key. If no key is given, use the entire line as the key. SIZE may be followed by the following multiplicative suffixes: % 1% of memory, b 1, k 1024 (default), and so on for M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y. With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input. *** WARNING ***The locale specified by the environment affects sort order.Set LC_ALL=C to get the traditional sort order that uses native byte values.

O P T I O N S

Ordering Option Explanation

-b ignore leading blanks

--ignore-leading-blanks ignore leading blanks

-d consider only blanks and alphanumeric characters

--dictionary-order consider only blanks and alphanumeric characters

-f fold lower case to upper case characters

592

. . .

. .S

--ignore-case fold lower case to upper case characters

-g compare according to general numerical value

--general-numeric-sort compare according to general numerical value

-i consider only printable characters

--ignore-nonprinting consider only printable characters

-M compare (unknown) < `JAN' < ... < `DEC'

--month-sort compare (unknown) < `JAN' < ... < `DEC'

-n compare according to string numerical value

--numeric-sort compare according to string numerical value

-r reverse the result of comparisons

--reverse reverse the result of comparisons

Other Options Explanation

-c check whether input is sorted; do not sort

--check check whether input is sorted; do not sort

-k POS1[,POS2] start a key at POS1, end it at POS 2 (origin 1)

--key=POS1[,POS2] start a key at POS1, end it at POS 2 (origin 1)

-m merge already sorted files; do not sort

Ordering Option Explanation

593

S0

--merge merge already sorted files; do not sort

-o FILE write result to FILE instead of standard output

--output=FILE write result to FILE instead of standard output

-s stabilize sort by disabling last-resort comparison

--stable stabilize sort by disabling last-resort comparison

-S SIZE use SIZE for main memory buffer

--buffer-size=SIZE use SIZE for main memory buffer

-t SEP use SEP instead of non- to whitespace transition

--field-separator=SEP use SEP instead of non- to whitespace transition

-T DIR use DIR for temporaries, not $TMPDIR or /tmp multiple options specify multiple directories

--temporary-directory=DIR use DIR for temporaries, not $TMPDIR or /tmp multiple options specify multiple directories

-u with -c: check for strict ordering otherwise: output only the first of an equal run

--unique with -c: check for strict ordering otherwise: output only the first of an equal run

-z end lines with 0 byte, not newline

--zero-terminated end lines with 0 byte, not newline


594

. . .

. .S

+POS1 [-POS2] start a key at POS1, end it before POS2 (origin 0) Warning: this option is obsolescent




595

S0

spinsta l l


Location: /bin

Description: SecurePlatform installation script



S Y N T A X

spinst -hspinst [-s] -m PM [-X] -n <name> -p <pwd> -c <IP> -f <FQDN> -t <NetMask>spinst [-s] -m M [-X] [{-H|-d<flag>}] -k <key>spinst [-s] -m P -n <name> -p <pwd> -c <IP> -f <FQDN> -t <NetMask>spinst [-s] -m S -k <key>spinst [-s] -m L -n <name> -p <pwd> -c <IP> -k <key>

Option Explanation

-s Silent

-m one of: PM: Enterprise Primary Management and Enforcement Module, M : Enforcement Module, P : Enterprise Primary Management, S : Enterprise Secondary Management, L : Enterprise Log Server

-n <name> Administrator Name

-p <pwd> Administrator Password

-k <key> Activation Key

-c <IP> IP Address in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

-f <FQDN> Host Name(FQDN) in the format XXX.XXX.XXX

-t<NetMask> NetMask ,in format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

596

. . .

. .S

-H Enable Check Point high availability

-X Enable Check Point SecureXL

-d falg is one of : set: Enable Dynamic Address IP, reset: Disable Dynamic Address IP

Option Explanation

597

S0

sshd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: set parameters for the ssh daemon



S Y N T A X

sshd [-deiqtD46] [-b bits] [-f config_file] [-g login_grace_time] [-h host_key_file] [-k key_gen_time] [-o option] [-p port] [-u len]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b bits Specifies the number of bits in the ephemeral protocol version 1 server key (default 768).

-d Debug mode. The server sends verbose debug output to the system log, and does not put itself in the background. The server also will not fork and will only process one connection. This option is only intended for debugging for the server. Multiple -d options increase the debugging level. Maximum is 3.

-e When this option is specified, sshd will send the output to the standard error instead of the system log.

-f configuration_file Specifies the name of the configuration file. The default is /etc/ssh/sshd_config. sshd refuses to start if there is no configuration file.

598

. . .

. .S

-g login_grace_time Gives the grace time for clients to authenticate themselves (default 600 seconds). If the client fails to authenticate the user within this many seconds, the server disconnects and exits. A value of zero indicates no limit.

-h host_key_file Specifies a file from which a host key is read. This option must be given if sshd is not run as root (as the normal host key files are normally not readable by anyone but root). The default is /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key for protocol version 1, and /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key and /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key for protocol version 2. It is possible to have multiple host key files for the different protocol versions and host key algorithms.

-i Specifies that sshd is being run from inetd. sshd is normally not run from inetd because it needs to generate the server key before it can respond to the client, and this may take tens of seconds. Clients would have to wait too long if the key was regenerated every time. However, with small key sizes (e.g., 512) using sshd from inetd may be feasible.

Option Explanation

599

S0

-k key_gen_time Specifies how often the ephemeral protocol version 1 server key is regenerated (default 3600 seconds, or one hour). The motivation for regenerating the key fairly often is that the key is not stored anywhere, and after about an hour, it becomes impossible to recover the key for decrypting intercepted communications even if the machine is cracked into or physically seized. A value of zero indicates that the key will never be regenerated.

-o option Can be used to give options in the format used in the configuration file. This is useful for specifying options for which there is no separate command-line flag.

-p port Specifies the port on which the server listens for connections (default 22). Multiple port options are permitted. Ports specified in the configuration file are ignored when a command-line port is specified.

-q Quiet mode. Nothing is sent to the system log. Normally the beginning, authentication, and termination of each connection is logged.

-t Test mode. Only check the validity of the configuration file and sanity of the keys. This is useful for updating sshd reliably as configuration options may change.

Option Explanation

600

. . .

. .S

-u len This option is used to specify the size of the field in the utmp structure that holds the remote host name. If the resolved host name is longer than len, the dotted decimal value will be used instead. This allows hosts with very long host names that overflow this field to still be uniquely identified. Specifying -u0 indicates that only dotted decimal addresses should be put into the utmp file. -u0 is also be used to prevent sshd from making DNS requests unless the authentication mechanism or configuration requires it. Authentication mechanisms that may require DNS include RhostsAuthentication, RhostsRSAAuthentication, HostbasedAuthentication and using a from="pattern-list" option in a key file. Configuration options that require DNS include using a USER@HOST pattern in AllowUsers or DenyUsers.

-D When this option is specified sshd will not detach and does not become a daemon. This allows easy monitoring of sshd.

-4 Forces sshd to use IPv4 addresses only.

-6 Forces sshd to use IPv6 addresses only.

Option Explanation

601

S0

ssh-keygen


Location: /usr/bin

Description: key generator for openssh



S Y N T A X

ssh-keygen [options]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b bits Number of bits in the key to create.

-c Change comment in private and public key files.

-e Convert OpenSSH to IETF SECSH key file.

-f filename Filename of the key file.

-i Convert IETF SECSH to OpenSSH key file.

-l Show fingerprint of key file.

-p Change passphrase of private key file.

-q Quiet.

-y Read private key file and print public key.

-t type Specify type of key to create.

-B Show bubblebabble digest of key file.

-C comment Provide new comment.

602

. . .

. .S

-N phrase Provide new passphrase.

-P phrase Provide old passphrase.

Option Explanation

603

S0

st ty


Location: /bin

Description: set terminal I/O options for the current standard input device



S Y N T A X

stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [SETTING]...stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-a|--all]stty [-F DEVICE] [--file=DEVICE] [-g|--save]Print or change terminal characteristics.Optional - before SETTING indicates negation. An * marks non-POSIXsettings. The underlying system defines which settings are available.Handle the tty line connected to standard input. Without arguments,prints baud rate, line discipline, and deviations from stty sane. Insettings, CHAR is taken literally, or coded as in ^c, 0x37, 0177 or127; special values ^- or undef used to disable special characters.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a print all current settings in human-readable form

--all print all current settings in human-readable form

-g print all current settings in a stty-readable form

--save print all current settings in a stty-readable form

-F DEVICE open and use the specified DEVICE instead of stdin

--file=DEVICE open and use the specified DEVICE instead of stdin

604

. . .

. .S



Special Character Explanation

* dsusp CHAR CHAR will send a terminal stop signal once input flushed

eof CHAR CHAR will send an end of file (terminate the input)

eol CHAR CHAR will end the line

* eol2 CHAR alternate CHAR for ending the line

erase CHAR CHAR will erase the last character typed

intr CHAR CHAR will send an interrupt signal

kill CHAR CHAR will erase the current line

* lnext CHAR CHAR will enter the next character quoted

quit CHAR CHAR will send a quit signal

* rprnt CHAR CHAR will redraw the current line

start CHAR CHAR will restart the output after stopping it

stop CHAR CHAR will stop the output

susp CHAR CHAR will send a terminal stop signal

* swtch CHAR CHAR will switch to a different shell layer

* werase CHAR CHAR will erase the last word typed

Option Explanation

605

S0

Special Setting Explanation

N set the input and output speeds to N bauds

* cols N tell the kernel that the terminal has N columns

* columns N same as cols N

ispeed N set the input speed to N

* line N use line discipline N

min N with -icanon, set N characters minimum for a completed read

ospeed N set the output speed to N

* rows N tell the kernel that the terminal has N rows

* size print the number of rows and columns according to the kernel

speed print the terminal speed

time N with -icanon, set read timeout of N tenths of a second

Control Setting Explanation

[-]clocal disable modem control signals

[-]cread allow input to be received

* [-]crtscts enable RTS/CTS handshaking

csN set character size to N bits, N in [5..8]

[-]cstopb use two stop bits per character (one with `-')

[-]hup send a hangup signal when the last process closes the tty

606

. . .

. .S

[-]hupcl same as [-]hup

[-]parenb generate parity bit in output and expect parity bit in input

[-]parodd set odd parity (even with `-')

Input Setting Explanation

[-]brkint breaks cause an interrupt signal

[-]icrnl translate carriage return to newline

[-]ignbrk ignore break characters

[-]igncr ignore carriage return

[-]ignpar ignore characters with parity errors

* [-]imaxbel beep and do not flush a full input buffer on a character

[-]inlcr translate newline to carriage return

[-]inpck enable input parity checking

[-]istrip clear high (8th) bit of input characters

* [-]iuclc translate uppercase characters to lowercase

* [-]ixany let any character restart output, not only start character

[-]ixoff enable sending of start/stop characters

[-]ixon enable XON/XOFF flow control

[-]parmrk mark parity errors (with a 255-0-character sequence)

[-]tandem same as [-]ixoff

Control Setting Explanation

607

S0

Output Setting Explanation

* bsN backspace delay style, N in [0..1]

* crN carriage return delay style, N in [0..3]

* ffN form feed delay style, N in [0..1]

* nlN newline delay style, N in [0..1]

* [-]ocrnl translate carriage return to newline

* [-]ofdel use delete characters for fill instead of null characters

* [-]ofill use fill (padding) characters instead of timing for delays

* [-]olcuc translate lowercase characters to uppercase

* [-]onlcr translate newline to carriage return-newline

* [-]onlret newline performs a carriage return

* [-]onocr do not print carriage returns in the first column

[-]opost postprocess output

* tabN horizontal tab delay style, N in [0..3]

* tabs same as tab0

* -tabs same as tab3

* vtN vertical tab delay style, N in [0..1]

Local Setting Explanation

[-]crterase echo erase characters as backspace-space-backspace

608

. . .

. .S

* crtkill kill all line by obeying the echoprt and echoe settings

* -crtkill kill all line by obeying the echoctl and echok settings

* [-]ctlecho echo control characters in hat notation (`^c')

[-]echo echo input characters

* [-]echoctl same as [-]ctlecho

[-]echoe same as [-]crterase

[-]echok echo a newline after a kill character

* [-]echoke same as [-]crtkill

[-]echonl echo newline even if not echoing other characters

* [-]echoprt echo erased characters backward, between `\' and '/'

[-]icanon enable erase, kill, werase, and rprnt special characters

[-]iexten enable non-POSIX special characters

[-]isig enable interrupt, quit, and suspend special characters

[-]noflsh disable flushing after interrupt and quit special characters

* [-]prterase same as [-]echoprt

* [-]tostop stop background jobs that try to write to the terminal

* [-]xcase with icanon, escape with `\' for uppercase characters

Local Setting Explanation

609

S0

Combination Setting Explanation

* [-]LCASE same as [-]lcase

cbreak same as -icanon

-cbreak same as icanon

cooked same as brkint ignpar istrip icrnl ixon opost isig icanon, eof and eol characters to their default values

-cooked same as raw

crt same as echoe echoctl echoke

dec same as echoe echoctl echoke -ixany intr ^c erase 0177 kill û

* [-]decctlq same as [-]ixany

ek erase and kill characters to their default values

evenp same as parenb -parodd cs7

-evenp same as -parenb cs8

*[-]lcase same as xcase iuclc olcuc

litout same as -parenb -istrip -opost cs8

-litout same as parenb istrip opost cs7

nl same as -icrnl -onlcr

-nl same as icrnl -inlcr -igncr onlcr -ocrnl -onlret

oddp same as parenb parodd cs7

-oddp same as -parenb cs8

[-]parity same as [-]evenp

pass8 same as -parenb -istrip cs8

-pass8 same as parenb istrip cs7

610

. . .

. .S

raw same as -ignbrk -brkint -ignpar -parmrk -inpck -istrip -inlcr -igncr -icrnl -ixon -ixoff -iuclc -ixany -imaxbel -opost -isig -icanon -xcase min 1 time 0

-raw same as cooked

sane same as cread -ignbrk brkint -inlcr -igncr icrnl -ixoff -iuclc -ixany imaxbel opost -olcuc -ocrnl onlcr -onocr -onlret -ofill -ofdel nl0 cr0 tab0 bs0 vt0 ff0 isig icanon iexten echo echoe echok -echonl -noflsh -xcase -tostop -echoprt echoctl echoke, all special characters to their default values.

Combination Setting Explanation

611

S0

su


Location: /bin

Description: create a shell with the user ID and options specified



S Y N T A X

su [OPTION]... [-] [USER [ARG]...]Change the effective user id and group id to that of USER.A mere - implies -l. If USER not given, assume root.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

- make the shell a login shell

-l make the shell a login shell

--login make the shell a login shell

-c COMMAND pass a single COMMAND to the shell with -c

--commmand=COMMAND pass a single COMMAND to the shell with -c

-f pass -f to the shell (for csh or tcsh)

--fast pass -f to the shell (for csh or tcsh)

-m do not reset environment variables

--preserve-environment do not reset environment variables

-p same as -m

-s SHELL run SHELL if /etc/shells allows it

--shell=SHELL run SHELL if /etc/shells allows it


612

. . .

. .S


Option Explanation

613

S0

su_start


Location: /bin

Description: script to launch the cpinfo wrapper; launches an su shell



S Y N T A X

su_start

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the su_start script.

614

. . .

. .S

sulogin


Location: /sbin

Description: invoke single user shell; used in SecurePlatform Maintenance Mode



S Y N T A X

sulogin [-t timeout] [tty device]sulogin [-t timeout] [tty device]sulogin [-t timeout] [tty device]sulogin [-t timeout] [tty device]/etc/shadow: root password garbledGive root password for maintenance(or type Control-D for normal startup):

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-t timeout set timeout value for shell

615

S0

sum


Location: /usr/bin

Description: calculate and print a checksum and the number of blocks for a file



S Y N T A X

sum [OPTION]... [FILE]...With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r defeat -s, use BSD sum algorithm, use 1K blocks

-s use System V sum algorithm, use 512 bytes blocks

--sysv use System V sum algorithm, use 512 bytes blocks



616

. . .

. .S

swapoff (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to swapon



S Y N T A X

See swapon

O P T I O N S

See swapon

617

S0

swapon


Location: /sbin

Description: make the listed devices available for swapping and paging



S Y N T A X

swapon [-hV]swapon -a [-e] [-v]swapon [-v] [-p priority] special ...swapon [-s]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-a all devices marked as ’sw’ swap devices in /etc/fstab are made available; devices that are already running as swap are silently skipped.

-e when -a is used with swapon, -e makes swapon silently skip devices that do not exist

-v be verbose

-p PRIORITY specify PRIORITY for swapon

-s display swap usage summary by device

618

. . .

. .S

sync


Location: /bin

Description: write file system buffers to disk; force changed blocks to disk, update the super block.



S Y N T A X

sync [OPTION]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



619

S0

sys_command


Location: /bin

Description: script to log reboots and stopping of critical services



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the sys_command command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the sys_command command.

620

. . .

. .S

sysconf ig_star t


Location: /bin

Description: launch the sysconfig utility; sysconfig is a text based menu for OS and product configuration



S Y N T A X

sysconfig

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the sysconfig_start command.

621

S0

sysct l


Location: /sbin

Description: used to set variables in the /etc/sysctl.conf file



S Y N T A X

sysctl [-n] variable ... sysctl [-n] -w variable=value ... sysctl [-n] -a sysctl [-n] -p <file> (default /etc/sysctl.conf) sysctl [-n] -A

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n use this option to disable printing of the key name when printing values

-e use this option to ignore errors about unknown keys

-w use this option when you want to change a sysctl setting

-p load in sysctl settings from the file specified or /etc/sysctl.conf if none given

-a display all values currently available

-A display all values currently available in table form

622

. . .

. .S

syslogd


Location: /sbin

Description: log system messages into a set of files described by the configuration file /etc/syslog.conf



S Y N T A X

syslogd [-a socket] [-d] [-f config file] [-h] [-l hostlist] [-m interval] [-n] [-p socket] [-r] [-s domainlist] [-v] [-x]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a socket using this argument you can specify additional sockets from that syslogd has to listen to. This is needed if you're going to let some daemon run within a chroot() environment. You can use up to 19 additional sockets. If your environment needs even more, you have to increase the symbol MAXFUNIX within the syslogd.c source file. An example for a chroot() daemon is described by the people from OpenBSD at http://www.psionic.com/papers/dns.html. on the command line will cause the log daemon to forward any remote messages it receives to forwarding hosts which have been defined.

-l hostlist specify a hostname that should be logged only with its simple hostname and not the fqdn. Multiple hosts may be specified using the colon (``:'') separator.

623

S0

-m interval The syslogd logs a mark timestamp regularly. The default interval between two -- MARK -- lines is 20 minutes. This can be changed with this option. Setting the interval to zero turns it off entirely.

-n Avoid auto-backgrounding. This is needed especially if the syslogd is started and controlled by init(8).

-p socket You can specify an alternative unix domain socket instead of /dev/log.

-r This option will enable the facility to receive message from the network using an internet domain socket with the syslog service (see services(5)). The default is to not receive any messages from the network. This option is introduced in version 1.3 of the sysklogd package. Please note that the default behavior is the opposite of how older versions behave, so you might have to turn this on.

-s domainlist Specify a domainname that should be stripped off before logging. Multiple domains may be specified using the colon (``:'') separator. Please be advised that no sub-domains may be specified but only entire domains. For example if -s north.de is specified and the host logging resolves to satu.infodrom.north.de no domain would be cut, you will have to specify two domains like: -s north.de:infodrom.north.de.

-v Print version and exit.

Option Explanation

624

. . .

. .S

-x Disable name lookups when receiving remote messages. This avoids deadlocks when the nameserver is running on the same machine that runs the syslog daemon.

Option Explanation

625

S0

sys-unconf ig


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: script to update the modification time on the file .unconfigured and halt the system



S Y N T A X

sys-unconfig

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the sys-unconfig command.

626

. . .

. .T

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T

tai l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the last ten lines of the named file



S Y N T A X

tail [OPTION]... [FILE]...Print the last 10 lines of each FILE to standard output.With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giving the file name.With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--retry keep trying to open a file even if it is inaccessible when tail starts or if it becomes inaccessible later -- useful only with -f

-c N output the last N bytes

--bytes=N output the last N bytes

-f [={name|descriptor}] output appended data as the file grows; -f, --follow, and --follow=descriptor are equivalent

--follow[={name|descriptor}]

output appended data as the file grows; -f, --follow, and --follow=descriptor are equivalent

-n N output the last N lines, instead of the last 10

--lines=N output the last N lines, instead of the last 10

627

T0

If the first character of N (the number of bytes or lines) is a `+', print beginning with the Nth item from the start of each file, otherwise, print the last N items in the file. N may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1024, m for 1048576 (1 Meg). A first OPTION of -VALUE or +VALUE is treated like -n VALUE or -n +VALUE unless VALUE has one of the [bkm] suffix multipliers, in which case it is treated like -c VALUE or -c +VALUE. Warning: a first option of +VALUE is obsolescent, and support for it will be withdrawn.

With --follow (-f), tail defaults to following the file descriptor, which means that even if a tail'ed file is renamed, tail will continue to track its end. This default behavior is not desirable when you really want to track the actual name of the file, not the file descriptor (e.g., log rotation). Use --follow=name in that case. That causes tail to track the named file by reopening it periodically to see if it has been removed and recreated by some other program.

--max-unchanged-stats=N with --follow=name, reopen a FILE which has not changed size after N (default 5) iterations to see if it has been unlinked or renamed (this is the usual case of rotated log files)

--pid=PID with -f, terminate after process ID, PID dies

-q never output headers giving file names

--quiet never output headers giving file names

--silent never output headers giving file names

-s S with -f, each iteration lasts approximately S (default 1) seconds

--sleep-interval=S with -f, each iteration lasts approximately S (default 1) seconds

-v always output headers giving file names

--verbose always output headers giving file names



Option Explanation

628

. . .

. .T

tar


Location: /bin

Description: copy files to or restore files from an archive medium



S Y N T A X

tar [OPTION]... [FILE]...

E X A M P L E S :

tar -cf archive.tar foo bar # Create archive.tar from files foo and bar.tar -tvf archive.tar # List all files in archive.tar verbosely.tar -xf archive.tar # Extract all files from archive.tar.

If a long option shows an argument as mandatory, then it is mandatory for the equivalent short option also. Similarly for optional arguments.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

Main operation mode

-t list the contents of an archive

--list list the contents of an archive

--extract extract files from an archive

-x extract files from an archive

--get extract files from an archive

-c create a new archive

--create create a new archive

-d find differences between archive and file system

629

T0

--diff find differences between archive and file system

--compare find differences between archive and file system

-r append files to the end of an archive

--append append files to the end of an archive

-u only append files newer than copy in archive

--update only append files newer than copy in archive

-A append tar files to an archive

--catenate append tar files to an archive

--concatenate append tar files to an archive

--delete delete from the archive (not on mag tapes!)

Option Explanation

Operation modifiers

--verify attempt to verify the archive after writing it

--remove-files remove files after adding them to the archive

-k don't replace existing files when extracting

--keep-old-files don't replace existing files when extracting

--overwrite overwrite existing files when extracting

-U remove each file prior to extracting over it

--unlink-first remove each file prior to extracting over it

-U empty hierarchies prior to extracting directory

Option Explanation

630

. . .

. .T

--recursive-unlink empty hierarchies prior to extracting directory

-S handle sparse files efficiently

--sparse handle sparse files efficiently

-O extract files to standard output

--to-stdout extract files to standard output

-G handle old GNU-format incremental backup

--incremental handle old GNU-format incremental backup

-g FILE handle new GNU-format incremental backup

--listed-incremental=FILE handle new GNU-format incremental backup

-q do not exit with nonzero on unreadable files

--ignore-failed-read do not exit with nonzero on unreadable files

Option Explanation

Handling of file attributes

--owner=NAME force NAME as owner for added files

--group=NAME force NAME as group for added files

--mode=CHANGES force (symbolic) mode CHANGES for added files

--atime-preserve don't change access times on dumped files

-m don't extract file modified time

--modification-time don't extract file modified time

--same-owner try extracting files with the same ownership

Option Explanation

631

T0

--no-same-owner extract files as yourself

--numeric-owner always use numbers for user/group names

-p extract permissions information

--same-permissions extract permissions information

--no-same-permissions do not extract permissions information

--preserve-permissions same as -p

-s sort names to extract to match archive

--same-order sort names to extract to match archive

--preserve-order same as -s

--preserve same as both -p and -s

Option Explanation

Device selection and switching

-f ARCHIVE use archive file or device ARCHIVE

--file=ARCHIVE use archive file or device ARCHIVE

--force-local archive file is local even if has a colon

--rsh-command=COMMAND use remote COMMAND instead of rsh

-[0-7][lmh] specify drive and density

-M create/list/extract multi-volume archive

--multi-volume create/list/extract multi-volume archive

-L change tape after writing NUM x 1024 bytes

--tape-length=NUM change tape after writing NUM x 1024 bytes

-F run script at end of each tape (implies -M)

Option Explanation

632

. . .

. .T

--info-script=FILE run script at end of each tape (implies -M)

--new-volume-script=FILE same as -F FILE

--volno-file=FILE use/update the volume number in FILE

Option Explanation

Device blocking

-b BLOCKS BLOCKS x 512 bytes per record

--blocking-factor=BLOCKS BLOCKS x 512 bytes per record

--record-size=SIZE SIZE bytes per record, multiple of 512

-i ignore zeroed blocks in archive (means EOF)

--ignore-zeros ignore zeroed blocks in archive (means EOF)

-B reblock as we read (for 4.2 BSD pipes)

--read-full-records reblock as we read (for 4.2 BSD pipes)

Option Explanation

Archive format selection

-V NAME create archive with volume name NAME

--label=NAME create archive with volume name NAME

PATTERN at list/extract time, a globbing PATTERN

--portability write a V7 format archive

-o write a V7 format archive

--old-archive write a V7 format archive

--posix write a POSIX format archive

Option Explanation

633

T0

-j filter the archive through bzip2

--bzip2 filter the archive through bzip2

--gzip filter the archive through gzip

--ungzip filter the archive through gzip

-z filter the archive through gzip

-Z filter the archive through compress

--compress filter the archive through compress

--uncompress filter the archive through compress

--use-compress-program=PROG

filter through PROG (must accept -d)

Option Explanation

Local file selection

-C DIR change to directory DIR

--directory=DIR change to directory DIR

-T NAME get names to extract or create from file NAME

--files-from=NAME get names to extract or create from file NAME

--null -T reads null-terminated names, disable -C

--exclude=PATTERN exclude files, given as a globbing PATTERN

-X FILE exclude globbing patterns listed in FILE

--exclude-from=FILE exclude globbing patterns listed in FILE

-P don't strip leading `/'s from file names

--absolute-names don't strip leading `/'s from file names

Option Explanation

634

. . .

. .T

-h dump instead the files symlinks point to

--dereference dump instead the files symlinks point to

--no-recursion avoid descending automatically in directories

-l stay in local file system when creating archive

--one-file-system stay in local file system when creating archive

-K NAME begin at file NAME in the archive

--starting-file=NAME begin at file NAME in the archive

-N DATE only store files newer than DATE

--newer=DATE only store files newer than DATE

--newer-mtime compare date and time when data changed only

--after-date=DATE same as -N

--backup[=CONTROL] backup before removal, choose version control

--suffix=SUFFIX backup before removal, override usual suffix

Option Explanation

635

T0

The backup suffix is `~', unless set with --suffix or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX. The version control may be set with --backup or VERSION_CONTROL, values are:

• t, numbered: make numbered backups

• nil, existing: numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise

• never, simple: always make simple backups

GNU tar cannot read nor produce `--posix' archives. If POSIXLY_CORRECT is set in the environment, GNU extensions are disallowed with `--posix'.

Support for POSIX is only partially implemented, don't count on it yet. ARCHIVE may be FILE, HOST:FILE or USER@HOST:FILE; and FILE may be a file or a device. *This* `tar' defaults to `-f- -b20'.

Option Explanation

Informative output

--help print this help, then exit

--version print tar program version number, then exit

-v verbosely list files processed

--verbose verbosely list files processed

--checkpoint print directory names while reading the archive

--totals print total bytes written while creating archive

-R show block number within archive with each message

--block-number show block number within archive with each message

-w ask for confirmation for every action

--interactive ask for confirmation for every action

--confirmation ask for confirmation for every action

636

. . .

. .T

tc


Location: /sbin

Description: show / manipulate traffic control settings



S Y N T A X

tc [ OPTIONS ] OBJECT { COMMAND | help }where OBJECT := { qdisc | class | filter }OPTIONS := { -s[tatistics] | -d[etails] | -r[aw] }

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the tc command.

637

T0

tcpdump


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: command line tool for monitoring network traffic



S Y N T A X

tcpdump [-adeflnNOpqRStuvxX] [-c count] [ -F file ] [ -i interface ] [ -r file ] [ -s snaplen ] [ -T type ] [ -U user ] [ -w file ] [ expression ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a Attempt to convert network and broadcast addresses to names.

-c Exit after receiving count packets.

-d Dump the compiled packet-matching code in a human readable form to standard output and stop.

-dd Dump packet-matching code as a C program fragment.

-ddd Dump packet-matching code as decimal numbers (preceded with a count).

-e Print the link-level header on each dump line.

638

. . .

. .T

-E Use algo:secret for decrypting IPsec ESP packets. Algorithms may be des-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-cbc, rc3-cbc, cast128-cbc, or none. The default is des-cbc. The ability to decrypt packets is only present if tcpdump was compiled with cryptography enabled. secret the ascii text for ESP secret key. We cannot take arbitrary binary value at this moment. The option assumes RFC2406 ESP, not RFC1827 ESP. The option is only for debugging purposes, and the use of this option with truly `secret' key is discouraged. By presenting IPsec secret key onto command line you make it visible to others, via ps(1) and other occasions match. On Linux systems with 2.2 or later kernels, an interface argument of ‘any’ can be used to capture packets from all interfaces. Note that captures on the ‘any’ device will not be done in promiscuous mode.

-l Make stdout line buffered. Useful if you want to see the data while capturing it. E.g., ‘tcpdump -l | tee dat’ or ‘tcpdump -l > dat and tail -f dat’.

-n Don't convert host addresses to names. This can be used to avoid DNS lookups.

-nn Don't convert protocol and port numbers etc. to names either.

-N Don't print domain name qualification of host names. E.g., if you give this flag then tcpdump will print ‘nic’ instead of ‘nic.ddn.mil’.

-m Load SMI MIB module definitions from file module. This option can be used several times to load several MIB modules into tcpdump.

-O Do not run the packet-matching code optimizer. This is useful only if you suspect a bug in the optimizer.

Option Explanation

639

T0

-p Don't put the interface into promiscuous mode. Note that the interface might be in promiscuous mode for some other reason; hence, `-p' cannot be used as an abbreviation for èther host {local-hwaddr} or ether broadcast'.

-q Quick (quiet?) output. Print less protocol information so output lines are shorter.

-r Read packets from file (which was created with the -w option). Standard input is used if file is ‘-’.

-R Assume ESP/AH packets to be based on old specification (RFC1825 to RFC1829). If specified, tcpdump will not print replay prevention field. Since there is no protocol version field in ESP/AH specification, tcpdump cannot deduce the version of ESP/AH protocol.

-s Snarf snaplen bytes of data from each packet rather you're interested in. Setting snaplen to 0 means use the required length to catch whole packets.

-S Print absolute, rather than relative, TCP sequence numbers.

-t Don't print a timestamp on each dump line.

-tt Print an unformatted timestamp on each dump line.

-U Drops root privileges and changes user ID to user and group ID to the primary group of user. Note! Red Hat Linux automatically drops the privileges to user ‘pcap’ if nothing else is specified.

Option Explanation

640

. . .

. .T

-T Force packets selected by ‘expression’ to be interpreted the specified type. Currently known types are cnfp (Cisco NetFlow protocol), rpc (Remote Procedure Call), rtp (Real-Time Applications protocol), rtcp (Real-Time Applications control protocol), snmp (Simple Network Management Protocol), vat (Visual Audio Tool), and wb (distributed White Board).

-u Print undecoded NFS handles.

-v (Slightly more) verbose output. For example, the time to live, identification, total length and options in an IP packet are printed. Also enables additional packet integrity checks such as verifying the IP and ICMP header checksum. SMB packets are also printed in full.

-vv Even more verbose output. For example, additional fields are printed from NFS reply packets.

-vvv Even more verbose output. For example, telnet SB ... SE options are printed in full. With -X telnet options are printed in hex as well.

-w Write the raw packets to file rather than parsing and printing them out. They can later be printed with the -r option. Standard output is used if file is ‘-’.

-x Print each packet (minus its link level header) in hex. The smaller of the entire packet or snaplen bytes will be printed.

-X When printing hex, print ascii too.

Option Explanation

641

T0

tcsh


Location: /bin

Description: launch an extended version of the C shell



S Y N T A X

tcsh [ -bcdefilmnqstvVxX ] [ argument ... ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b forces a ``break'' from option processing, causing any further shell arguments to be treated as non-option arguments. The remaining arguments will not be interpreted as shell options. This may be used to pass options to a shell script without confusion or possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user ID script without this option.

-c Commands are read from the following argument (which must be present, and must be a single argument), stored in the command shell variable for reference, and executed. Any remaining arguments are placed in the argv shell variable.

-d The shell loads the directory stack from ~/.cshdirs as described under Startup and shutdown, whether or not it is a login shell. (+)

-Dname[=value] Sets the environment variable name to value. (Domain/OS only) (+)

-e The shell exits if any invoked command terminates abnormally or yields a non-zero exit status.

642

. . .

. .T

-f The shell ignores ~/.tcshrc, and thus starts faster.

-F The shell uses fork(2) instead of vfork(2) to spawn processes. (Convex/OS only) (+)

-i The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level input, even if it appears to not be a terminal. Shells are interactive without this option if their inputs and outputs are terminals.

-l The shell is a login shell. Applicable only if -l is the only flag specified.

-m The shell loads ~/.tcshrc even if it does not belong to the effective user. Newer versions of su(1) can pass -m to the shell. (+)

-n The shell parses commands but does not execute them. This aids in debugging shell scripts.

-q The shell accepts SIGQUIT (see Signal handling) and behaves when it is used under a debugger. Job control is disabled. (u)

-s Command input is taken from the standard input.

-t The shell reads and executes a single line of input. A `\' may be used to escape the newline at the end of this line and continue onto another line.

-v Sets the verbose shell variable, so that command input is echoed after history substitution.

-x Sets the echo shell variable, so that commands are echoed immediately before execution.

-V Sets the verbose shell variable even before executing ~/.tcshrc.

Option Explanation

643

T0

-X Is to -x as -V is to -v.

Option Explanation

644

. . .

. .T

tee


Location: /usr/bin

Description: accept output from another command and send it to both the standard output and the file specified



S Y N T A X

tee [OPTION]... [FILE]...Copy standard input to each FILE, and also to standard output.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite

--append append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite

-i ignore interrupt signals

--ignore-interrupts ignore interrupt signals



645

T0

te l in i t (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /sbin

Description: link to init



S Y N T A X

See init

O P T I O N S

See init

646

. . .

. .T

test


Location: /usr/bin

Description: evaluate an expression



S Y N T A X

test [expr] test {--help,--version}

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b \fIfile\fP true if file exists and is block special.

-c \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is character special.

-d \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is a directory.

-e \fIfile\fP True if file exists

-f \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is a regular file.

-g \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is set-group-id.

-k \fIfile\fP True if file has its ``sticky'' bit set.

-L \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is a symbolic link.

-p \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is a named pipe.

-r \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is readable.

-s \fIfile\fP True if file exists and has a size greater than zero.

-S \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is a socket.

-t [\fIfd\fP] True if fd is opened on a terminal. If fd is omitted, it defaults to 1 (standard output).

647

T0

-u \fIfile\fP True if file exists and its set-user-id bit is set.

-w \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is writable.

-x \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is executable.

-O \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is owned by the effective user id.

-G \fIfile\fP True if file exists and is owned by the effective group id.

file1 -nt file2 True if file1 is newer (according to modification date) than file2.

file1 -ot file2 True if file1 is older than file2.

file1 -ef file2 True if file1 and file2 have the same device and inode numbers.

-z \fIstring\fP True if the length of string is zero.

-n \fIstring\fP string True if the length of string is non-zero.

string1 = string2 True if the strings are equal.

string1 != string2 True if the strings are not equal.

! \fIexpr\fP True if expr is false.

expr1 -a expr2 True if both expr1 and expr2 are true.

expr1 -o expr2 True if either expr1 or expr2 is true.

arg1 \fBOP\fP arg2 OP is one of -eq , -ne , -lt , -le , -gt , or -ge . These arithmetic binary operators return true if arg1 is equal, not-equal, less-than, less-than-or-equal, greater-than, or greater-than-or-equal than arg2, respectively. arg1 and arg2 may be positive integers, negative integers, or the special expression -l string, which evaluates to the length of string . When GNU test is invoked with exactly one argument, the following options are recognized:

Option Explanation

648

. . .

. .T

--help Print a usage message on standard output and exit successfully.

--version Print version information on standard output then exit successfully.

Option Explanation

649

T0

t f tp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: user interface for tftp



S Y N T A X

tftp Ar host

O P T I O N S

At this time, no additional information is available about options for the tfpt command.

650

. . .

. .T

t ime_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script for time functions



S Y N T A X

time [HH:MM]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the time_start script.

651

T0

t load


Location: /usr/bin

Description: display system load average in graph format



S Y N T A X

tload [-V] [-d delay] [-s scale] [tty]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


-d delay set the delay between updates; measured in seconds

-s scale set the scale for the vertical

652

. . .

. .T

top


Location: /usr/bin

Description: provide information about the most CPU intensive processes currently running



S Y N T A X

top -hvbcisqS -d delay -p pid -n iterations

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d Specifies the delay between screen updates. You can change this with the s interactive command.

-q This causes top to refresh without any delay. If the caller has superuser priviledges, top runs with the highest possible priority.

-S Specifies cumulative mode, where each process is listed with the CPU time that it as well as its dead children has spent. This is like the -S flag to ps (1). See the discussion below of the S interactive command.

-s Tells top to run in secure mode. This disables the potentially dangerous of the interactive commands (see below). A secure top is a nifty thing to leave running on a spare terminal.

-i Start top ignoring any idle or zombie processes. See the interactive command i below.

653

T0

-c display command line instead of the command name only. The default behaviour has been changed as this seems to be more useful.

-n Number of iterations. Update the display this number of times and then exit.

-b Batch mode. Useful for sending output from top to other programs or to a file. In this mode, top will not accept command line input. It runs until it produces the number of iterations requested with the n option or until killed. Output is plain text suitable for display on a dumb terminal.

Option Explanation

654

. . .

. .T

top_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script for starting the top utility in Standard Mode



S Y N T A X

top

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the top_start script.

655

T0

touch


Location: /bin

Description: update the access and modification times on files



S Y N T A X

touch [OPTION]... FILE... or: touch [-acm] MMDDhhmm[YY] FILE... (obsolescent)Update the access and modification times of each FILE to the current time.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a change only the access time

-c do not create any files

--no-create do not create any files

-d STRING parse STRING and use it instead of current time

--date=STRING parse STRING and use it instead of current time

-f (ignored)

-m change only the modification time

-r FILE use this file's times instead of current time

--reference=FILE use this file's times instead of current time

-t STAMP use [[CC]YY]MMDDhhmm[ss] instead of current time

--time=WORD set time given by WORD: access atime use (same as -a) modify mtime (same as -m)


656

. . .

. .T

Note that the three time-date formats recognized for the -d and -t options and for the obsolescent argument are all different.


Option Explanation

657

T0

t r


Location: /usr/bin

Description: translate characters



S Y N T A X

tr [OPTION]... SET1 [SET2]Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters from standard input,writing to standard output.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c first complement SET1

--complement first complement SET1

-d delete characters in SET1, do not translate

--delete delete characters in SET1, do not translate

-s replace sequence of characters with one

--squeeze-repeats replace sequence of characters with one

-t first truncate SET1 to length of SET2

--truncate-set1 first truncate SET1 to length of SET2



658

. . .

. .T

SETs are specified as strings of characters. Most represent themselves. Interpreted sequences are:

String Explanation

\NNN character with octal value NNN (1 to 3 octal digits)

\\ backslash

\a audible BEL

\b backspace

\f form feed

\n new line

\r return

\t horizontal tab

\v vertical tab

CHAR1-CHAR2 all characters from CHAR1 to CHAR2 in ascending order

[CHAR*] in SET2, copies of CHAR until length of SET1

[CHAR*REPEAT] REPEAT copies of CHAR, REPEAT octal if starting with 0

[:alnum:] all letters and digits

[:alpha:] all letters

[:blank:] all horizontal whitespace

[:cntrl:] all control characters

[:digit:] all digits

[:graph:] all printable characters, not including space

[:lower:] all lower case letters

[:print:] all printable characters, including space

659

T0

Translation occurs if -d is not given and both SET1 and SET2 appear. -t may be used only when translating. SET2 is extended to length of SET1 by repeating its last character as necessary. Excess characters of SET2 are ignored. Only [:lower:] and [:upper:] are guaranteed to expand in ascending order; used in SET2 while translating, they may only be used in pairs to specify case conversion. -s uses SET1 if not translating nor deleting; else squeezing uses SET2 and occurs after translation or deletion.

[:punct:] all punctuation characters

[:space:] all horizontal or vertical whitespace

[:upper:] all upper case letters

[:xdigit:] all hexadecimal digits

[=CHAR=] all characters which are equivalent to CHAR

String Explanation

660

. . .

. .T

t racepath


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: traces path to destination discovering MTU along this path



S Y N T A X

tracepath [-n] <destination>[/<port>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n

661

T0

t racepath6


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: tracepath for ipv6



S Y N T A X

tracepath6 [-n] [-b] <address>[/<port>]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n

-b

662

. . .

. .T

t raceroute


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: trace route taken by packets to reach a network host



S Y N T A X

traceroute [-dFInrvx] [-g gateway] [-i iface] [-f first_ttl][-m max_ttl] [ -p port] [-q nqueries] [-s src_addr] [-t tos][-w waittime] [-z pausemsecs] host [packetlen]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f Set the initial time-to-live used in the first out-going probe packet.

-F Set the "don't fragment" bit.

-d Enable socket level debugging.

-g Specify a loose source route gateway (8 maximum).

-i Specify a network interface to obtain the source IP address for outgoing probe packets. This is normally only useful on a multi-homed host. (See the -s flag for another way to do this.)

-I Use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams.

-m Set the max time-to-live (max number of hops) used in outgoing probe packets. The default is 30 hops (the same default used for TCP connections).

663

T0

-n Print hop addresses numerically rather than symbolically and numerically (saves a nameserver address-to-name lookup for each gateway found on the path).

-p Set the base UDP port number used in probes (default is 33434). Traceroute hopes that nothing is listening on UDP ports base to base + nhops - 1 at the destination host (so an ICMP PORT_UNREACHABLE message will be returned to terminate the source address in outgoing probe packets. On multi-homed hosts (those with more than one IP address), this option can be used to force the source address to be something other than the IP address of the interface the probe packet is sent on. If the IP address is not one of this machine's interface addresses, an error is returned and nothing is sent. (See the -i flag for another way to do this.)

-t Set the type-of-service in probe packets to the following value (default zero). The value must be a decimal integer in the range 0 to 255. This option can be used to see if different types-of-service result in different paths. (If you are not running 4.4bsd, this may be academic since the normal network services like telnet and ftp don't let you control the TOS). Not all values of TOS are legal or meaningful - see the IP spec for definitions. Useful values are probably `-t 16' (low delay) and `-t 8' (high throughput).

-v Verbose output. Received ICMP packets other than TIME_EXCEEDED and UNREACHABLEs are listed.

-w Set the time (in seconds) to wait for a response to a probe (default 5 sec.).

Option Explanation

664

. . .

. .T

-x Toggle ip checksums. Normally, this prevents traceroute from calculating ip checksums. In some cases, the operating system can overwrite parts of the outgoing packet but not recalculate the checksum (so in some cases the default is to not calcu late checksums and using -x causes them to be cal cualted). Note that checksums are usually required for the last hop when using ICMP ECHO probes (-I). So they are always calculated when using ICMP.

-z Set the time (in milliseconds) to pause between probes (default 0). Some systems such as Solaris and routers such as Ciscos rate limit icmp messages. A good value to use with this this is 500 (e.g. 1/2 second).

Option Explanation

665

T0

t raceroute6


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: traceroute for IPv6



S Y N T A X

traceroute6 [-dnrvV] [-m max_ttl] [-p port#] [-q nqueries][-s src_addr] [-t tos] [-w wait] host [data size]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d debug mode

-n do not resolve numeric address to hostname

-r

-v be verbose


-m MAX_TTL specify maximum hop limit to MAX_TTL

-p PORT set UDP port number to PORT

-q NQUERIES set the number of probes per hop count to NQUERIES

-s SRC_ADDR specify the source IPv6 address to use

-t TOS

-w WAIT specify the delay time between probes

666

. . .

. .T

t rue


Location: /bin

Description: a null command that returns a successful exit status



S Y N T A X

true

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



667

T0

t ty


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the file name of the terminal connected to the standard output



S Y N T A X

tty [OPTION]...Print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-s print nothing, only return an exit status

--silent print nothing, only return an exit status

--quiet print nothing, only return an exit status



668

. . .

. .T

tune2fs


Location: /sbin

Description: tune the parameters for a Linux Second Extended filesystem



S Y N T A X

tune2fs [-c max-mounts-count] [-e errors-behavior] [-g group][-i interval[d|m|w]] [-j] [-J journal-options][-l] [-s sparse-flag] [-m reserved-blocks-percent][-r reserved-blocks-count] [-u user] [-C mount-count][-L volume-label] [-M last-mounted-dir] [-U UUID][-O [^]feature[,...]] device

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c max-mount-counts Adjust the maximal mounts count between two filesystem checks. If max-mount-counts is 0 then the number of times the filesystem is mounted will be disregarded by e2fsck(8) and the kernel. Staggering the mount-counts at which filesystems are forcibly checked will avoid all filesystems being checked at one time when using journaled filesystems. You should strongly consider the consequences of disabling mount-count-dependent checking entirely. Bad disk drives, cables, memory, and kernel bugs could all corrupt a filesystem without marking the filesystem dirty or in error. If you are using journaling on your filesystem, your filesystem will never be marked dirty, so it will not normally be checked. A filesystem error detected by the kernel will still force an fsck on the next reboot, but it may already be too late to prevent data loss at that point. See also the -i option for time-dependent checking.

669

T0

-C mount-count Set the number of times the filesystem has been mounted. Can be used in conjunction with -c to force an fsck on the filesystem at the next reboot.

-e error-behavior Change the behavior of the kernel code when errors are detected. In all cases, a filesystem error will cause e2fsck(8) to check the filesystem on the next boot. error-behavior can be one of the following: WARNING: Removing an external journal from a filesystem which was not cleanly unmounted without first replaying the external journal can result in severe data loss and filesystem corruption.

-g group Set the group which can use reserved filesystem blocks. The group parameter can be a numerical gid or a group name. If a group name is given, it is converted to a numerical gid before it is stored in the superblock.

-i interval-between-checks[d|m|w]

Adjust the maximal time between two filesystem checks. No postfix or d result in days, m in months, and w in weeks. A value of zero will disable the time-dependent checking. It is strongly recommended that either -c (mount-count-dependent) or -i (time-dependent) checking be enabled to force periodic full e2fsck(8) checking of the filesystem. Failure to do so may lead to filesystem corruption due to bad disks, cables, memory, or kernel bugs to go unnoticed until they cause data loss or corruption.

-j Add an ext3 journal to the filesystem. If the -J option is not specified, the default journal parameters will be used to create an appropriately sized journal (given the size of the filesystem) stored within the filesystem. Note that you must be using a kernel which has ext3 support in order to actually make use of the journal.

Option Explanation

670

. . .

. .T

-J journal-options Override the default ext3 journal parameters. Journal options are comma separated, and may take an argument using the equals ('=') sign.

-l List the contents of the filesystem superblock.

-L volume-label Set the volume label of the filesystem. Ext2 filesystem labels can be at most 16 characters long; if volume-label is longer than 16 characters, tune2fs will truncate it and print a warning. The volume label can be used by mount(8), fsck(8), and /etc/fstab(5) (and possibly others) by specifying LABEL=volume_label instead of a block special device name like /dev/hda5.

-m reserved-blocks-percentage

Set the percentage of reserved filesystem blocks.

-M last-mounted-directory Set the last-mounted directory for the filesystem.

-O [^]feature[,...] Set or clear the indicated filesystem features (options) in the filesystem. More than one filesystem feature can be cleared or set by separating features with commas. Filesystem features prefixed with a caret character ('^') will be cleared in the filesystem's superblock; filesystem features without a prefix character or prefixed with a plus character ('+') will be added to the filesystem.

Option Explanation

671

T0

Journal Option Explanation

size=journal-size Create a journal stored in the filesystem of size journal-size megabytes. The size of the journal must be at least 1024 filesystem blocks (i.e., 1MB if using 1k blocks, 4MB if using 4k blocks, etc.) and may be no more than 102,400 filesystem blocks. There must be enough free space in the filesystem to create a journal of that size.

device=external-journal location of external journal by either the volume label or UUID stored in the ext2 superblock at the start of the journal.

UUID=UUID to locate the external journal by either the volume label or UUID stored in the ext2 superblock at the start of the journal. Use dumpe2fs(8) to display a journal device's volume label and UUID. See also the -L option of tune2fs(8). Only one of the size or device options can be given for a filesystem.

672

. . .

. .T

tzselect


Location: /usr/bin

Description: ask the user about time zone and print the resulting TZ value to the standard output



S Y N T A X

tzselect

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the tzselect command.

673

T0

674

. . .

. .U

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U

uagstar t_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start the User Authority Gateway



S Y N T A X

uagstart

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the uag_start command.

675

U0

uagstop_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to stop the User Authority Gateway



S Y N T A X

uagstop

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the uag_stop command.

676

. . .

. .U

uas_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start the User Authority Server



S Y N T A X

uas [OPTION]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

d initialize uas daemon

drv [on/off] uas driver command

kill terminate uas daemon

simple initialize uas simple proxy

simplekill terminate uas simple proxy

ver display uas version number

debug [on/off] turn on/off UAS debug printings

677

U0

umount


Location: /bin

Description: unmount a file system



S Y N T A X

umount [-hV]umount -a [-f] [-r] [-n] [-v] [-t vfstypes] [-O opts]umount [-f] [-r] [-n] [-v] special | node...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


-h Print help message and exit.

-v Verbose mode.

-n Unmount without writing in /etc/mtab.

-r In case unmounting fails, try to remount read-only.

-d In case the unmounted device was a loop device, also free this loop device.

-a All of the file systems described in /etc/mtab are unmounted. (With umount version 2.7 and later: the proc filesystem is not unmounted.)

-t vfstype Indicate that the actions should only be taken on file systems of the specified type. More than one type may be specified in a comma separated list. The list of file system types can be prefixed with no to specify the file system types on which no action should be taken.

678

. . .

. .U

-O options Indicate that the actions should only be taken on file systems with the specified options in

Option Explanation

679

U0

uname


Location: /bin

Description: print information about the machine and operating system to the standard output



S Y N T A X

uname [OPTION]...Print certain system information. With no OPTION, same as -s.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-a print all information

--all print all information

-m print the machine (hardware) type

--machine print the machine (hardware) type

-n print the machine's network node hostname

--nodename print the machine's network node hostname

-r print the operating system release

--release print the operating system release

-s print the operating system name

--sysname print the operating system name

-p print the host processor type

--processor print the host processor type

-v print the operating system version

680

. . .

. .U



Option Explanation

681

U0

unicode_star t


Location: /usr/bin

Description: put the console in unicode mode



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the unicode_start script.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the unicode_start script.

682

. . .

. .U

unicode_stop


Location: /usr/bin

Description: take the console out of unicode mode



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the unicode_stop script.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information about options for the unicode_stop script is available.

683

U0

uniq


Location: /usr/bin

Description: remove duplicate adjacent lines from one file and send copies of the lines to another file



S Y N T A X

uniq [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]]Discard all but one of successive identical lines from INPUT (orstandard input), writing to OUTPUT (or standard output).

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c prefix lines by the number of occurrences

--count prefix lines by the number of occurrences

-d only print duplicate lines

--repeated only print duplicate lines

-D print all duplicate lines

--all-repeated print all duplicate lines

-f N avoid comparing the first N fields

--skip-fields=N avoid comparing the first N fields

-i ignore differences in case when comparing

--ignore-case ignore differences in case when comparing

-s N avoid comparing the first N characters

--skip-chars=N avoid comparing the first N characters

-u only print unique lines

684

. . .

. .U

A field is a run of whitespace, then non-whitespace characters. Fields are skipped before chars.

--unique only print unique lines

-w N compare no more than N characters in lines

--check-chars=N compare no more than N characters in lines

-N same as -f N

+N same as -s N (obsolescent; will be withdrawn)



Option Explanation

685

U0

unix_chkpwd


Location: /sbin

Description: check the password of the invoking user; helper binary for pam



S Y N T A X

At this time, no syntax information is available for the unix_chkpwd command.

O P T I O N S

At this time, no information is available about options for the unix_chkpwd command.

686

. . .

. .U

updfstab


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: utility to update the fstab entries to match device probing order



S Y N T A X

updfstab [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-n pdate fstab entries to match device probing order

--normalize pdate fstab entries to match device probing order

-t don't update anything, display new fstab on stdout

--test don't update anything, display new fstab on stdout

-? Show this help message

--help Show this help message

687

U0

upt ime


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the current time, duration logged in, number of users currently logged in, and system load averages



S Y N T A X

uptime -V

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


688

. . .

. .U

useradd


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create new user accounts or update default account information



S Y N T A X

useradd [-u uid [-o]] [-g group] [-G group,...] [-d home] [-s shell] [-c comment] [-m [-k template]][-f inactive] [-e expire ] [-p passwd] [-M] [-n] [-r] nameuseradd -D [-g group] [-b base] [-s shell][-f inactive] [-e expire ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c comment The new user's password file comment field.

-d home_dir The new user will be created using home_dir as the value for the user's login directory. The default is to append the login name to default_home and use that as the login directory name.

-e expire_date The date on which the user account will be disabled. The date is specified in the format YYYY- MM-DD.

-f inactive_days The number of days after a password expires until the account is permanently disabled. A value of 0 disables the account as soon as the password has expired, and a value of -1 disables the feature. The default value is -1.

689

U0

-g initial_group The group name or number of the user's initial login group. The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an already existing group. The default group number is 1.

-G group,[...] option is only valid in conjunction with the -m option. The default is to not create the directory and to not copy any files.

-M The user home directory will not be created, even if the system wide settings from /etc/login.defs is to create home dirs.

-n A group having the same name as the user being added to the system will be created by default. This option will turn off this Red Hat Linux specific behavior.

-r This flag is used to create a system account. That is, an user with an UID lower than value of UID_MIN defined in /etc/login.defs. Note that useradd will not create a home directory for such an user, regardless of the default setting in /etc/login.defs. You have to specify -m option if you want a home directory for a system account to be created. This is an option added by Red Hat.

-p passwd The encrypted password, as returned by crypt(3). The default is to disable the account.

-s shell The name of the user's login shell. The default is to leave this field blank, which causes the system to select the default login shell.

-u uid The numerical value of the user's ID. This value must be unique, unless the -o option is used. The value must be non-negative. The default is to use the smallest ID value greater than 99 and greater than every other user. Values between 0 and 99 are typically reserved for system accounts.

Option Explanation

690

. . .

. .U

When invoked with the -D option, useradd will either display the current default values, or update the default values from the command line.

If no options are specified, useradd displays the current default values.

Default Value Option Explanation

-b default_home The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The user's name will be affixed to the end of default_home to create the new directory name if the -d option is not used when creating a new account.

-e default_expire_date The date on which the user account is disabled.

691

U0

userdel


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: delete all entries for the specified user in the system account files



S Y N T A X

userdel [-r] name

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r Files in the user's home directory will be removed along with the home directory itself and the user's mail spool. Files located in other file systems will have to be searched for and deleted manually.

692

. . .

. .U

usermod


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: modify the specified user's account information



S Y N T A X

usermod [-u uid [-o]] [-g group] [-G group,...] [-d home [-m]] [-s shell] [-c comment] [-l new_name][-f inactive] [-e expire ] [-p passwd] [-L|-U] name

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c comment The new value of the user's password file comment field. It is normally modified using the chfn(1) utility.

-d home_dir The user's new login directory. If the -m option is given the contents of the current home directory will be moved to the new home directory, which is created if it does not already exist.

-e expire_date The date on which the user account will be disabled. The date is specified in the format YYYY- MM-DD.

-f inactive_days The number of days after a password expires until the account is permanently disabled. A value of 0 disables the account as soon as the password has expired, and a value of -1 disables the feature. The default value is -1.

-g initial_group The group name or number of the user's new initial login group. The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an already existing group. The default group number is 1.

693

U0

-G group,[...] A list of supplementary groups which the user is also a member of. Each group is separated from the next by a comma, with no intervening whitespace. The groups are subject to the same restrictions as the group given with the -g option. If the user is currently a member of a group which is not listed, the user will be removed from the group

-l login_name The name of the user will be changed from login to value must be non-negative. Values between 0 and 99 are typically reserved for system accounts. Any files which the user owns and which are located in the directory tree rooted at the user's home directory will have the file user ID changed automatically. Files outside of the user's home directory must be altered manually.

-L lock a user's password. This puts a '!' in front of the encrypted password, effectively disabling the password. You can't use this option with -p or -U.

-U Unlock a user's password. This removes the '!' in front of the encrypted password. You can't use this option with -p or -L.

Option Explanation

694

. . .

. .U

users


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print a space-separated list of each login session on the host



S Y N T A X

users [OPTION]... [ FILE ]Output who is currently logged in according to FILE.If FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp. /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common.

O P T I O N S

Options Explanation



695

U0

usleep


Location: /bin

Description: sleep some number of microseconds



S Y N T A X

usleep [microseconds]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v Display the version of this program, and exit

--version Display the version of this program, and exit

-o oot says hey!

--oot oot says hey!

-? Show this help message

--help Show this help message


696

. . .

. .U

utmpdump


Location: /usr/bin

Description: prints the content of a file (usually /var/run/utmp) on standard output in a user friendly format



S Y N T A X

utmpdump [ -froh ] [ filename ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-f

-r

-o

-h print help and exit

697

U0

uudecode


Location: /usr/bin

Description: read a uuencoded file and re-create the original file with the permissions and name set in the file



S Y N T A X

uudecode [FILE]...Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory to short options too.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h display this help and exit


-v output version information and exit


-o FILE direct output to FILE

--output-file=FILE direct output to FILE

698

. . .

. .U

uuencode


Location: /usr/bin

Description: encode a binary file



S Y N T A X

uuencode [INFILE] REMOTEFILE

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h display this help and exit


-m use base64 encoding as of RFC1521

--base64 use base64 encoding as of RFC1521

-v output version information and exit


699

U0

uuidgen


Location: /usr/bin

Description: command line utility to create a new uuid value



S Y N T A X

uuidgen [-r] [-t]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-r generate a radom-based uuid

-t generate a time-based uuid

700

. . .

. .V

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

vconf ig


Location: /sbin

Description: program allows you to create and remove vlan-devices on a vlan enabled kernel. Vlan-devices are virtual ethernet devices which represents the virtual lans on the physical lan.

Permissions: -r-s--x--x


S Y N T A X

add [interface-name] [vlan_id]rem [vlan-name]set_flag [interface-name] [flag-num] [0 | 1]set_egress_map [vlan-name] [skb_priority] [vlan_qos]set_ingress_map [vlan-name] [skb_priority] [vlan_qos]set_name_type [name-type]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

[interface-name] the name of the ethernet card that hosts the VLAN you are talking about.

vlan_id the identifier (0-4095) of the VLAN you are operating on.

skb_priority the priority in the socket buffer (sk_buff).

vlan_qos the 3 bit priority in the VLAN header

name-type VLAN_PLUS_VID (vlan0005), VLAN_PLUS_VID_NO_PAD (vlan5),DEV_PLUS_VID (eth0.0005), DEV_PLUS_VID_NO_PAD (eth0.5)

701

V0

bind-type PER_DEVICE # Allows vlan 5 on eth0 and eth1 to be unique.PER_KERNEL # Forces vlan 5 to be unique across all devices.

FLAGS 1 REORDER_HDR When this is set, the VLAN device will move the ethernet header around to make it look exactly like a real ethernet device. This may help programs such as DHCPd which read the raw ethernet packet and make assumptions about the location of bytes. If you don't need it, don't turn it on, because there will be at least a small performance degradation. Default is OFF.

Option Explanation

702

. . .

. .V

vcst ime


Location: /usr/bin

Description: utility to show time in upper right corner of console applications; not functional in SecurePlatform



S Y N T A X

This utility does not function on SecurePlatform.

O P T I O N S

This utility does not function on SecurePlatform.

703

V0

ver


Location: /bin

Description: print the SecurePlatform build number to the standard output



S Y N T A X

ver

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the ver command.

704

. . .

. .V

vi


Location: /bin

Description: screen oriented text editor



S Y N T A X

ex [-eFRrSsv] [-c command] [-t tag] [-w size] [file ...]vi [-eFlRrSv] [-c command] [-t tag] [-w size] [file ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c Execute cmd immediately after starting the edit session. Particularly useful for initial positioning in the file, however cmd is not limited to positioning commands. This is the POSIX 1003.2 interface for the historic ``+cmd'' syntax. Nex/nvi supports both the old and new syntax.

-e Start editing in ex mode, as if the command name were ex.

-F Don't copy the entire file when first starting to edit. (The default is to make a copy in case someone else modifies the file during your edit session.)

-l Start editing with the lisp and showmatch options set.

-R Start editing in read-only mode, as if the command name was view, or the readonly option was set.

705

V0

-r Recover the specified files, or, if no files are specified, list the files that could be recovered. If no recoverable files by the specified name exist, the file is edited as if the -r option had not been specified.

-S Run with the secure edit option set, disallowing all access to external programs.

-s Enter batch mode; applicable only to ex edit sessions. Batch mode is useful when running ex scripts. Prompts, informative messages and other user oriented message are turned off, and no startup files or environmental variables are read. This is the POSIX 1003.2 interface for the historic ``-'' argument. Nex/nvi supports both the old and new syntax.

-t start editing at the specified tag. (See ctags(1)).

-w Set the initial window size to the specified number of lines.

-v Start editing in vi mode, as if the command name was vi or view.

Option Explanation

706

. . .

. .V

view (symbol ic l ink)


Location: /bin

Description: link to vi



S Y N T A X

See vi

O P T I O N S

See vi

707

V0

vmstat


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print virtual memory statistics to the standard output



S Y N T A X

vmstat [-V] [-n] [delay [count]]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-V prints version.

-n causes the headers not to be reprinted regularly.

delay the delay between updates in seconds.

count the number of updates.

708

. . .

. .V

vpn_star t


Location: /bin

Description: script to start vpnd



O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

vpn debug < on|off|ikeon|ikeoff|trunc >

print debug msgs to VPN log files

vpn crl_zap erase all CRLs from cache

vpn drv ... attach vpn driver to fw driver and more

vpn ver [-k] display VPN version

vpn accel ... operations on VPN accelerator card and VPNx

vpn crlview ... debugging tool for CRLs

vpn diag < on | off > print VPN diagnostics msgs

vpn compstat display compression/decompression statistics

vpn compreset reset compression/decompression statistics

vpn macutil [user_name] display generated MAC address by username or DN from arg or stdin (also: vpn mu)

vpn tunnelutil launch TunnelUtil tool to control VPN Tunnels (also: vpn tu)

vpn export_p12 ... tool to export p12 from gw certificate

vpn nssm_topology ... generate topology in NSSM format for Nokia clients

709

V0

vpn sw_topology ... Download topology for SofaWare GWs

vpn overlap_encdom ... Display overlapping encryption domains

Option Explanation

710

. . .

. .V

vt - is -UTF8


Location: /usr/bin

Description: set terminal to use UTF encoding



S Y N T A X

vt-is-UTF8 [option]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-q don't print result

--quiet don't print result





711

V0

vtysh


Location: /usr/bin

Description: an integrated shell for zebra routing software



S Y N T A X

vtysh [OPTION...]

Daemon which manages kernel routing table management and redistribution between different routing protocols.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b Execute boot startup configuration

--boot Execute boot startup configuration

-e Execute argument as command

--eval Execute argument as command

-h Display this help and exit

--help Display this help and exit

712

. . .

. .W

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

w


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print summaries of system usage, currently logged in users, and what they are doing



S Y N T A X

w -hlsufV [user]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-h skip header

-l long listing (default)

-s short listing

-u ignore uid of processes

-f toggle FROM field (default on)

713

W0

wal l


Location: /usr/bin

Description: write to all users


Owner/Group: root/tty

S Y N T A X

wall [message]

O P T I O N S

No additional options are available for the wall command.

714

. . .

. .W

watch


Location: /usr/bin

Description: watch a program with update intervals



S Y N T A X

watch [-dhnv] [--differences[=cumulative]] [--help] [--interval=<n>] [--version] <command>

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d cumulative highlight changes between updates;(cumulative means highlighting is cumulative)

--differences[=cumulative] highlight changes between updates;(cumulative means highlighting is cumulative)

-h print a summary of the options

--help print a summary of the options

-n <seconds> seconds to wait between updates

--interval=<seconds> seconds to wait between updates

-v print the version number

--version print the version number

715

W0

wcLocation: /usr/bin

Description: print character, word, and line counts for each file specified



S Y N T A X

wc [OPTION]... [FILE]...Print newline, word, and byte counts for each FILE, and a total line ifmore than one FILE is specified. With no FILE, or when FILE is -,read standard input.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-c print the byte counts

--bytes print the byte counts

-m print the character counts

--chars print the character counts

-l print the newline counts

--lines print the newline counts

-L print the length of the longest line

--max-line-length print the length of the longest line

-w print the word counts

--words print the word counts



716

. . .

. .W

whereis


Location: /usr/bin

Description: locate the binary, source, and manual page files for the specified command or file



S Y N T A X

whereis --helpwhereis [ -sbmu ] [ -SBM dir ... -f ] name...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation


-s search only for sources

-b search only for binaries

-m search only for manual sections

-u search for unusual entries

-S dir change or otherwise limit the places where whereis searches for sources

-B dir change or otherwise limit the places where whereis searches for binaries

-M dir change or otherwise limit the places where whereis searches for manual sections

-f terminate the last directory list and signal the start of file names; must be used when -S, -B, or -M is used.

717

W0

which


Location: /usr/bin

Description: list the full path names of the files that would be executed if the specified commands were run



S Y N T A X

/usr/bin/which [options] [--] programname [...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

--version Print version and exit successfully

-[vV] Print version and exit successfully.

--help, Print this help and exit successfully.

--skip-dot Skip directories in PATH that start with a dot.

--skip-tilde Skip directories in PATH that start with a tilde.

--show-dot Don't expand a dot to current directory in output.

--show-tilde Output a tilde for HOME directory for non-root.

--tty-only Stop processing options on the right if not on tty.

-a Print all matches in PATH, not just the first

--all Print all matches in PATH, not just the first

-i Read list of aliases from stdin

718

. . .

. .W

--read-alias Read list of aliases from stdin.

--skip-alias Ignore option --read-alias; don't read stdin.

Option Explanation

719

W0

whoami


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print current user ID



S Y N T A X

whoami [OPTION]...Print the user name associated with the current effective user id.Same as id -un.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



720

. . .

. .W

wri tevt


Location: /usr/bin

Description: used to put text into the input buffers of a virtual terminal



S Y N T A X

writevt tty textPut text into the input buffer of a virtual terminal.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-t tty device name

--term=tty device name

-T text text to insert

--text=text text to insert





721

W0

722

. . .

. .X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X

xargs


Location: /usr/bin

Description: execute the command specified with any initial arguments, but read remaining arguments from the standard input instead of specifying them directly



S Y N T A X

xargs [-0prtx] [-e[eof-str]] [-i[replace-str]] [-l[max-lines]][-n max-args] [-s max-chars] [-P max-procs] [--null] [--eof[=eof-str]][--replace[=replace-str]] [--max-lines[=max-lines]] [--interactive][--max-chars=max-chars] [--verbose] [--exit] [--max-procs=max-procs][--max-args=max-args] [--no-run-if-empty] [--version] [--help][command [initial-arguments]]

O P T I O N S

Option Exlanation

--null Input filenames are terminated by a null character instead of by whitespace, and the quotes and backslash are not special (every character is taken literally). Disables the end of file string, which is treated like any other argument. Useful when arguments might contain white space, quote marks, or backslashes. The GNU find -print0 option produces input suitable for this mode.

723

X0

-0 Input filenames are terminated by a null character instead of by whitespace, and the quotes and backslash are not special (every character is taken literally). Disables the end of file string, which is treated like any other argument. Useful when arguments might contain white space, quote marks, or backslashes. The GNU find -print0 option produces input suitable for this mode.

--eof[=eof-str] Set the end of file string to eof-str. If the end of file string occurs as a line of input, the rest of the input is ignored. If eof-str is omitted, there is no end of file string. If this option is not given, the end of file string defaults to "_".

-e[eof-str] Set the end of file string to eof-str. If the end of file string occurs as a line of input, the rest of the input is ignored. If eof-str is omitted, there is no end of file string. If this option is not given, the end of file string defaults to "_".

--help Print a summary of the options to xargs and exit.

--replace[=replace-str] Replace occurences of replace-str in the initial arguments with names read from standard input. Also, unquoted blanks do not terminate arguments. If replace-str is omitted, it defaults to "{}" (like for `find -exec'). Implies -x and -l 1.

-i[replace-str] Replace occurences of replace-str in the initial arguments with names read from standard input. Also, unquoted blanks do not terminate arguments. If replace-str is omitted, it defaults to "{}" (like for `find -exec'). Implies -x and -l 1.

Option Exlanation

724

. . .

. .X

--max-lines[=max-lines] Use at most max-lines nonblank input lines per command line; max-lines defaults to 1 if omitted. Trailing blanks cause an input line to be logically continued on the next input line. Implies -x.

-l[max-lines] Use at most max-lines nonblank input lines per command line; max-lines defaults to 1 if omitted. Trailing blanks cause an input line to be logically continued on the next input line. Implies -x.

--max-args=max-args Use at most max-args arguments per command line. Fewer than max-args arguments will be used if the size (see the -s option) is exceeded, unless the -x option is given, in which case xargs will exit.

-n max-args Use at most max-args arguments per command line. Fewer than max-args arguments will be used if the size (see the -s option) is exceeded, unless the -x option is given, in which case xargs will exit.

--interactive Prompt the user about whether to run each command line and read a line from the terminal. Only run the command line if the response starts with `y' or `Y'. Implies -t.

-p Prompt the user about whether to run each command line and read a line from the terminal. Only run the command line if the response starts with `y' or `Y'. Implies -t.

--no-run-if-empty If the standard input does not contain any nonblanks, do not run the command. Normally, the command is run once even if there is no input.

Option Exlanation

725

X0

-r If the standard input does not contain any nonblanks, do not run the command. Normally, the command is run once even if there is no input.

--max-chars=max-chars Use at most max-chars characters per command line, including the command and initial arguments and the terminating nulls at the ends of the argument strings. The default is as large as possible, up to 20k characters.

-s max-chars Use at most max-chars characters per command line, including the command and initial arguments and the terminating nulls at the ends of the argument strings. The default is as large as possible, up to 20k characters.

--verbose Print the command line on the standard error output before executing it.

-t Print the command line on the standard error output before executing it.

--version Print the version number of xargs and exit.

--exit Exit if the size (see the -s option) is exceeded.

-x Exit if the size (see the -s option) is exceeded.

--max-procs=max-procs Run up to max-procs processes at a time; the default is 1. If max-procs is 0, xargs will run as many processes as possible at a time. Use the -n option with -P; otherwise chances are that only one exec will be done.

Option Exlanation

726

. . .

. .X

-P max-procs Run up to max-procs processes at a time; the default is 1. If max-procs is 0, xargs will run as many processes as possible at a time. Use the -n option with -P; otherwise chances are that only one exec will be done.

Option Exlanation

727

X0

728

. . .

. .Y

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y

yes


Location: /usr/bin

Description: print the command line arguments, separated by spaces, and followed by a new line, until killed



S Y N T A X

yes [STRING]...yes OPTIONRepeatedly output a line with all specified STRING(s), or `y'.

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



729

Y0

730

. . .

. .Z

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z

zcat


Location: /bin

Description: read compressed files and write them to the standard output



S Y N T A X

zcat [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-d decompress




-h give this help

--help give this help




731

Z0














-v verbose mode


-V display version number

--version display version number

-1 compress faster


-9 compress better


Option Explanation

732

. . .

. .Z

file... files to (de)compress. If none given, use standard input.

Option Explanation

733

Z0

zcmp


Location: /usr/bin

Description: read compressed files, and pass them uncompressed to the cmp command, along with any command line options



S Y N T A X

zcmp [cmp_options] file [file]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zcmp command. See cmp for cmp_options.

734

. . .

. .Z

zdi f f


Location: /usr/bin

Description: read compressed files, and pass them uncompressed to the diff command, along with any command line options



S Y N T A X

zdiff [diff_options] file [file]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zdiff command. See diff for diff_options.

735

Z0

zdump


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: dump a list of all known time zones



S Y N T A X

zdump [ -v ] [ -c cutoff ] zonename ...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-v For each zonename on the command line, print the time at the lowest possible time value, the time one day after the lowest possible time value, the times both one second before and exactly at each detected time discontinuity, the time at one day less than the highest possible time value, and the time at the highest possible time value. Each line ends with isdst=1 if the given time is Daylight Saving Time or isdst=0 otherwise

-c cutoff Cut off the verbose output near the start of the given year

736

. . .

. .Z

zebra


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: a routing manager for use with associated components; Daemon which manages kernel routing table management and redistribution between different routing protocols.



S Y N T A X

zebra [OPTION...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-b Runs in batch mode

--batch Runs in batch mode







-k Don't delete old routes which installed by zebra

--keep_kernel Don't delete old routes which installed by zebra.

-l Set verbose log mode flag

--log_mode Set verbose log mode flag


737

Z0




-r When program terminates, retain added route by zebra

--retain When program terminates, retain added route by zebra.



-h Display this help and exit

--help Display this help and exit

Option Explanation

738

. . .

. .Z

zegrep


Location: /usr/bin

Description: uncompress files, and pass to egrep, along with any command line arguments



S Y N T A X

zegrep [grep_options] pattern [files]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zegrep command. See grep for grep_options.

739

Z0

zfgrep


Location: /usr/bin

Description: a shell wrapper for grep that decompresses files as needed



S Y N T A X

zfgrep [grep_options] pattern [files]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zfgrep command. See grep for grep_options.

740

. . .

. .Z

zforce


Location: /usr/bin

Description: rename all gzipped files to the file name specified with a .gz extension, unless the file already has a .gz extension



S Y N T A X

zforce files...

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zforce command.

741

Z0

zgrep


Location: /usr/bin

Description: uncompress files and pass to grep, along with any command line arguments



S Y N T A X

zgrep [grep_options] pattern [files]

O P T I O N S

There are no additional options for the zgrep command. See grep for grep_options.

742

. . .

. .Z

zic


Location: /usr/sbin

Description: create time conversion information files



S Y N T A X

zic [ -s ] [ -v ] [ -l localtime ] [ -p posixrules ] \[ -d directory ] [ -L leapseconds ] [ -y yearistype ] [ filename ... ]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-d directory Create time conversion information files in the named directory rather than in the standard directory named below.

-l timezone Use the given time zone as local time. Zic will act as if the input contained a link line of the form: Link timezone localtime

-p timezone Use the given time zone's rules when handling POSIX-format time zone environment variables. Zic will act as if the input contained a link line of the form: Link timezone posixrules

-L leapsecondfilename Read leap second information from the file with the given name. If this option is not used, no leap second information appears in output files.

-v Complain if a year that appears in a data file is outside the range of years representable by time(2) values.

743

Z0

-s Limit time values stored in output files to values that are the same whether they're taken to be signed or unsigned. You can use this option to generate SVVS-compatible files.

-y command Use the given command rather than yearistype when checking year types (see below).

Option Explanation

744

. . .

. .Z

zless


Location: /usr/bin

Description: a script that combines zcat and less to read compressed files



S Y N T A X

zcat [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-d decompress




-h give this help






745

Z0













-v verbose mode




-1 compress faster


-9 compress better



Option Explanation

746

. . .

. .Z

zmore


Location: /usr/bin

Description: a script that combines zcat and more to read compressed files



S Y N T A X

gzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation



-d decompress




-h give this help






747

Z0













-v verbose mode




-1 compress faster


-9 compress better



Option Explanation

748

. . .

. .Z

znew


Location: /usr/bin

Description: script for creating new compressed files



S Y N T A X

znew [-tv9KP] file.Z...

O P T I O N S

Option Explanation

-t tests the new files before deleting originals

-v be verbose

-9 use the slowest compression method (optimal compression)

-K keep a .Z file when it is smaller than the .gz file

-P use pipes for the conversion (does not preserve file modes)

749

Z0

750

Appendix A
A
. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LICENSES

SecurePlatform is covered by a variety of licenses. Appropriate licenses can be found on the installation medium and in the /DOCS directory of the SecurePlatform system. Information about applicable licenses can be found in the /License.txt file at the root of the SecurePlatform system. The contents of that file, as of the time of this writing, are posted below:

The software packages comprising this disk are subject to various licenses, including the GNU General Public License (found in /DOCS/GNU_License.txt), the BSD License (found in /DOCS/Berkeley_License.txt), and the Check Point End User License Agreement (found in /DOCS/Check_Point_EULA.txt). The collection is subject to the Check Point End User License Agreement. All Check Point packages are governed by the Check Point EULA. Please refer to the individual packages and licenses to determine what rights and obligations you may have.

751

L I C E N S E SA

752

. . .

. .Check Point End User License Agreement

C H E C K P O I N T E N D U S E R L I C E N S E

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A G R E E M E N T

This End-user License Agreement (the "Agreement") is an agreement betweenyou (both the individual installing the Product and any legal entity on whosebehalf such individual is acting) (hereinafter "You" or " Your") and Check PointSoftware Technologies Ltd. (hereinafter "Check Point").

TAKING ANY STEP TO SET-UP OR INSTALL THE PRODUCTCONSTITUTES YOUR ASSENT TO AND ACCEPTANCE OF THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT. WRITTEN APPROVAL IS NOT APREREQUISITE TO THE VALIDITY OR ENFORCEABILITY OF THISAGREEMENT AND NO SOLICITATION OF ANY SUCH WRITTENAPPROVAL BY OR ON BEHALF OF YOU SHALL BE CONSTRUED AS ANINFERENCE TO THE CONTRARY. IF YOU HAVE ORDERED THISPRODUCT AND SUCH ORDER IS CONSIDERED AN OFFER BY YOU,CHECK POINT'S ACCEPTANCE OF YOUR OFFER IS EXPRESSLYCONDITIONAL ON YOUR ASSENT TO THE TERMS OF THISAGREEMENT, TO THE EXCLUSION OF ALL OTHER TERMS. IF THESETERMS ARE CONSIDERED AN OFFER BY CHECK POINT, YOURACCEPTANCE IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THISAGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,YOU MUST RETURN THIS PRODUCT WITH THE ORIGINAL PACKAGEAND THE PROOF OF PAYMENT TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED IT FORA FULL REFUND.

1 DEFINITIONS:

1 . 1 1 . 1

"Product" means the object code copy of the software program provided to You in association with this Agreement, together with the associated original electronic media and all accompanying manuals and other documentation, and together with all enhancements, upgrades, and extensions thereto that may be provided by Check Point to You from time to time.

1 . 2 1 . 2

"Licensed Configuration" means to the extent applicable, as indicated on the License Key, the choice of features and the maximum number of nodes (an internal computing device with an IP address) on the trusted side of the firewall or any other hardware or software specifications, as declared by You in Your purchase order, or request for License Key, and upon which the licensing fee was based.

753

Check Point End User License AgreementA

1 . 3 1 . 3

"Licensed-server" means the server (defined by the host ID identified by You to Check Point when obtaining the License Key) which enables the Product to operate in accordance with the Licensed Configuration.

1 . 4 1 . 4

"License Key" means the code provided to You by Check Point which enables the Product to operate on the Licensed-server for the specified Licensed Configuration.

1 . 5 1 . 5

"Third Party Software" means any software programs provided by third parties contained in the Product as detailed in the Third Party Software Addendum attached to this Agreement.

1 . 6 1 . 6

"Third Party Software Provider" means the third party which has the right to provide and grant licenses for the use of Third Party Software.

1 . 7 1 . 7

You are a "Managed Service Provider" if

a You are in the regular business of providing firewall, VPN, or IP addressing management for a fee to entities that are not Your affiliates

(each a "Service Customer"); and

b You indicated in Your purchase order or in requesting the License Key that

You intend to use the Products on behalf of Service Customers.

1.8 1.8

You are a "Standard User" if You indicated in Your purchase order or in requesting the License Key that You intend to use the Products on Your own behalf,or you obtained the products from a Managed Service Provider.

754

. . .


2 LICENSE AND RESTRICTIONS:

2 . 1 2 . 1 L I C E N S E .

Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Check Point hereby grants only to You, a non-exclusive, non-sublicensable, non-transferable license to use the copy of the Product in accordance with the relevant end user documentation provided by Check Point only on the Licensed-server and only for the Licensed Configuration. You have no right to receive, use or examine any source code or design documentation relating to the Product.

2 . 2 2 . 2 S T A N D A R D U S E R R E S T R I C T I O N S .

If You are a Standard User, the Products are licensed to You solely for use by You to provide policy management for Your own operations. No Product, nor any portion thereof, may be used by or on behalf of, accessed by, re-sold to, rented to, or distributed to any other party.

2 . 3 2 . 3 M A N A G E D S E R V I C E P R O V I D E R R E S T R I C T I O N S .

If You are a Managed Service Provider, the Products are licensed to You for use by You to provide policy management for only the operations of Your Service Customers. No Product, nor any portion thereof, except for the management of Your Service Customers, may be used by or on behalf of, accessed by, re-sold to, rented to, or distributed to any other party.

2 . 4 2 . 4 G E N E R A L R E S T R I C T I O N S .

Except for one copy solely for back-up purposes and as required by statute, You may not copy the Product, in whole or in part. You must reproduce and include the copyright notice and any other notices that appear on the original Product copy on any copy and in any media therefor. The Product is licensed to You solely for your internal use by You and for You and the Product or any portion thereof may not be used or accessed by, sub-licensed to, re-sold to, rented to, or distributed to any other party. You agree not to allow others to use the Product and You will not use the Product for the benefit of third parties. You acknowledge that the source code of the Product, and the underlying ideas or concepts, are valuable intellectual property of Check Point and You agree not to, except as expressly authorized and only to the extent established by applicable statutory law, attempt to (or permit others to) decipher, reverse translate, decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer or attempt to reconstruct or discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms or file formats or programming or interoperability interfaces of the Products by any

755


means whatsoever. You will not develop methods to enable unauthorized parties to use the Product, or to develop any other product containing any of the concepts and ideas contained in the Product. You will not (and will not allow any third party to) modify Product or incorporate any portion of Product into any other software or create a derivative work of any portion of the Product. You will not (and will not allow any third party to) remove any copyright or other proprietary notices from the Product.

2 . 5 2 . 5 S P E C I F I C R E S T R I C T I O N S .

The Product is licensed to You based on the applicable Licensed Configuration purchased. The License permits the use of the Product in accordance with the designated number of IP addresses and DNS/DHCP services. It is a violation of this End User License Agreement to create, set-up or design any hardware, software or system which alters the number of readable IP addresses presented to the Product with the intent, or resulting effect, of circumventing the Licensed Configuration. Additionally, it is a violation of this End User License Agreement to create, set-up or design any hardware, software or system which imlements more than the licensed number of DNS and DHCP services.

2 . 6 2 . 6 E V A L U A T I O N L I C E N S E .

This Section 2.6 shall only apply if You are licensing the Product for an initial thirty (30) day evaluation period. The license is valid only for a period of thirty (30) days from the delivery of the Product, and is designed to allow You to evaluate the Product during such period. In the event that You wish to enter into a longer-term license agreement with Check Point, You may request a License Key from Check Point which if provided to You will allow You to use the Product after such evaluation period, but only subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event that You determine not to enter into a licensing transaction with Check Point at the end of such thirty day evaluation period, or in the event that Check Point advises You that discussions with respect to a licensing transaction have terminated, then Your rights under this Agreement shall terminate and You shall promptly return to Check Point or destroy all copies of the Product, and so certify to Check Point.

756

. . .


2 . 7 2 . 4 D I S A B L E D L I C E N S E - S E R V E R .

The License Key You obtain from Check Point enables the Licensed-server which enables You to use the Licensed Configuration of the Product. If your Licensed-server is disabled for any reason, Check Point may, at its sole discretion, issue You another License Key which will enable You to operate this Product on a substitute Licensed-server. In this event, You agree not to use the Product on the original Licensed-server nor its License Key.

3 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT:

3 . 1 3 . 1

Check Point has no obligation to provide support, maintenance, upgrades, modifications, or new releases under this Agreement.

4 TITLE AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY:

4 . 1 4 . 1

All right, title, and interest in and to the Product shall remain with Check Point and its licensors. The Product is protected under international copyright, trademark and trade secret and patent laws. The license granted herein does not constitute a sale of the Product or any portion or copy of it.

5 TERM AND TERMINATION:

5 . 1 5 . 1

This Agreement is effective until terminated. Check Point may terminate this Agreement at any time upon Your breach of any of the provisions hereof. Upon termination of this Agreement, You agree to cease all use of the Product and to return to Check Point or destroy the Product and all documentation and related materials in your possession, and so certify to Check Point. Except for the license granted herein and as expressly provided herein, the terms of this Agreement shall survive termination.

757


6 INDEMNIFICATION:

6 . 1 6 . 1

Check Point shall have the right, but not the obligation, to defend or settle, at its option, any action at law against You arising from a claim that Your permitted use of the Product under this Agreement infringes any patent, copyright, or other ownership rights of a third party. You agree to provide Check Point with written notice of any such claim within ten (10) days of Your notice thereof and provide reasonable assistance in its defense. Check Point has sole discretion and control over such defense and all negotiations for a settlement or compromise, unless it declines to defend or settle, in which case You are free to pursue any alternative You may have.

7 LIMITED WARRANTY, WARRANTY DISCALIMERS AND LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY:

7 . 1 7 . 1 L I M I T E D W A R R A N T Y .

Check Point warrants to You that the encoding of the software program on the media on which the Product is furnished will be free from defects in material and workmanship, and that the Product shall substantially conform to its user manual, as it exists at the date of delivery, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date You receive the original License Key. Check Point's entire liability and Your exclusive remedy shall be, at Check Point's option, either: (i) return of the price paid to Check Point for the Product, resulting in the termination of this Agreement, or (ii) repair or replacement of the Product or media that does not meet this limited warranty.

EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION7.1, THE PRODUCT AND ANY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS"WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED ORIMPLIED. CHECK POINT DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTWILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. CHECK POINT DISCLAIMS ANYWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, so the above limitations may not apply to You. This warranty gives You specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state to state.

758

. . .


7 . 2 7 . 2 L I M I T A T I O N O N L I A B I L I T Y .

EXCEPT FOR BODILY INJURY OF A PERSON, IN NO EVENT WILLCHECK POINT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANYDAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THISAGREEMENT, THE PRODUCT OR ANY SERVICES UNDER ANYCONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY, FORANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), OR FOR LOSS OF ORCORRUPTION OF DATA), OR FOR COST OF PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS OR TECHNOLOGY, IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHERCHECK POINT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. CHECK POINT'S MAXIMUM LIABILITY FOR DAMAGESSHALL BE LIMITED TO THE LICENSE FEES RECEIVED BY CHECKPOINT UNDER THIS LICENSE FOR THE PARTICULAR PRODUCT(S)WHICH CAUSED THE DAMAGES.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to You.

8 GOVERNMENT REGULATION AND EXPORT CONTROL:

8 . 1 8 . 1 G O V E R N M E N T R E G U L A T I O N S .

You agree that the Product will not be shipped, transferred, or exported into any country or used in any manner prohibited by law.

8 . 2 8 . 2 E X P O R T .

The Product is subject to export control laws of the State of Israel and/or may be subject to additional export control laws applicable to You or in Your jurisdiction, including, without limitation, the United States. If the Product contains any encryption device You must contact Check Point's export regulation information page (checkpoint.com) for specific information. You agree that You will not ship, transfer, or export the Product into any country, or make available or use the Product in any manner, prohibited by law.

8 . 3

You understand and acknowledge that upon entry of the Product into the United States it becomes subject to regulation by agencies of the U.S. government, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, which prohibit export or diversion of certain products and technology to certain countries. Any and all of Your obligations with respect to the Product shall be subject in all respects to such United States laws and regulations as shall from time to time govern the license and delivery of technology and products abroad by persons subject to

759


the jurisdiction of the United States, including the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, any successor legislation, and the Export Administration Regulations ("EAR") issued by the Department of Commerce, International Trade Administration,and Bureau of Export Administration. You warrant that You will comply in all respects with the export and reexport restrictions applicable to the Product and will otherwise comply with the EAR or other United States laws and regulations in effect from time to time.

8 . 4

You warrant and agree that You are not: (i) located in, under the control of, or a national or resident of Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, Sudan or Yugoslavia, or (ii) on the U.S Treasury Department list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders.

9 GENERAL:

9 . 1 9 . 1 M I S C E L L A N E O U S .

You may not assign your rights or obligations under this Agreement without the prior written consent of Check Point. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, that provision of the Agreement will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the Agreement, and the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect. The laws of the State of Israel shall govern all issues arising under or relating to this Agreement, without giving effect to the conflict of laws principles thereof. All disputes arising under or relating to this Agreement shall be resolved exclusively in the appropriate Israeli court sitting in Tel Aviv, Israel. This Agreement will not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. This Agreement sets forth the entire understanding and agreement between You and Check Point and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties.

9 . 2 9 . 2 T H I R D P A R T Y S O F T W A R E .

The provisions of this Agreement shall apply to all Third Party Software Providers and to Third Party Software as if they were the Product and Check Point, respectively.

760

. . .


9 . 3 9 . 3 G O V E R N M E N T R E S T R I C T E D R I G H T S .

This provision applies to Product acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of any Government. The Product is a commercial product, licensed on the open market at market prices, and was developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any Government funds. Any use modification, reproduction, release, performance, display, or disclosure of the Product by any Government shall be governed solely by the terms of this Agreement and shall be prohibited except to the extent expressly permitted by the terms of this Agreement, and no license to the Product is granted to any government requiring different terms.

9 . 4 9 . 4 Q U E S T I O N S ?

Should You have any questions concerning this Agreement contact the manufacturer at Check Point Software Technologies Ltd., 3a Jabotinsky St., Ramat-Gan, Israel 52520.

761


762

. . .

. .GNU General Public License

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G N U G E N E R A L P U B L I C L I C E N S E

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

PreambleThe licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

763

GNU General Public LicenseA

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of

this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such

program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work

containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications

and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as

"you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is

not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents

constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program

does.

1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as

you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and

appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and

disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program

764

. . .


a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may

at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you

also meet all of these conditions:

a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that

you changed the files and the date of any change.

b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in

part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be

licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the

most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an

appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute

the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a

copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the

Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable

sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be

reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then

this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part

of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the

whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part

regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to

work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control

the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with

the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage

765


or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

4 You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1

and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source

code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any

third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the

corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections

1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for

noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object

code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all

the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface

definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed

need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or

binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself

accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy

from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source

code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the

object code.

5 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as

expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,

modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically

terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received

766

. . .


copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses

terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

6 You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.

However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the

Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program

(or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this

License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

7 Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to

copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by

third parties to this License.

8 If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement

or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed

on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this

License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your

obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a

patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by

all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from

distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and

the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or

other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this

section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many

people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software

distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute

software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

767


This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

9 If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder

who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical

distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this

License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

10 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of

the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be

similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later

version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of

that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this

License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software

Foundation.

11 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs

whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software

Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make

exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the

sharing and reuse of software generally.

N O W A R R A N T Y

12 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS

NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

768

. . .


PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

13 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM

(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING

RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY

OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS

BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

E N D O F T E R M S A N D C O N D I T I O N S

How to Apply These Terms to Your New ProgramsIf you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify itunder the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the FreeSoftware Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)any later version.This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty ofMERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU GeneralPublic License for more details.You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License alongwith this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

769


Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of authorGnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it undercertain conditions; type `show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.

770

. . .

. .BSD License

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B S D L I C E N S E

Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994

The Regents of the University of California.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this

list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software

developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be

used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

771

BSD LicenseA

772

. . .

. .GNU Zebra Documentation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G N U Z E B R A D O C U M E N T A T I O N

Information about GNU Zebra is from the GNU Zebra manual for zebra-0.88. The documentation is used under the terms described below:

This file documents the GNU Zebra software which managescommon TCP/IP routing protocols.

This is Edition 0.1, last updated 5 July 2000 of `The GNU ZebraManual', for Zebra Version 0.88. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Kunihiro Ishiguro

Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of thismanual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice arepreserved on all copies.

Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of thismanual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that theentire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of apermission notice identical to this one.

Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of thismanual into another language, under the above conditions formodified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated ina translation approved by Kunihiro Ishiguro.

Under the terms of the GNU license, verbatim and modified versions of the Zebra documentation in this text may be distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.

773

GNU Zebra DocumentationA

774

Documents

Check Point SecurePlatform Command Referencedownloads.checkpoint.com/.../direct/ID/6003/FILE/SPLAT_Commands.pdf · VPN-1 SmallOffice, and VPN-1 VSX are trademarks or registered trademarks